CORNELL UNIVERSITY LIBRARY GIFT OF The Estate Of Ernest W. Schoder Cornell University Library An inductive Greeic primer ,. 3 1924 031 239 944 olin,anx p^ Cornell University Library The original of tiiis book is in tine Cornell University Library. There are no known copyright restrictions in the United States on the use of the text. http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924031239944 BY ARPER, Ph.D., D.D. UNIVEESITT or CHICAGO AND L CASTLE, Ph.D. EE8ITY OF CHICAGO oo^O^o Copyright, 1898, by AMEEIOAN BOOK OOMPANT. H. & C. Ind. Gr. Prim. Iptintei bs nam. Ivteon new JBorli, in. S. B. PREFACE. ' This volume, designed like the " Inductive Greek Method " for a begin- ner's Greek book, will meet the needs of younger pupils as well as of those to whom the " Method " is adapted. While retaining all the good features of the " Method," the " Primer " will be found to differ from it in several important particulars : — 1. The Lessons are shorter. 2. The " Notes " are more copious and elementary in character. In their preparation help has been obtained from the best American editions of the Anabasis, to which credit is here given. 3. The Lessons are based upon Chapters I.-VIII. of Book I. of the Anabasis instead of on the whole of Book I. 4. There are no references to the grammars in the first half of the volume. In this part, the "Primer" contains all the grammar that is needed. In the last half, the grammatical references which are found are intended partially for a topical review of principles already known to the pupil. 5. The " Exercises " are simpler. Greek sentences for translation are abandoned early in the book, and more attention is given to the text of the Anabasis, and to rendering in Greek, English sentences based upon it. Much practice is given in rendering English in Greek, orally, as well as in written exercises. 6. As the "Latin Primer" proceeds from English Grammar to Latin by drawing on the pupil's knowledge of English Grammar to illustrate and facilitate the acquisition of Latin Grammar, so this volume calls to the pupil's aid his knowledge *of Latin Grammar. An elementary comparison between principles of Latin and Greek Grammar has been made in the "Introduction." This comparison has been supplemented by fuller state- ments and additional matter in the " Appendix.'' In the Lessons the Greek declensions are also built up partially by a comparison with the Latin. The study of Latin in our schools and acacdemies so uniformly pi'ecedes that of Greek that it seems wise to let the former serve as the stepping-stone to the latter, by calling attention to the analogies between the two languages. 3 , 4 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 7. The pupil is taught to read Greelc in the order of the original, and attention is called in many places in the " Notes " to the significance of this order. In regard to this point, as well as others pertaining to the methods of instruction, the attention of teachers is directed to the "Suggestions to Teachers " (pp. 7-9) . 8. The fii-st occurrence of words is indicated in the text by full-faced type, and in the " Vocabulary " by the number of the chapter and section in which the word occurs. 9. This volume articulates with the " Greek Prose Composition " of the same authors. The pupils who complete the " Primer " are prepared to take up the exercises of the " Composition " based on Book I., Chapter IX., of the Anabasis, or, if it is desired to defer reading Chapter IX. because of its difficulty, to proceed to the exercises based on Chapter X. 10. In the treatment of the declensions, the pupil's attention is first called to the " facts " of the second declension for a twofold reason : more second declension forms occur in the text of the first few Lessons than forms belonging to other declensions, and this declension is naturally the easiest for a beginner. Moreover, it is easy to show the similarity between this declension and the Latin second declension. The first declension is treated next. Then the pupil's attention is directed to verb-forms, review of the first two declensions, and adjectives and other words declined according to the vowel-declension, while the third declension is gradually built up from the text read. By this plan of procedure the pupil will have sufiicient time ■ to fix in memory the forms of the vowel-declension without confounding them with those of the consonant-declension. In the preparation of this volume we have received much help from Professor E. B. Clapp, of Yale University, Mr. I. B. Burgess, Mr. F. M. Bronson, and Mr. M. C. Gile, of the Morgan Park Academy of the University of Chicago, and Dr. F. J. Miller and Mr. E. J. Goodspeed, of the University of Chicago. The constant and efiioient aid of the editors of the American Book Company has added not a little to whatever of merit the volume may possess. The "Primer "is issued with the hope that it'may aid in making the elementary work in the study of Greek less a task and more a work of love. We shall be grateful to any who will kindly indicate to us any errors which the book may contain, or who will suggest improvements. William R. Harper. Clarence F. Castle. The University of Chicago, August, 1893. TABLE OF CONTENTS. PAGE List op Abbreviations 6 Suggestions to Teacheks 7 Introduction .... 11 Lessons , 23 Text of Anabasis I. i.-viii 301 WoKD-roR-WoRD Parallel 337 Free Translation 343 Appendix 345 Vocabulary 387 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. Map showing Xenophon's Route 300 oTrAiTijs 301 Gold Daric 303 TreXTacTTiJs with Amazonian shield 305 Paris with to^ov 306 (TTAeyytSes 306 Soldier in x'tcJi' 307 Diana in p^iToli/ 307 Greek Helmets 308 Persian War Chariot .... 308 Greek War Chariot 308 (TaXiriyKTiji 309 Map of Menon's Route . . . 309 Section of Tptijpijs .... 310 aKivoLKrii 311 PAQE Map of Vicinity of Issus . . . 317" Ostrich 321 Mill and Section of Upper Stone (ovos aXeTtjs) 322 Royal Necklace 322 Royal Bracelet 322 (TKTf7rT0V)(Qi 327 8paravTj't>6p(K 329 6d,pai 331 Trpo/jLtTunriSiov 332 pAxaipai 332 Persian Foot Soldiers .... 332 Diagram of Position of Troops before the Battle of Cunaxa . 333 hopv 335 ABBREVIATIONS. A., ace, accusative. Ab., abl., ablative. abs., absolute. act., active. acy., adjective. adv., adverb. Anab., Anabasis. aor., aorist. App., Appendix. art., article. attrib., attributive, c/., confer, compare. Chap., Chapter. circum., circumstantial. com., commonly. comp., comparative, compound, compo- sition. cond., condition, conditional. > conj., conjunction, conjugation. contr., contract, contracted. D., dat., dative. decl., declension. demons., demonstrative. dep., deponent. ' dir., direct. disc, discourse. Dor., Doric. e.g., exempli gratia, for example. end., enclitic. Sng., English. etc., et cetera, and so forth. ff., following. fern., feminine. foil., followed. fr., from. freq., frequently. fut., future. G., Goodwin's Greek Grammar. G., gen., genitive. gen., general, generally. gend., gender. gov., governs, governing. Gram., Grammar. H., Hadley and Allen's Grammar. hist., historical. i.e., id est, that is. imp., imperf., imperfect. impv., imv., imperative. ind., indie, indicative. indef., indefinite. indir., indirect. infin., infinitive. Int., Introduction. inti:, intrans., intransitive. Lat,, Latin. lit., literal, literally. Less., Lesson. masc, masculine. mid., middle. iV., nom., nominative. N., Note. neg., negative. neut., neuter. obj., object. 06s., Observation. opt., optative. p.,pp., page, pages. part., partitive. parte, participle. pass., passive. per.,pers., person. perf., perfect. plu.,phir., plural. phip., pluperfect. pass., possess., possessive, possessor, pos- session. postpos., postpositive. pred., predicate. prep., preposition, pres.,. present. pro., pron., pronoun. reg., regularly. rel., relative. Rem,., Remark. sc, scilicet, supply. sing., singular.' sub., subj., subject. subj., subjunc, subjunctive. svbst., substantive. superl,, superlative. suppl., supplementary. trans., translate, transitive. v., voc, vocative. viz., namely. Vocab., Vocabulary. w., with. SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. [It is hoped that the following suggestions may prove helpful to those who use the " inductive method " for the first time.] t 1. Use one third of the time of each recitation in directing the attention of the class to the " Text " of the " advance " lesson for the following day : (a) Let the teacher read the text aloud expressively, -with proper em- phasis and inflections. (6) Let different pupils read the Greek aloud until it has been read several times, (c) Let the pupils be asked to give in their own words the thought which they have obtained from the reading of the Greek, (rf) Ask the pupils for any word or words in the text, which they have had before, (e) Call the attention of the class to some word in previous lessons which suggests the meaning of a word in the text under consideration. (/) Suggest the division of compounds into their elements, and thus strive to draw from the pupil the meaning of the word, (g) If possible, call the attention of the class to some English word which will suggest the meaning of the Greek word under consideration. (7j) Call to your aid any other language with which you know that the clans is familiar, if thereby the meaning of words or idioms will be illustrated ; but care should be taken to cite nothing which will, confuse the pupil's mind, (i) Until the pupils know the pai'adigms call forth from them the cases, tenses, modes, parts o£ speech, etc., in the "Text" by analysis of the words. (/) Use any method which you can devise to call out all that the pupils know about the " Text," but do not stop with their knowledge ; under your guidance the class will make new attainments in knowledge, and that, too, for themselves, and in such an entertaining way that much of it will be impressed indelibly upon their minds, (fc) Do not permit the class to use the "Notes" until you have gone over the Greek with them as before described, (i) Do not tell the class anything which you can make them tell you by a little guidance, (m) In the early stages care must be taken to suggest only those " facts " which are closely connected with the " facts " of previous lessons. 7 8 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 2. Do not fail to have the class read the Greek of each " advance " lesson aloud, and insist that it be done with facility and expression. 3. Require each pupil so to master the text that he can repeat or write the original accurately and readily from the English parallel. 4. When all books in the class have been closed, read the Greek text of the " immediate review lesson " (i.e., review of the advance lesson of the day before,) to the class, and let them translate it at hearing. This should be a daily exercise, or nearly so. (See 1.) 5. For the first twenty or thirty " Lessons," let the class read aloud in Greek at each recitation as much as possible of the " Text " of all preceding lessons. A portion of this work may be done in concert. Ascertain whether the members of the class apprehend the thought by calling upon them for the thought expressed in their own language — not a translation. 6. As soon, as the pupils have made sufficient progress, point out to them the reasons for the order of arrangement of the words in the original. Show them that the Greek order of words is as. natural for the Greek as the English order for us. Many students have gone through college with the notion that the words of the Greek authors which they have read are arranged without regard for beauty or fitness. 7. Let every point in the " Notes " be called up in the class-room in one form or another. 8. Require the pupil to memorize the substance of the " Observations," if not the language. The " Notes " are intended to be read, the " Observations " to be memorized. 9. The " Vocabularies " should be mastered so as to be recited from English into Greek as well as from Greek into English. 10. In translating English into Greek, insist upon it that the pupils model the sentences after the Greek original. It may be found advisable, especially at first, to require each student to write out the " Exercises for Oral Trans- lation '' on paper, and then, after the sentences have been corrected before the whole class, to call for the exercises orally as a part of the review lesson. The " Exercises for Written Translation " should always be treated in this way. 11. The English parallel will be found especially helpful in acquiring vocabulary, pronunciation, and order of the Greek words. Do not neglect suggestion 3. 12. Divide the " Lessons " in the " Primer " to suit the needs and capacity of the class ; the " Primer " contains matter for the work of a school year. 1-3. The " Review Lessons " are very important : subdivide them to suit the needs of the class. 14. Requii-e the mastery of each particular paradigm the first time it SUGGESTIONS TO TEACHERS. 9 occurs. Do not pass to a new one till this is accomplished. If necessary, assign a very short " advance " lesson, and insist that the particular paradigm in question be learned. 15. As a general rule assign short " advance " lessons and much review. Nothing is gained, but much is lost, by advancing too fast with beginners. But keep your class busy ! 16. Do not tell your pupils everything which can be said about a word when it first occurs. Let what you say be closely connected with what the pupils already know. In making general statements drawn from the " Text " already studied, say nothing about exceptions which mayoccur subsequently. Just enough is better than too much. 17. To avoid monotony, vary the worl^ from time to time ; e.g., give short English or Greek sentences based upon the lesson, and let the pupil translate them at hearing ; give a free translation of the lesson and let the pupil give the Greek at hearing ; put English sentences on the board, and let the pupils put them into (Jreek on paper or on the board ; occasional written recitar tions of the nature of short examinations are very helpful. 18. Study your class, and employ the methods which seem best to you under the circumstances. 19. The pupil should be taught to comprehend the meaning of the Greek in the order in which the words stand iu the text, and not by rearranging the Greek words in the order of the English translation, nor by first finding the subject and then the predicate or vice versaA (See 6.) To accomplish this will require considerable time, and too much must not be expected of a beginner ; yet it is very important that the pupil make a right beginning. 20. The pupil should also be taught to translate in idiomatic English, not in a word for word parallel. To read and to understand Greek in the original order of the words, without translation, is of transcendent importance to the student of Greek ; but to translate the Greek into English is a very different, though hardly less important, matter. 21. When the attainments of the class are sufficient to justify it, easy passages from other parts of the Anabasis may be put on the board for them to translate at sight. The discovery that they can perform this task will encourage the class, and at the same time the teacher can ascertain their habits in regard to translating an advance lesson. In an exercise of this sort an opportunity is afforded the teacher to correct bad habits of study, and to show to the student the proper method of preparing a language lesson. 'It is hoped that the teacher is familiar with Professor 'Ba.Wa Art of Reading Latin ; the same method should be used ia reading Greek. INTRODUCTION. 1. In beginning the study of the Greek language, it is useful to observe that it is closely related to the Latin language, and resembles it in many particulars. In the following pages it is proposed to indicate briefly some of the most evident of these similarities. A few other facts about the Greek language and its treatment in grammars, which do not strictly fall under the head of similarities in language, are incorporated here, either because they seem to be necessary as preliminaries, or because it will be convenient to make subsequent references to them. 2. Letters. — The Romans are indebted to the Greeks for their alphabet. The Greeks derived their alphabet from the Phoenicians. Many striking resemblances are found in the two alphabets, and the following characters occur in both.: A, B, E, Z, H, I, K, M, N, 0, P, T, X. Several other letters of the Greek alphabet differ so slightly irom their Eoman equivalents that they will be easily recognized, e.g., a, /8, 8, c, t, k, o, s, t.^ What are the Roman letters which correspond to these letters ? Still other letters, when placed side by side with the Latin, show essential similarities (see Appen- dix 1). The Greek alphabet has twenty-four letters. How many has the Latin ? 3. Vowels and Consonants. — In both Latin and Greek the letters are divided into vowels and consonants. The vowels may be long, short, or doubtful, i.e., sometimes long and at other times short. The usual marks for quantity, long', short", are not needed in Greek except to mark doubtful vowels ; for some vowels are always short, others always long. Quantity thus becomes a simple matter. 11 12 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 4. Sounds of Vowels. — The Greek vowel-sounds are the same as , the Latin (according to the Eoman pronunciation), except that Greek has one sound for which no equivalent is found in Latin, the sound of French u. 5. Diphthongs. — Two vowel-sounds often unite in a single syllable in Greek as well as in Latin. The name diphthong (a Greek word meaning double-sound) is given to this combination. The last vowel of 'a diphthong is usually a dose vowel; the first one is an open vowel (or medial by some classifications in Latin). In the case of ui two close vowels unite to form the diphthong, which has its Greek equivalent. The Appendix will supply more complete details. 6. Sounds of Consonants. — Most of the Greek consonants have Latin equivalents. The Appendix will supply details. 7. Classification of Consonants. — The Eoman liquids, 1, m, n, r, represent the Greek liquids. The labials, p, b, ph ; Unguals, t, d, th ; palatals, c or k, g, ch, — all are represented by corresponding mutes in Greek. The nasals, m, n, ng; double consonants, x (= cs), z (= ds), have their equivalents iu Greek. See Appendix. 8. Vowel and Consonant Changes. — The familiar terms contraction, interchange, and lengthening of vowels will be met with in the study of Greek. These changes, as well as many euphonic changes in consonants, can be best illustrated when they appear in the " Lessons " which follow. 9. Syllables. — A word has as many syllables as it contains vowels and diphthongs: the last syllable of a word is called the ultima; the next to the last, the penult; the one before the penult, the antepenult : true in Latin and in Greek. 10. Quantity. — A syllable is long by nature when it contains a long vowel or diphthong : equally true for both languages. 11. Accent. — Accent is practically a stress of voice upon a par- ticular syllable. Latin does not need special marks of accent; for the rule, " Accent the penult when long, otherwise the ante- penult," is suflBcieut. Accent in Greek, however, is not so simple INTRODUCTION. 13 a matter : There are three accent marks which are sometimes seen in our " Readers " and " Primers " to mark " inflection " ; they are, acMte', circumflex", grave\ The rules for their use will be deter- mined later. Practically all of these accents indicate a slight stress of voice upon the syllable over which they stand. In Latin the quantity of the penult determines the accent, in Greek (generally) thai of the ultima. 12. Proclitics. — Words which attach themselves so closely to a following word as not to have an accent of their own are called proclitics {leaning forward), e.g., in in the phrase in partes. There are proclitics in Greek. See Appendix. 13. Enclitics. — Words which lean on a preceding word and have no separate accent are called enclitics, e.g., que in minim^que. This statement is also true of Greek. See Appendix. 14. Parts of Speech. — In Latin and in Greek the same parts of speech are formd, except that the Greek adds the definite article to the list found in the Latin. 15. Inflection. — Nouns, adjectives, pronouns, and verbs are in- flected to show their relation to other words in the sentence, thus giving the same word different forms for different relations ; e.g., Galhis (nom.), Galium (ace), represent a Gaul in different relations, the nominative as actor, the accusative as acted upon. Inflection is effected by adding certain endings to a common part called the stem. 16. Properties of Nouns. — They are gender, number, and case. This applies to adjectives and pronouns, and to the Greek article. 17. Gender. — ^ There are three genders, masculine, feminine, and neuter, in both Latin and Greek. 18. Numbers. — In addition to the singular and plural numbers which Latin and Greek have in common, there is a dual number in Greek, used of two only ; yet the plural is often used instead of the dual. 19. Cases. — There are six cases in Latin : nominative, genitive, dative, accusative, vocative, and ablative. Greek has all of these except the ablative. They correspond exactly in most of their uses, as will be seen under syntax. 14 INDUCTIVE GREEK. PRIMER. 20. Stem and Case-endings. — The stem is that part of a word which is common to all of its cases and from which all of the cases are formed by adding case-endings. (See 15.) The union of stem and case-endings causes many changes. See declensions in Appendix. 21. Stem-endings and Declensions. — In Latin there are stems ending in a, o, i, u, and consonants. In nouns of the first declension the stem ends in a, of the second in o, of the third in consonants and in i. In like manner in Greek, the stem of first declension nouns ends in an a^-sound, the stem of second declension nouns ends in an o-sound, and third declension nouns include stems ending in con- sonants and in an i^-sound (Greek includes also stems which end in the vowel corresponding to French u). For further particulars, see Appendix. 22. Cases alike. — In the singular of Latin and Greek nouns the nominative and vocative are often alike, and in the plural always so. The nominative, accusative, and vocative of neuters are alike, and in the plural they end in an a^-sound. 23. Similarities in Case-endings. — The Latin case-endings corre- spond more or less closely to the Greek in declensions where the stems are alike in the two languages ; thus stems ending in the a-sound, o-sound, and consonants show many similarities in declen- sion. The student will do well to remember this fact, and to wait for further particulars in connection with the " Lessons." 24. Adjectives of the Vowel-Declension. — Adjectives like bonus, ending in -us, -a, -um in the nominative singular, follow the second or o-decleijsion in the masculine and neuter, and the first or a-declen- sion in the feminine. In like manner in Greek, adjectives of the vowel-declension follow the o-declension in the masculine and neuter, and the a-declension in the feminine. 25. Adjectives of the Third Declension. — In Latin they may have, (1) a different form for each gender, (2) masculine and feminine alike, or (3) one form for all genders. The masculine and feminine > Pronounced like a in father. ' Pronounced like i in pique. INTRODUCTION. 15 in Greek may be alike ; but when they differ, the feminine follows the first declension. 26. Comparison of Adjectives. — Adjectives are compared by means of certain terminations added to the stem of the positive in Latin ; comp. -lor, -lor, -ius ; superl. -issimus, -issima, -issimum. In Greek one method of comparison consists in adding certain endings to the root. See Appendix. A more common method of comparison in Greek is to add certain other endings to the masculine stem of the positive. See Appendix. 27. Cardinal Numbers. — Many of the Latin and Greek cardinal numbers are identical, and they are partly declinable and partly indeclinable. Compare the following : — Latin: duo, tres, sex, septem, ooto, decern, Greek equivalent : dyo,i treis, hex, hepta, octo, deka, Latin: undecim, duodecim, tredecim, centum. Greek equivalent : hendeka, dodeka, treis-(kai)-deka, hekaton. 28. Pronouns. — The Latin personal, relative, demonstrative, inter- rogative, indefinite, indefinite-relative, and reflexive pronouns have equivalents in Greek. The Greek pronouns are inflected, and in many points show resemblances to the Latin in formation and inflection. See Appendix. VERBS. The following similarities between Latin and Greek verbs are noticeable : — 29. Voice. — Active, passive, and deponent verbs are common to both languages. Greek adds a middle voice, which represents the subject as acting (1) on himself, (2) for himself, or (3) in a manner but slightly different from the active voice. 30. Modes. — The Greek language has one more mode than the Latin, viz., the optative. The other modes are the indicative, sm&- junctive, imperative, and the infinitive and participle, which are essen- tially nouns. » The Greek numerals are here transliterated into Eoman letters for the sake of comparison. 16 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 31. Tenses. — The present, imperfect, future, perfect, future perfect, and pluperfect are common to both Latin and Greek. The Greek has a special tense, the aor/st, for indefinite action. The tenses may be divided into principal (those which express present or future time) and historical (those which express past time). 32. Inflection. — The different forms of the verb are made by adding to the different stems certain endings, which in finite modes distinguish the different persons and numbers. These are some- times called personal endings. 33. Formation of Tenses. — The different tenses are formed from a common basis, which may be called a theme or verb-stem, by the addition of suffixes or prefixes. These prefixes and suffixes con- stitute the "formative elements of the verb." They may distinguish voice, mode, tense, person, and number, which are the properties of verbs. Starting with the verb-stem ama, the present tense can be formed by adding the personal endings, (o), s, t, mus, tis, nt. In a similar manner the present tense of the Greek verbs is formed and inflected. If a Latin imperfect is desired, the endings bam, bas, bat, bamus, batis, bant must be added to the stem. The Greek imperfect is formed from the theme by means of a prefix and by the addition of personal endings. The Latin future employs endings of its own; e.g., bo, bis, bit, bimus, bitis, bunt. In like manner the Greek employs the s-sound with a vowel and personal endings. This will illustrate briefly the way in which tenses are formed. The " Lessons " and Appendix will give a complete survey. 34. Formation of Modes. — Latin amem, amarem, amare, amato, all contain certain elements which distinguish them- as belonging to certain modes. So in the Greek verb there are mode-suffixes, to distinguish other modes from the indicative. 35. Formation of Voice. — In Latin there are different sets of endings for the active and the passive voice. In a similar manner active, middle, and passive voices are distinguished in Greek. The foregoing statements have helped to show the close relation- ship which exists between Latin and Greek words in etymology. If the attention be directed to the subject of syntax, this relation- INTRODUCTION. 17 ship will be exhibited still more clearly. In the paragraphs which follow, unless otherwise specified, all statements are true of both Latin and Greek. SYNTAX. 36. Sentences. — Syntax treats of the construction of sentences. Eveiy complete sentence must have a subject and a predicate. Both subject and predicate may each be a single word, or indefinitely expanded by modifiers of different kinds. As the simple siibject must be a noun or something used as a noun, its modifiers are adjectives, adjective phrases, and adjective clauses. The modifiers of the predicate, the basis of which must be a verb, are adverbs, adverbial phrases, or adverbial clauses ; but a transitive verb has an object which must be a noun or its equivalent, hence the object may be modified like the subject. A predicate noun may take modifiers like any other noun. 37. Classification of Sentences. — Sentences may be classified as simple and complex. A simple sentence consists of a single sentence. A complex sentence consists of a principal sentence modified by one or more dependent sentences. Two or more simple sentences may be united by coordinate conjunctions ; such sentences are often called compound sentences. Again, sentences may be distinguished as — 1. Declarative : those which make an assertion. 2. Interrogative : those which ask questions. 3. Imperative: those which have the form of a command, an exhortation, or an entreaty. , 4. Exclamatory : those which make an exclamation. 38. The Nominative Case. — This case is used (1) as subject of a finite verb, or (2) predicate with intransitive or passive verbs, or with the copula (verb to be). Nominative is applied to this case because it is the form of the word (i.e., case,) which names the subject of the sentence. 39. The Accusative Case. — This case expresses that upon which the action of the verb falls. It is therefore the case of the direct IND. GR. PE. — 2 ' 18 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. object. The object may repeat the verb in the form of a noun : it is then called a cognate accusative. Verbs of asking (and others) may have two objects, one of the person and one of the thing. Verbs of making (and others) may have two objects of the same person or thing; or one of these objects may be regarded as a predicate accusative. The accusative may specify that to which something applies, accusative of specification. In many words and phrases the accusative has the force of an adverb, adverbial accusative. The answer to the question " How long ? " is expressed by the accusative, , accusative of extent. The accusative is used after prepositions. 40. The Genitive Case. — The genitive case is the form of a word which is regularly used to express the relation of one noun to another. It corresponds to the English possessive or " of " with its object. It is most commonly used with nouns, but is also used with verbs, adjectives, and adverbs. 41. Genitive with Nouns. — When the genitive limits or qualifies a noun it may express various relations, e.g. : — (a) Possession or authorship. (b) The subject of an action, Subjective Genitive. (c) The object of an action, Objective Genitive. (d) The whole of which a part is taken, Partitive Genitive: (e) The measure, value, or size of something. Genitive of Measure. These are not the only relations, but they illustrate the use of the genitive with substantives. 42. Genitive with Verbs. — The genitive in Greek has to do partial service for the Latin ablative, so that its uses are more numerous and varied in Greek than in Latin. Some of the uses which are common to both languages are : — (a) With verbs of remembering, forgetting, and reminding. (6) With verbs ot judicial action. (c) With verbs of emotion. (d) With verbs of plenty and want. Other uses of the genitive in Greek may be illustrated from English expressions, to taste of, take (some) of, take hold of, etc.; INTRODUCTION. 19 the action of the verb affects the object only in part : all such verbs may take the genitive in Greek, hence the genitive is used with — (e) Verbs of sharing. (/) Verbs of touching, taking hold of, beginning. (gr) Verbs of aiming, reaching, and attaining. (h) Verbs of ruling and leading. (i) Many verbs expressing action of the senses and the mind; e.g., taste, smell, hear, remember (cf. a), forget, care for, spare, neglect, and desire, (j) With verbs of valuing, buying, and selling. In its ablative use, the genitive is used with {¥) Verbs of separation. (V) Verbs of superiority and inferiority. (m) Many verbs to express source. 43. Genitive with Adjectives. — In Latin many adjectives govern the genitive, and in Greek adjectives which correspond either in derivation or meaning to verbs which govern the genitive are used with the genitive. 44. Genitive with Adverbs. — In Greek adverbs derived from adjectives which govern the genitive may take the genitive ; also many adverbs of place. 45. Genitive with Prepositions. — The genitive is used after several prepositions. In this way this case helps to supply the lack of the ablative. 46. Genitive after Comparatives. — Comparatives without the word for than take the ablative in Latin, the genitive in Greek. 47. The Dative Case. — This is the case of the indirect object corresponding to the English to or for with an object. It may be used with verbs both, transitive and intransitive, and with adjectives. The possessor with the verb to be is expressed by the dative. Many verbs compounded with prepositions govern the dative. The dative in Greek also does partial service for the Latin ablative, thus — 20 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. (a) Words of association and likeness take the dative. (6) Instrument, means, manner, and cause are expressed by the dative. (c) ■* Time at which is expressed by the dative. (d) The dative is used with prepositions. 48. Agreement of Adjectives. — An adjective must agree with its noun in gender, number, and case. 49. Agreement of Relative. — A relative pronoun must agree with its antecedent in number aud gender. 50. Agreement of Verb with Subject. — A verb must agree with its subject-nominative in person and number. But the Greek neuter plural hasdts verb in the singular : there are exceptions in Xenophon. 51. The Subject of an Infinitive is in the accusative case. 52. Tenses. — The Greek tenses do not simply distinguish time, as they do in English. Besides this they show whether the action of the verb is a progressive one, i.e., continued or repeated; completed; or merely brought to pass, i.e., indefinite. The distinction of action belongs to all modes, while the dis- tinction of time is nearly confined to the indicative ; other modes express time only as it is implied in tlie connection. 53. The Tenses of the Indicative Mode. — The present, imperfect, future, future perfect, and pluperfect in both Latin and Greek are, in the main, alike in usage. Exceptions will be noted elsewhere. The Greek per/eci corresponds to the TiaAim. perfect definite, and the Greek aorist (meaning indefinite) does duty instead of the perfect indefinite of the Latin. The present and imperfect represent the action as continued or repeated; the perfect, pluperfect, and future perfect as completed; the aorist and future as indefinite (ef. 52). The present and perfect express present time; the imperfect, aorist, and pluperfect, past time ; the future and future perfect, future time. 54. Tenses in Other Modes. — In the other modes, subjunctive, optative, imperative, and infinitive, the tenses do not of themselves designate time. It may be implied in the connection. INTRODUCTION. 21 The present denotes an action simply as continued or repeated. The aorist denotes an action simply as brought to pass, i.e., indefinite. The perfect denotes an action simply as completed. 55. The Participle. — In Greek the tenses of the participles denote time relatively to that of the verb on -which they depend. The present and perfect participles denote time relatively presemf, the aorist participle time relatively past, the future participle time relatively future. 56. Use of the Indicative Mode. — The indicative mode is used in making assertions and in asking questions. 57. Use of Other Modes. — In a general way the Latia imperative, infinitive, and subjunctive correspond in signification to the same modes in Greek, but the Greek has an additional mode, the optative, which has some of the functions of the Latin subjunctive. It is necessary to defer any detailed treatment of the syntax of the Greek modes till instances occur in the " Lessons." See Appendix. 58. Attributive Participle. — The participle, like an adjective, may qualify a substantive as an attributive. 59. Predicate Participle. — When the participle forms a part of the predicate and is asserted of its substantive, it is called a predicate participle. Such participles may add some circumstance connected with the action of the principal verb: they are then called circumstantial participles. In Greek the predicate participle may be closely con- nected with the verb, and supply an essential part of the predicate, belonging either to the subject or to the object of the principal verb : it is then called a supplementary participle. In this supple- mentary use the participle is often to be translated by an English infinitive, or by a clause introduced by that. 60. The Genitive Absolute. — The circumstantial participle may be joined with a genitive not immediately dependent upon any word in the sentence. The genitive and the participle together are called the genitive absolute, and are usually to be translated by a subordinate clause. Of. the Latin Ablative Absolute. SUGGESTIONS TO PUPILS. In studying the " Lessons " of the " Primer " observe the following suggestions : — 1. Beginning with the first word of the text (Aa-pel-ov in Lesson I.) observe the form of each Greek letter ; the transliteration in English letters below it ; the num- ber of letters in each syllable; the vowels and consonants in each syllable, and whether the syllable contains a diphthong; the number of syllables in the word ; the place of the accent, i.e., whether upon the ultima (Int. 9), the penult (Int. 9), or antepenult (Int. 9) ; the character of the accent, i.e., whether it is written (' ) (as on -pel- in Aa-pei-ov), or (' ) (as on Kal), or (") (as on -irac- in 7ra?-5es). 2. Read carefully the " Note " upon the word. 3. Then pronounce the word aloud, and immediately after the pronunciation utter the translation given below the word (this, too, aloud) . Repeat this process several times. 4. Next copy the word on paper several times, and after each separate act of copy- ing utter the translation of the word aloud. 5. Write the word from memory a few times, comparing the result with the printed form. 6. Write out the English translation on paper; close the "Primer," and below the translation reproduce the Greek from memory ; and each time a Greek word is written pronounce it aloud, and also the translation aloud. The appearance, sound, and sense of each word should always be associated. 7. Treat the remaining words of the " Text " in the same way, but never leave a word till It has been thoroughly mastered. 8. After mastering the words separately, pronounce a phrase or a whole clause of the Greek aloud, and immediately after it the English translation aloud. 9. Write out the English translation of a clause in the natural English order, e.g., Two sons are born of Darius and of Pary satis ; close the "Primer," and below the translation write from memory, as nearly as you can, the Greek in the order of the Greek words in the " Text " ; compare the result with the " Text," and notice all words wrongly placed or accented. 10. Nothing but absolute mastery of every sentence of the Greek will answer the purpose. 11. The " Observations " contain the facts of the lesson to which attention is called in the " Notes " ; their substance should be memorized. 12. The "Vocabularies" should be memorized so as to be recited from Greek into English and from English into Greek. 13. All Greek " Exercises " should be pronounced aloud. 14. The " Topics for Study " will be helpful for self-examination upon the lesson. 22 INDUCTIVE GEEEK PRIMER. LESSON I. 1. TEXT. [For a few lessons the words will be divided into syllables, and the length of the vowels (when not united in diphthongs or marked by a circumflex accent) will be indicated by marks over them, " for a long vowel, " for a short one. Diphthongs and all vowels over which the circumflex accent is found are long iu quantity. The text as it ordinarily appears will be found on pages 301-336._ All words are printed in heavy-faced type on their first occurrence.] Ad-peC-ou Kal nd-pi)-(rd-Ti-6os ■yi-'yvov-Tai irat-Ses 8u-o, Da-rei-ou kai Pa-ry-sa-ti-dos gi-gnon-tai pai-des dy-o, Of-Darius and of-Parysatis are-horn sons two, 2. NOTES. 1. AorpeC-ov, of Darius (note the orthography of the English word) : (a) A word of three syllables, accented upon the penult, the second syllable from the end of the word; a has the sound of a in father, ti^ (a diphthong) the sound of ei in height, ou (another diph- thong) the sound of ou in yowth. (6) The consonants A and p are sounded like the English d and Y. (c) The mark ( ' ) over the penult of this word is the acute accent, and indicates where the stress of voice is to be put in pronouncing the word (Int. 11). (d) The ending -ov indicates the gen. sing. (e) The genitive case corresponds with the Latin gen. and the English objective with of, or possessive (Int. 19). 1 Some teachers may prefer to give ei the Bound of ei in eight, which authority favors; but the sound of ez in height is perhaps more generally used for et at present. It is a matter for regret that there is not uniformity of usage among teachers. 23 24 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 2. KaV, and: (a) a word of one syllable; (&) the diphthong at = 1 iiii pine (= ei in height), cf. « in Ad-pti-ov and note that at and £t have the same sound ; (c) the mark ( ' ) (drawn from left to right) is called the grave accent (Int. 11) ; like the acute, it indicates where the stress of voice is to be laid. 3. IIopiiiraTiiB-os, of Parysatis : (a) five syllables : five short vowels : a = d in pdpa ; i; (Eng. y) is sounded like the German 11 or French u, produced by placing the lips for oo in moon and sounding ee in thee ; I = i in pit ; 5 = o in obey ; (6) tt, t, = Eng. p, t (Int. 7) ; (c) two characters for Eng. s, n- and s, the latter used only at the end of, a ' word ; they have the sound of s in yes, never of z ; (d!) -Ss indicates the gen. sing. ; cf. -ov in Aaptt-ov, and note that the Greek language, like the Latin, has more than one declension (Int. 21) . 4. -ytYvo-vToi, (they) are born : (a) y = g in go, never soft like j ; (6) -VT indicates 3d plu., they, cf. Latin ama-nt ; (c) -vtoi indicates 3d plu. passive, cf. Lat. amo-ntur. 5. IlatS-cs, children, sons : (a) no new letters in this word ; at, a diphthong as in koI, n. 2, = i in pine. (&) £ = e in met ; -es, = es in yes, is a case-ending like -os in Ilapv- o-ttTtS-os, but -es indicates the nom. plu., cf. Lat. 7ionor-es, Eng. box-es (remember that £s does not have the sound ez). (c) Associate the gen. sing, ending -os with the nom. plu. ending -es as belonging to the same declension, whereas -ou, cf. AaptL-ov, indicates the gen. sing, of another declension. (d) The accent (") over the penult of this word is called the circurnflex accent, and like thie acute and grave indicates where the stress of voice is to be placed. All syllables over which the cir- cumflex accent is placed are long in quantity ; cf. AdpeCov, and note that either the aciUe or circumflex accent may stand over the penult ; and that when a diphthong is accented, the accent is placed over the second vowel. 6. 8iio, two, Latin duo (Int. 27) ; cf. Adpclov, and note that the acute accent stands over either long or short syllables, since v in Suo is short, and « in Aapaov is a diphthong, and diphthongs are always long in quantity. 1 I.e., has the sound of. LESSON I. 25 3. OBSERVATIONS.! 1. The vowels found in this lesson are : a, £, i, o, v; e and o are always short; a, i, v are short in some words, long in others (Int. 10). The diphthongs in the lesson are ai, a, ov. 2. The consonants in this lesson are y, A 8, k, v, II tt, p, o- s, t. 3. s stands at the end of a word ; elsewhere o-. 4. The Greek accents are acute, circumflex, and grave. 5. The acute stands over long or short syllables. •• 6. The circumflex stands over long syllables only. 7. The acute stands over the penult or antepenult. 8. The circumflex stands over the penult. 9. The grave accent stands over the ultima only. 10. In Greek, as in Latin, there are different declensions; the genitive singular of one declension ends in -ou ; the genitive singu- lar of another declension ends in -os, nominative plural in -es- 4. EXERCISES. I. Transliterate: 1. Seo-ttotoi).^ 2. toD. 3. yevos. 4. AapeiSs- 6. Kupou. 6. vous. 7. ytyvtrca. 8. Aaptiov. 9. K.vpov. 10. 81. 11. Transliterate : 1. nous. 2. ggnei. 3. pais. 4. Dareion. 5. de. 6. tas. 7. sou. 8. eglgneto. 9. Cyrou. 10. paidg. 5. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. The Greek vowels in this lesson and their sounds. 2. The consonants in this lesson. 3. The Greek accents. 4. Place of ac- cent for diphthongs. 5. Accent of the antepenult. 6. Accent of penult. 7. Accent of the ultima. 8. Accent for short syllables. 9. Accent for long syllables. 10. Vowels always short; doubt- ful. 11. Quantity of diphthongs. 12. Uses of a- and s. 13. Sound of V. 14. Endings : | Gen. sing, -ov, { ^'^^ 'p" J J 'It is expected that the pupil will verify the " Observatioos " from the "Text" and "Notee." 2 Pronounce the Greek exerclBes aloud. Follow the same order in all subsequent lessons. 26 INDUCTIVE GREEK PKIMER. LESSON II. 1. TEXT. [The quantity of e, u, is no longer marked.] Ad-pet-ov Koi Ila-pv aa-TL-8o<; yt-yvov-Tai Trat-Ses Su-o, Da-rei-ou kai Pa-ry-sa-ti-dos gi-gnon-tai pai-des dy-o Of-Darius and of-Parysatis are-born sons^ two,, Trp€-{rpiS-T€-pos |i€V ' Ap-Td-|€'p-|iis, vc-w-re-pos 8e Kv-pos- pre-sby-te-ros men Ar-ta-xer-xes, ne-6-te-ros de Ky-ros. elder Artaxerxes, younger and Cyrus. 2. NOTES. 1. IIpeo-pvTep-os, elder; cf. presbyter, presbyterian : {a) explanatory of irttiSes and in the same case, nom. sing. (6) Belongs to the same declension as Aapeibu ; -os indicates the nom. sing. ; hence we have the endings of two cases in this declen- sion : nom. sing, -os, gen. sing. -ov. What will be the nom. sing, of Aapuov ? Put -OS in place of -ov, and we have the form (except the accent) : cf. Tlapva-arXS-os, I. N. 3, d/ and note that -os is the gen. ending in a different declension — a declension in which -es indicates the nom. plu. ; cf. iraiS-es, I. n. 5. (c) The acute accent may stand on the antepenult, the third syllable from the end of the word. 2. (lev : (a) a particle which is followed by 8e in a correlative clause (vewTepos Se) ; jtieV . . . Se mark a slight contrast between TTpeo-pvTepoi and vtctfrepos which may be shown in English by putting a slight emphasis upon elder and younger; they are sometimes trans- lated on the one hand, . . . on the other hand, but more often fiev is untranslatable (except by emphasizing the proper word or words), and 8c is then to be rendered and or but; (b) cf. koI in the text, and note that the grave accent is found only upon the ultima. ^ References to preceding lessons are thus indicated. LESSON II. 27 3. 'ApToJ^pJ-iis : (a) i = ks in barfts (Int. 7) ; (6) 17 = e in prey ; (c) two e characters : e = e in met, transliterated 6 in Eng. ■ r) = e in they, transliterated e ; (cJ) -fis indicates nom. sing. masc. ; cf. a similar use of -os in irpea-^vrtp-cK ; (e) the mark ( ' ) before A in 'Apraiepi-iji is to be written ; ita use will be explained later. 4. vemrep-os, younger: (a) cf. Trpeo-jSuTcp-os, and note that both end in -os, and are in the nom. sing. masc. ; both belong to the same declension as Aapeiov ; when the nom. sing, is -os, the gen. sing, is -ov ; (b) , / am ill. 3. IiteC, wTien. 2. Adpctos, Darius. 4. ijo-S^vci, he was ill. 5. EXERCISES. I. Accent as far from the ultima as the principles of accent will 1 5 * » » 9 allow : avOpmiroi, a.v9piimov, avOpmirov, avOpunre, avOpwiru), avOpumiav, a,vdpuyirovnTeue reXeuT^v tov ySiou. 4. iwel Aapeios ■^(rOevti, KSpos uiruTTTeve reXevrrjv tov /Slov. III. Translate : 1. When Darius suspected death. 2. When Darius was ill. 3. I suspect an end of life. 4. An end (nom.) of life. 5. Life (nom.) of Cyrus. 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. The breathings. 2. Use of augment. 3. Place of augment in simple and compound verbs. 4. Augment of a, o. 5. Ending of second declension, singular number. 6. Improper diphthongs. 7. Meaning of oxytone, paroxytone, proparoxytone, perispomenon, properispomenon (App. 17). 8. Sounds of the Greek diphthongs. 9. Sounds of v, v, v, ev. 10. Stem and case-endings of the second declension. LESSON V. 36 LESSON V. 1. TEXT. iidpeiov /cat IlayaucraTtSos yiyvovTan TraiSes Suo, vpecr^v- Tepo<; jxev ' Kpra^ip^';, vecorepo^ 8e Kvpo'S. tVel Se r/adeuei Ad^eios Koi vTTwnTeve reXevT'^v tov /Siou, i-^oi-\e./ro to» e-bou-le-to to he-wished the-two iTat-8e d|i-(|>o-T^-pci> irap-eX-vai. pai-de am-pho-te-ro par-ei-nai. (two)-sons both to-be-present. 2. IsTOTES. J 1. l-Pov\-£To, (he)-was-wishing ^ : (a) from j3ov\-o|iat, / wish; (6) PovKofmi has been increased or augmented by prefixing a syl- lable, I-; this augment is called the syllabic augment. With what kind of a letter does ^ovkoimi begin — a vowel or consonant ? What kind of verbs, then, have the syllabic augment ? To what kind of verbs does the temporal augment belong ? Why is it called the temporal augment ? For what is augment used ? 2. T, both: (a) Cl. footnote vmitrTeve IV. H. 1. 36 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMEK, sion; cf. -os, -ov; (e) in the ace. case and subject of the following infinitive, like the Latin subject-accusative (Int. 51). 5. irap-ctvai, to be beside (one), to be 2>'resent: (a) Trap, shortened from irapd (cf. inr for vtto in {nr-dirreve) , a preposition, beside; cf. par- allel ; (6) ehai, to be, an infin. ; (c) for the accent, the final ai having the effect of a short vowel upon the accent of the penult, cf. yiyvovrai. 6. The Dual of the 0-Declension : (a) The accusative dual ending is known, cf. Td, diJi.iro$: Let the student now take the stem {av6pu>iro-) man, cf. anthropo-\ogy, and form ^ the declension of the word from the preceding statements ; the different cases are all to be accented as far as possible from the end of the word ; in the nom. plur. final oi, like final at (cf. yLyvovTai) , has the effect of a short vowel upon the accent of the penult and antepenult. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. A new consonant, _^ =ph. 2. The augment belongs to verbs, and indicates past time ; there are two kinds, temporal and syllabic ; the temporal belongs to verbs beginning with a vowel or diphthong ; the syllabic, to verbs begin- ning with a consonant. 3. The Greek has a dual number, used of two only. 4. The terminations of the cases in the second declension dual number are : nom., ace, and voc, ■%> ; gen. and dat., -oiv. 5. The terminations of the eases in the second declension, masculine and feminine, plural number, are : nom. and voc. -oi, gen. -av, dat. -oisj aoc. -ovs. 6. The definite article and adjectives agree in gender, number, and case with the nouns to which they belong ; cf. the Latin rule. 7. Final ai and ot have the effect of short vowels upon the accent of the penult and antepenult. 8. The subject of the infinitive is in the accusative case. 4. VOCABULARY. 1. avOpuiroS) man, cf. Tphil-anthropic, 5. pT^p(D, (dual), io<^. 7. trap-ftvai,to be beside, to be present. 3. pov\o|iai, / wish. 8. t& (nom., ace, and voc. dual), 4. ^PovXcTo, (Ac) was wishing. the (two). 1 The pupils should be provided with note-books in which to write out for future reference the declension of words which will serve as paradigms. These words should also be written on the board by different pupils until the forms, their accents, and the reason for the accents are understood perfectly. It is well to give the pupils other o-stems, whose declension shall be formed by them and put on the board. In this way they will familiarize themselves with the terminations of the cases. Paradigms should be memorized, and recited orally to insure correct- ness of pronunciation. Those teachers who desire printed paradigms can refer their classes to the Appendix. 38 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 5. EXEECISBS. I. Decline /Sios- II. Translate: 1. 7rat8« Se Svo yiyvovrai. 2. T(X€VTr)v Tov piov VTTOnrTViiU). 3. koX i^ovXero KBpov Trapeivai. 4. Trapcivai ^ovkofixu. 5. av- Opwirov Tuapiivai mrunrTtvt. 6. l3io>v, /St'o), /Sibis. III. Translate : 1. But Darius was wishing to be present. 2. And Cyrus was suspecting [the] end of the life of Darius to be near (= present). 3. I wish the two boys to be present. 4. Cyrus was wishing men to be present, when Artaxerxes was ill. 5. Of men, to men, of the man, two meu^ (nom.). 6. TOPICS FOB STUDY. 1. Augment, temporal and syllabic. 2. ISTumber. 3. Endings of the 2d declension. 4.' Improper diphthongs. 6. Effect of final at and 01 on accent. 6. Ending of the stems in the Greek declensions. 7. The subject of the infinitive. 8. Agreement of the definite arti- cle and the adj. with their nouns. 9. Case-endings and terminations of masc. and fern, nouns of the o-declension. 10. Use of the imper- fect tense. LESSON VI. 1. TEXT. 1 [Easy words are no longer divided into syllables.] 6 fJi€v ovv irpeafivTcpo's irap-wv i-riy-xa-vi' ho men oun presbyteros par-on e-tyng-cha-ne ; The now elder being-present happened; 2. NOTES. 1. o, the: (a) note the rough breathing; 6 is transliterated ho; (b) uom. siilg. _masc of the definite article and belongs to Trpeo-jSvrepos ; what is the gen. sing. masc. ? cf. tov JSlov ? (c) o has no 1 Use thu Eng, to or for in translating a dat. case standing alone. 2 Write in two ways. LESSON VI. 39 accent ; it is read as if a part of Trpeo-^vrepos,, so closely connected in thought are the two words (Int. 12, App. 22). 2. fUv. (a) untranslatable, cf. II. n. 2; there is a contrast between o . . . Trpea-^vrepo^ and Kvpov of the following sentence, which jueV helps to intensify ; its force may be shown in translation by putting greater emphasis upon elder; sometimes very unsatisfac- torily rendered on the one hand; usually it is not best to attempt to translate it, but the contrast which it helps to show should always be carefully observed ; (&) usually points forward to a correspond- ing 8e, cf. II. N. 5 ; (c) does not stand first in its phrase or clause, cf. Trpecr/Jvrcpos fiiv, II. 3. ouv, now, accordingly (transitional or logical, not temporal) : (a) refers to what precedes : " Darius wished both his sons to be present " ; " now the elder chanced to be present " ; (6) note the position of the circumflex accent, over the breathing, when both stand upon the same syllable ; (c) the circumflex may stand' upon a long ultima (or penult) . 4. irpeo-pvTepos : («) cf. II. N. 1 ; (6) takes the gender, number, and case of Traw, son, understood; "Darius wished both sons to be present; now the elder (one)," i.e., son, etc.; (c) observe the acute accent upon the antepenult ; cf . other words thus accented, and state the length of the ultima when the -acute stands on the antepenult. 6. irap-i&v, being present: (a) Trap ioT irapa, preposition, by the side of; cf. Trap-aval, V. N. 5 ; (&) wv, being: participle of elvat, to be; cf. Trap-etvai, V. N. 6, to be present; (c) Traputv, when used with eT-iyxavf., is best translated as if it were the infin., to be present : the Greek idiom is " happened being present " ; Eng. " happened to be present." 6. i-Tiy\av-t, (he) happened, chanced: (a) from rvyxavw, I happen ; (b) i-, syllabic augment, to indicate past time ; cf . i-fiovkero, fifrdiv^i ; (c) X = c'* in the German macAen ; (d) y before x has a nasal sound — the sound of n in anchor (cf. App. 10); (e) -e indicates the 3d sing. act. of a past tense ; cf. iir-tiirrev-e. 7. Accent of Nouns and Adjectives : (a) Place and kind of accent on the nominative singular : cf. veurepos, TfktvTri, KCpos; note that the place of the accent in the nom. sing, must- be learned by observation ; the Mnd of accent, whether acute 40 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. or circumflex, is determined by the general laws for accent: e.g., avOpo)iroi is accented upon the antep^ult and must, therefore, take the acute; .if it were accented upon the penult, it would be dvOpS>ir 2. The circumflex accent stands over the breathing when breath- ing and accent occur upon the same syllable. 3. d aud ot, masc. forms of the article, are not accented ; they lean forward on following words (hence called proclitics) and have no separate aecent (Int." 12). LESSON VI. 41 4. The participle with rvyxdvo) has the force of an Eng. infinitive. 5. (le'v, 8^, and ovv do not stand first in their clause or sentence. 6. The acute accent stands over the antepenult only when the ultima is short. 7. In nouns and adjectives, and words declined like them, an accented ultima generally takes the acute, but in the gen. and dat. a long ultima, if accented, takes the circumflex. 8. The accent of many words must be determined by observation. 9. The article in the masc. gender (stem to-) is declined nearly like a masc. noun of the o-declension, but 6 and oi are from the stem 6- and are proclitics. 10. -e indicates the 3d sing. act. of a past tense. • 11. In nouns and adjectives the accent stands upon the same syllable as in the nom. sing., or as near to it as the laws for accent will permit. 4. VOCABULARY A. 1. d (nom. masc. sing.), -the. 3. irapd, by the side of. 2. ovv, accordingly, now. 4. iraptiv, being present. 5. Tvyxavo, / happen. VOCABULARY B. 1. Masculine nouns of the Second Declension (declined like av Opunroi) : Aapeios, jStos, KCpos. 2. Adjectives (declined in the masc. like avOporrro^) : npar^vrtpoi, vcfOTepos. 3. The masc. of the article (stem to-), declined like a.v9punropa: Let the student take the stems apxa- (nom. dpxyj) and x«>pa- (nom. x'"P"^) ^^^ form ^ the declension from the foregoing remarks, remembering that a is to be put in the dual and plural where the 2d decl. has to, o, or ov (lengthened from o), thus: ap\(\, dpxii-s, apxii, apx^-v, dpx^; opxa, apxa-tv; dpxa-C (a/)xa-o)v contracted to) dpxuv, dpxa-is, dpxo^si in like manner form the declension of x">P°-j accenting the penult when possible. (g) Genitive plural : Note that the gen. plu. of all 1st decl. nouns contracts -d-uiv to -wv. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. The relative pronoun is declined, and agrees with its antecedent in gender and number. 2. Many prepositions, e.g., utrd, Trapd, viro, are found compounded with verbs. 3. Nouns whose stem ends in d (nominative in a or i;) belong to the 1st or a-declension and are feminine ; the masculine nouns of the 1st declension take a case-ending -s in the nominative singular. 4. The case-endings^ of the 1st and 2d declensions are alike except the nominative and genitive singular ; masc. nouns of both declen- sions take the case-ending -s in the nominative singular. 5. The genitive plural of all 1st declension nouns ends in -Hv, contracted from -d-wv ; a contract ultima generally takes the circum- flex. 6. Final at has the effect of a short vowel upon the accent of the penult and antepenult. 7. Some feminine nouns of the 1st declension change the d of the stem to T) in the singular number. 1 The teacher should put the BU^Btauce of Note 10 on the board, and illustrate it before permitting the student to read the Note. The terminations of Latin first declension nouns - (see App.) may also be compared with those of the Greek. The student should write out the declension of apx^i and xuipai in a note-book for convenient reference. 2 Let the student write out a list of these endings. LESSON VII. 45 8. The terminations of the cases in the first declension are : f -a, -ds, -», -dv, -d ) , , _ , Sing., ■< y ; dual, -o, -oiv : plu., -oi, -wv, -ois, -as. 9. A past tense different from the imperfect is formed by the insertion of a- before the endings, e.g., i-^oLij-a-e ; cf. l-rvyxoLV-e. 4. VOCABULARY. 1. &.iti, from. 7. fjera.-irlf,itofsu., I send after. 2. dpx^i government, province. 8. ov, (masc. sing.) of which or 3. avTov, him. whom. 4. ■qs (fern, sing.), of which. 9. (raTpdin)s, satrap. 5. |i€Td, after. 10. r^is (fem. sing.), of the. 6. iclf.tta, I send. 11. toB (masc. sing.), o/^Ae. 5. EXERCISES. I. Decline TtXevrri. II. Translate : 1. e^ovXtro 8e tov aarpdwrfv Trapdvai. 2. koI i^ovXtTO Adpeiov Trapttvat, ov KBpos xat 'Apraiepirj'S yLyvovrai. 3. 6 uaTpa.xyj'i t^s °fi)Ci^ ETuyj^ai/e Trapuiv. 4. ij reXeiiT'^ roS /St'ou. 5. Aapeios t^s . ;^u)pas TOV (TarpaTn^v ix-tTtTriixirexo. III. Translate : 1. Darius was sending for Artaxerxes and Cyrus. 2. Kow Cyrus happened to be a satrap. 3. But Darius was sending for Cyrus from the country of which he chanced to be satrap. 4. The satrap of countries. 5. The end of the^ street (cf. VI. Exercise I.). 6. TOPICS FOE STUDY. 1. Agreement of the relative with its antecedent ; of the adjective and article with their nouns. 2. Endings of the 1st and 2d declen- sions. 3. Gender of stems in a and o. 4. Gen. plu. of 1st declension nouns. 5. a of the stem retained in the sing, when ? 6. The effect of final -ai and -ot on accent. 7. The difference between the nom. sing, of masc. and fem. nouns of the 1st declension. 8. The cases of the 1st and 2d declensions which have the same case-endings; cases which have no case-endings added to the stem. 9. The accent of the ultima in the gen. and dat. 10. The accent of all gen. plurals in the 1st declension. 1 ofidris fem.i and muBt have the fem. article. 46 INDUCTIVE GHEEK PKIMER. LESSON VIII. 1. TEXT.i [Only difficult words will be divided into syllables or transliterated.] /cat o-TpaTiryov Se avTou dir-e-8ci-|€ TrdvTcov, strategon ap-e-dei-xe also general and him he- (had) -appointed of-all, 2. NOTES. 1. KaC, also : cf. I. Aapetov /cat, etc., IV. /cat VTrw'TrTeve ; note that the most common meaning of /cat is and; cf. Latin et, and, also. 2. v, ^o)p-u)v, etc. 6. Theme or Verb-stem: cf. n. 4 and observe the part of the 1 It is desirable to pronounce the text aloud each day from the beginning, or, when this becomes impossible, from a point as far back as the time will permit. 2 Strictly speaking, -ae in kiioiij-tre and in aiT-6fiei(K + a- = ^) e should together be considered a form of the tense-suffix, -aa-. LESSON VIII. 47 verb which is common to diro-86£K-viJju,t and oTr-e-SeiK-o-e (ko- = i), Suk; in like manner povX-o^ai and e-^oiX-ero V., have a common basis, PovX, upon which the forms are built up by the addition of prefixes and suffixes or both; cf. iroU-w and e-iroCii-o-e (e lengthened to ?;)'; that part which is common to all parts of the verb is called the theme or verb-stem. 7. Formation and Meaning of the Imperfect: cf. III. ■ncrfle'vci (con- tracted from -qa-Oevc-t from do-ecv^cu), IV. VTr-JiirTev-t (from iiTr-oirreii-a)), l-/8ouA-eTo (from ^ov\-ofw.i), i-rvyxoLV-e (from rvyx&v-ai) : (a) The augment shows that all these express past action; (6) their translation, was ill, was suspecting, was wishing, was hap- pening,^ shows that the action is represented as continued or progres- sive ; (c) they have the themes or verb-stems of the corresponding presents ; (d) the tense formed from the stem of the present and expressing continued past action is called the Imperfect. 8. Formation and Meaning of the First Aorist : cf. VII. k^oCrj-m (from iroi^o), e before o- changed to -q), dsr-^SeiK-o-t {ko- = f, from dTTO-SctK-vu/ut) : (a) The augment shows that these tenses express past action. (6) The tense-suffix -o-c (-o-a-) after the themes shows that the action is represented not as in progress, but simply as accomplished in past time ; the action is regarded as an event or single fact in past time, without any reference to the time required to perform it; such a tense, when formed by the use of -o-e (-tra-) is called the First Aorist. (c) The way in which an action is represented, whether as pro- gressive or indefinite, constitutes the difference in meaning between the imperfect and aorist tenses ; e.g., l-irot-ei (imperf. of irote'-a), cf. yiu6eva) = he was making; i-iroLr\-, t^s, and VI. n. 9 ; (a) Masculine : note that the article is declined in the masc. like ' masc. nouns of the 2d declension, except the nom. sing. ; cf. Latin adjectives of the vowel-declension (Int. 24). (6) Feminine : from the gen. sing. fem. t^s, (cf. dpx^S) V^> ^''^^ t^e fern, of Latin adjectives of the vowel-declension), we should expect to find the fem. of the- article declined like fem. nouns of the 1st declension, and such is the fact except that the dual is like the masc. ; the nom. sing, and plu. (ij and at) are formed from a shorter stem (cf. 6 and oi), and are proclitics. Let the student form the declension of the fem. in accordance with these facts. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. I, a double consonant, == ks. 2. Ko' = (1) and, (2) also; U = hut, or and. 3. Verbs meaning to appoint, make, take a double object; one of the objects may be considered a predicate-accusative. Cf. Int. 39. 4. The theme or verb-stem is that part of the verb which is common to all forms of it. 5. The imperfect tense is formed from the present stem and represents a past action as in progress. 6. The aorist tense expresses action as brought to pass, without reference to the time required to perform it ; the first aorist has a tense-suflB.x -o-o- (appearing sometimes as -o-e). Cf. Int. 31. 7. Masculine nouns of the 1st declension differ from feminines, (a) in taking a case-ending -s in the nom. sing., (&) in having the gen. sing, end in -ov like the 2d declension. 8. The masc. of the article is declined nearly like masc. nouns of the 2d declen. ; the fem., nearly like fem. nouns of the 1st declen. 9. The article is accented like nouns which are accented on the ultima, except 6, fj, ol, al. 4. VOCABULARY. ^ ' 1. airo-SECKVv|i.i, / appoint. 3. irds (gen. plu. TravTuv), all, 2. air-c-Sci$€, he appointed. 4. o-TpaTi)7ds, general. 1 I.e., .with the endings of. LESSON IX. 49 5. EXERCISES. I. Decline: 'ApTo^ep^rji (sing.), (raTpd.try]<;, (TTparriyoi. II. Translate : 1. virunrreve Trjv TcXevTtjv tS>v fiiwv irdvToiv tS>v (TTpa- T7)y!i>v. 2. 01 craTpdwai t5v ^(lapiav. 3. Kvpov Koi 'Apra^ip^v uaTpdiras eirotijtrc. 4. oi (TTpaTrjyol yiyvovrai. 5. ruiv apxStv Toiis (TaTpdwai airiha^t.. III. Translate : 1. From the country of which he happened to be satrap and general. 2. The generals (nom.) of Artaxerxes. 3. Darius appointed the younger Cyrus satrap of the country of Artaxerxes. 4. And he also made him general of all. 5. I wish the satraps to be present. 6. The land (nom.) of the satraps. 7. Cyrus wished two satraps to be present. 6. TOPICS FOR STlri)Y. 1. The letter |. 2. Meaning of xat and Se. 3. Verbs which take a double object, or object and predicate-accusative. 4. Theme, or verb-stem. 5. Differences between the imperfect and aorist tenses. 6. (TO. (sometimes o-e) in the 1st aorist. 7. Differences between the masc. and fern, nouns of the 1st decl. 8. Declension of the masc. and fern, of the article. 9. Accent of the article. 10. Proclitics. 11. Position of the breathing over a diphthong. LESSON IX. 1. TEXT. 8(roi €lS- Kao-Tco-Xov ireSCov d-6poC-1Jov-Tai. hosoi Kas-to-lou a-throi-zon-tai. as-many-as into of-Castolus plain collect-themselves. dva-paC-vti ovv 6 Kupos X.apct>v TiC\ov, philon, (a)-/riemd, IND. GK. PB. 50 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 2. NOTES. 1. oo-oi, as many as, freely who : (a) pronominal adj. from oo-os, refers to ttcivtW as its antecedent ; the masc. is declined like masculines of the 2d decl. ; in what case is oo-ot? what is its con- struct! on *? (&) note the position of the aciite accent after the breathing; cf. ovv fojr the position of the circumflex, when accent and breathing are written over the same vowel. 2. tts, into : (a) a preposition governing the ace. case ; (b) like 6, ij, ol, al, it has no accent, but leans forward upon a following word ; what are such words called ? 3. Kao-TuXov : a proper noun, stem ends in o : to what declension does it belong ? Dat. and ace. sing. ? 4. ireSCo-v, plain : (a) -v is the ending of what case ? governed by as, cf. N. 2 ; to what declension does it belong ? what is the stem ? if masc. or fern., what would the nom. sing, be ? (6) from ircSCov, a neuter noun of the 2d decl. ; note that the nom., ace, and voc. of neuters are alike (cf. Int. 22); in the 2d decl. in the sing, they end in -V, in the plu. in -o; the other cases are like the masculines of the 2d decl., cf. Latin 2d decl. neuters. Let the student decline ireSiov. 5. d8poC£-o-vTai, (they) collect themselves : (a) ^ = z, or more strictly ds in avoids, as it is a double consonant; (&) from aOpoi^ai, I collect; (c) -vTai indicates 3d plu. as in yiyvo-vrai. I., they are bom; in aOpoL^ovraL the Subject acts upon itself, they collect themselves; cf. V. ipovXcTo, VII. jtitTa-Tre/u.TCTat KSpov, in which the subject acts for itself; i.e., i^ovkcTo = he was wishing (for himself), iieTa-TrifiTreTcu = he sends after [Cyrus] (for himself) ; (d) note that the Greek has three voices : (1) active, (2) passive, and (3) a voice which expresses re- flexive action called middle (Int. 29). 6. ava-paCv-ci, he goes up: (a) from ava-fiaivoi, I go up; avd, up, a preposition, cf. vtto, trapa; hence AnaAiasis, the going up toward Babylon ; (&) -a indicates the pres. ind. act. 3d sing. ; what will VTT-OTCTeua, Tvyxava mean ? (c) cf. yiyvovrai I., /teTa-irc/XTreTat VII., and note that the present tense may denote a time historically past; it is then called the historical present. ^ I.e., relation to other words in the sentence, government; is it suhject, object, or what 7 LESSON IX. 51 7. Xapiiv, taking : (a) a parte, from \a/x/8av€'pvT)-v, from Ttcr<7a<^£pvr;s ; what case ? obj. of Xa^mv. 9. as ^i\ov, as a friend ; cf . p7w7-anthropy : (a) for the accent of co;, cf. £ts N. 2; (6) (f)i\ov, from <^tA.os; what is the stem? gender? in what case ? in apposition with Tura-aepvj}v. 10. The Neuter of the Article : (a) Nearly like a neuter noun : As the masculine of the article is declined nearly like masc. nouns of the 2d declension, it is perfectly natural to suppose that the neuter of the article is declined nearly like neuter nouns of the 2d declen- sion. Cf. the declension of Latin adjectives of the vowel-declension ; how are the masc. and neuter of such adjectives declined ? , (6) The stem of the article in the masc. is to-; the neuter has the same stem, and is declined like TreStW, cf. n. 4, except that the case-ending -v in the nom. and ace. sing, is dropped ; thus these cases have the mere stem. What is the rule for the accent of the article ? (c) Declension : Let the student write out the declension of the masc, fem., and neut. of the article, omitting the voc. case, thus 6, 17, TO, etc. The article should be memorized from left to right, thus : o, 'v, to; tov, t^s, tov, etc. How many and what cases of the article are alike in both masc. and neut. genders ? 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. 5= z or ds in avoids, a double consonant, cf. i. 2. When accent and breathing are over the same syllable, the acute or grave stands to the right of, the circumflex over, the breathing. 3. -V, the case-ending of nom., ace, voc, sing. neut. of the 2d decl. ; the same cases of the plur. end in -a. 4. The Greek verb has three voices : active, passive, middle (in which the subject acts for or upon itself). 5. Two more proclitics, «s, tls, i.e., unaccented words which lean upon following words. 52 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 6. The neuter of the article is declined like the masculine, except in the nom. and ace, and like a neuter noun of the 2d declension, except in the nom. and ace. sing., where the case-ending -v is omitted. 7. The article with proper names is not generally translated, cf. 6 KCjOos- 8. The ending -a indicates pres. ind. act. 3d sing., cf. avaPalva} 9. All genitives and datives of the 1st and 2d declensions when accented upon the ultima take the circumflex. 10. Appositives agree in case with their substantives. 11. The present tense, when used in vivid narration to describe an event historically past, is called the historical present. 1. a6po(£(i>, / collect. 2. ava-^aCvu, I go up. 3. els, with ace, into. 4. Xaii^dvu, I take. VOCABULABY A. 5. oo-os, quantus, plur., as many as. 6. ircSCov, plain. 7. (|>(Xos, friend. 8. us, as. VOCABULARY B. [Read carefully, noting the endings.] PRESENT. Act. acrOcvi-a, I am ill.^ dva-ySaiV-u, I go^ up. a.6poit,-a, I collect. Xa/jL^dv-a, I take. iTOii-a, I make. Tvy)(a.v-a, I happen. wTroTTTev-tti, I suspect. ava-^alv-a, lie goes up. aOpoi^-a, he collects. XafLpdv-a, he takes. Tvyxdv-a, he happens. iiroTTTev-ti, he suspects Mid. I am born. )8oijA,o-|i.oi, / wish. /ieTa-ir£jU.7ro-|iai., / send after. ytyve-Ttti, he is born. /SovXe-Toi, he wishes. /u,£Ta-7re;u,7r£-Tai, he sends after. ytyj/o-vTai, they are born. j8oi;A.o-VTOi, they wish. jLieTa-jrejtiwo-VTai, they send after. i el in r}(rdev€L III, results from contraction of ^o-fler/e-e. 2 Intransitive in meaning. 3 All presents may be translated by tbe progressive form; e.g., lam going up, or I go up. * Strictly the forms of yiyvoizai here given are intransitive, but as translated they serve to illustrate the passive voice. LESSON IX. 53 IMPERFECT. Act. av-i-Paw-i, lie was going up. ■^-<7^ej'(£-€ =)ei, he was ill. ■^Opoi^-t, he was collecling. e-Aa/i/3av-£, he was taking. l-irot(e-£=)ei, he was making. i-Tvyyav-t, he was happening. VTr-^-TTTtv-e, he was suspecting. Pass. i-yiyvt-To, he was born. Mid. i-^ov\e-TO, he was wishing. /ter-t-jrejUTre-To, he was send- ing for. i-yiyvo-vTo, they were born. t-/8oi5Xo-vTo, they were wishing. /u£T-e-7re/i7ro-VTO, they were sending for. FIEST AOEIST. Act. e-Totij-o-e, he made. ii,Tr-i-Stii{=Ka-)t, he appointed. '~' 5. EXERCISES. I. Decline TreStW, ^L\o%, SS>pov (like TreStW). II. Translate : 1. awoSuKvvfu K.vpov uTpwrriyov Travriav ocroi yiyvovrai. 2. eis TO ireSiov dve'/Satve. 3. KJvpov tov (TaTpoTnjv otto tov TreStbu /ticre- Tiip-TTtTO. 4. KSpo9 T!i.cn7av, aj9pOL^v and Xaix/Savtov. 10. Accent of end. -0)1/ in the 1st decl. 11. Appositives. 12. Historical present. 13. lieview the rules for accent. 14. Declension of the article. LESSON X. 1. TEXT. /cat also T(OV ' EX-Xtj-vcov Hel-le-non Greeks of-the an-ebe he-went-up He-vC-dv Ilap-pd-o-i-ov Xe-ni-an. Xenias OrParrhasian. e-chon having Tpi-d-Ko-a£-oi)S, tri-a-ko-si-ous, three-hundred, OTT-Xl-Tds hop-li-tas heavy-armed-soldiers ap-Xov-Ta Se auTcov ar-chon-ta commander and of-them 2. NOTES. 1. Twv 'EXX^v-v IX. ; (c) what other use is there of the end -oiv? (d) may be rendered, with; cf. Xa^wv, with. 3. dir\tTo-s, heavy-armed-soldiers; cf. Eng. pan^oply, full (lit. all) armor: (a) from on-Xtri/s, gen. sing. o-n-XtTov; (&) to what declension does it belong? gender, case? decline in the dual and plural; what are the dat. and ace. sing. ? cf. o-aTpaTrijv VII. ; (c) the voc. sing, of nouns which end in -ti^s takes -o instead of t; as one would expect, e.g., OTrXtTa, voc. of oirXiTijs. 4. av-^Pr|, he went up: (a) from dva-/3aiVy, good. 3. "EXXtives, Greeks. 8. o-o4>6s -^ -<5v, wise. 4. e'xw, / have. 5. EXERCISES. I. Decline 07rXtTj;s, rpiaKocnoi (plu.), BEn'as (sing.). II. Translate : 1. o apxmv kaiJ.p6.va, eXa/AjSave, rpiaKoa-tovi ^lXovs. 2. KBpos Tov ap)(0VTa tSiv ottXItSiv eXa/ijSave. 3. avafiaivm txiov tods (rarpaTras Tou KiJpov Koi Toiis crrparrjyov'i avrStv. 4. Kai Aapetos oe Toil' 'EXX^vmi' &pxovTa avrov eiroirjue.. 6. o KBpos avi^rj, ave^aivi, VTrOTrrevav TiXevTTjv TOV Adpciov jSiov. 6. apx<», o.p)(, -a, -mv, -/jm., -rat, -vTtti ; -TO, -VTO ; -e, -o-e. LESSON XI, REVIEW. [This lesson is a review of all that has preceded it. Nothing is so necessary in the acquisition of a language as constant and thorough review. It is especially so in this volume because the plan is to pass from the known to the unknown ; all that follows depends upon what precedes. The preceding lessons contain fundamental principles of the Greek language, and further progress is impossible without accurate knowledge of them. It is understood that the student will not proceed to Lesson XII. until this lesson and all that have preceded it have been mastered absolutely. Let no student suppose that the review lessons which the Primer contains are all that are required ; many excellent teachers have their students review all of the lessons of a term's work from six to a dozen times, keeping up constantly "advance lessons," "immediate- review ' ' lessons , and ' ' back-review ' ' lessons ; as often as the ' ' back-review ' ' lessons overtake the "immediate-review" lessons, their classes start again from the begin- ning of the Primer with longer lessons.] 1. TEXT. Anabasis I. i. 1-2. In reviewing the text, the following order of work is sug- gested : — 1. Eead the Greek text aloud repeatedly ; this may be done in concert as a part of the recitation. 2. With only the Greek text before the eye, pronounce a clause of it and give rapidly the Eng. translation ; proceed in like man- ner with the remainder of the text. 3. With only the Eng. parallel before the eye, give orally or write out the Greek ; compare with the text and correct mistakes ; continue this till the Greek can be exactly reproduced. 4. Write the declension, with the proper accents, of all 1st and 2d declension nouns, adjs. of the vowel-decl., and the article; be very certain that the rules for accent, to which reference has 58 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. been made, are known absolutely, and can be applied accurately and rapidly. 5. Classify under proper headings: (1) 1st decl. fern, and masc. nouns ; (2) 2d decl. masc. and neuter nouns ; (3) verb-forms : presents, imperfects, aorists ; act., mid., and pass, forms, etc. ; let the student make other lists which may suggest themselves; the teacher will vary the work, and perhaps assign special work to each student. These directions are not intended to be exhaus- tive, but merely suggestive. 2. GRAMMAR LESSON. ^The Roman numerals refer to " Lessons " ; the grammatical points are generally found under " Observations," but fuller statements are usually found under " Notes."] 1. Letters and Sounds. — The vowels: long, short, doubtful; their sounds I., II. ; diphthongs : improper diphthongs ; their sounds I., IV. ; breathings III., IV., IX. ; gamma nasal VI. ; double consonants VIIL, IX., X. 2. Syllables and Quantity I. 3. Accent. — Kinds of accents I. ; accent as affected by quantity I. ; acute accent I., VI. ; circumflex accent I., VI., VII., IX. ; grave accent II. ; syllables which may be accented III. ; accent of words with a short ultima III., VI. ; accent of words with a long ultima III. ; effect of final ot and ai on accent III., V. ; proclitics VI., VIII., IX. ; accent of nouns VI. 4. Gender, Number, Case IV., V. 5. Inflection and Stems III., VII. 6. Declensions I., III. 7. First Declension. — Stem-ending, case-endings, gender of 1st' decl. nouns Y\.[., VllL, X. ; declension of x*^/"", a.pxn, veavi'ds {young man), ottXittjs VII., VIIL, X.; voc. sing, of nouns like ottXe'tj^s X.; -u>v in the 1st declension VII. 8. Second Declension. — Stem-ending, case-endings, gender of 2d decl. nouns III., IV., V., IX.; declension of avOponroi, oSds, Slapov v., IX. 9. Vowel-declension of Adjectives. — ayadoi or o-o<^ds X. LESSON XI. 59 10. The Definite Article IV., V., VIII., IX. 11. Verbs. — Voice: active, middle, passive IX.; tenses VIII., IX. ; theme or verb-stem VIII. ; verb endings VI., IX. ; augment : syllabic, temporal III., V. ; suffix of the active participle X. 12. Subject of Verb. — Finite mode, and infinitive V. 13. Agreement. — Verb with its subject, cf. Latin rule, Int. 38 ; adjective and article with noun V., X. ; appositive IX., X. ; relative pronoun VII. 14. Accusative. — Case of the direct object IV. Obj. and predicate accusative VIII. 15. Participle with Tvyxdva VI. 3. VOCABULAEY. [The pupil is expected to know the various forms of the words here given which hare occurred in the text.] NOUNS. 1 . aOpoi^to. 2. ava-^aivo). 3. airo-SiiKvviu. 4. apx")- 5. dxrOevim. 6. Povko/jua. 7. yiyvo/juu. 8. civai. 9. ex*"- 10. Xaii.Pa.vut. 1 1 . fUTa-Ttifaroiuu . 12. irap-tivax. 13. iroiiia. 14. rvYXavm. 15. VTT-ajrTevm. 1. 6 avOponros. 2. V yxn- 3. 6 apxwv (parte.) 4. o /8t0S. 5. ot "EAAijves. 6. ^ bSoi. 7. 6 oirXtrrji. 8. 6 irais. 9. TO TreStov. 10. o a-aTpd.Trri's. 11. 6 arparrp/oi. 12. Tl TcXevrq. 13. O OT€p. 3. veiarepos. 4. Travres. 5. Trpco-jSurcpos. 6. o'o^ds. PRONOUNS. 1 . avTOS. 2. oo'os. CONJUNCTIONS. 1. 8e, Kai. 2. ind. 3. UK. ARTICLE. e < ' O, 17, TO. ADV. PARTICLES. 1. p.ev. 2. OVV- 60 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 4. B^^EBCISES. I. Translate : 1. The good man was wishing Cyrus to be present. 2. Cyrus accordingly went up, was going up. 3. Now Tissaphernes happened to be present. 4. Darius made Tissaphernes the satrap of a good land. 5. Xenias, the friend of Cyrus, goes up. 6. The generals are assembling in (=into) the plains. 7. The heavy- armed-soldier went up with ( = taking) both the (two) generals. 8. The brave (= good) generals are born of the satraps. 9. Of the governments ; from the satrap ; into the street. 10. The friends of Cyrus assemble in a good land. LESSON XII. 1. TEXT. 67761 Se iT6\iiTr\(ri Aapeios kol KaT-co-Ti] eis rrjv pa(ri\cCdv 'ApTa$epiT]<;, TL(rcra(f)epvr}<; Sia-pdWei top Kvpov irpbs tov abik^bv ws liri-pouXcTjOL auTw. [A word for word Eng. parallel and free translation will be found on pp. 337-342. Hereafter words will be divided, not to show the syllables, but the elements of which they are composed.] 2. NOTES. 1. iirA 8e : cf. i-n-d 8i III. ; Se may be well rendered now in this passage. 2. i-riXiVTi]-a-e, cf. TiXeurij IV., end; on the form, cf. e-Trotjy-cre VII.; what do i- (at the beginning) and -6v, brother; ef. Phil-adelph-ia, brotherly love; stem? gender? declension? nominative sing^ilar? 9. us liri-Pov\cv-oi, (saying) that he (Cyrus) was plotting against (him); Tissaphernes' direct words were: "he (Cyrus) is plotting against you," Kvpv. .. . IV. Translate : 1. He is plotting against the kingdom. 2. Artar xerxes was suspecting that Cyrus was plotting against the govern- ment. 3. Cyrus slanders Artaxerxes to his (=the) friends. 4. The brother of Cyrus was slandering the friend of the Greeks. 5. Now (oSj;) Darius died, and the brother of Cyras became established in the government. 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Comparison in formation between 1st and 2d aorists. 2. Differ- ence in meaning between the aorist and imperfect. 3. Aorist used for pluperfect. 4. Historical present. 5. Optative mode in indirect dis- course. 6. Greek modes (Int. 30). 7. Kind of action expressed by the different Greek tenses (Int. 31). 8. Time expressed by the different Greek tenses (Int. 31). 9. Case with ets. 10. Proclitics. 11. Elision in compounds. 12. iwi in compounds. 13. Article used for the possessive pronoun. 14. Einal -oi in the optative. 15. avros in the neuter singular. 16. Verb endings -et and -ot. 17. Name and form of the first twelve letters of the Greek alphabet (App. 1). 18. Theme, root, stem (App. 72). LESSON XIII. 1. TEXT. 6 8e ircteeTai kol (ruX-Xa|ipdvei Kvpov w? dlro-KTCvwv ■n Se H''n'^P ^|"ttiTil, I arrest ; (6) crvA. for , cf. Xapwv IX. ; (c) y of trvv becomes A, before X. ; this change is called assimilation, but note cruv-e-Xa/n/Sav-e ; what part of the verb is (TvX.-\afi.l3dv-0L ? cf. ciri-PovXcv-oi XII. 4. airo-KTcv-uv, about to kill, interfecturus : (a) from airo-KTuvo), I kill; airo, cf. VII. ; ktuvu), I kill ; the compound, strengthened form of the verb is generally used ; (6) the ending -«v is contracted from t-(i)i/ (cf. )(o>pd-v, \v; the 2d aor. parte, ending -av has the acute accent; (d) sc. avrov (i.e. Kvpov) as the object. 5. 1] 8e (I'^JTUp, but his mother: (a) 17 has the force of an unem- phatic possessive, cf. t6v dSeXc^oi/ XII. ; (&) p-riTrip, stem iMyrep, Lat. mater, nom. sing. ; cf. a and stems, and note that this word belongs to the 3d or consonant declension. 6. l|-aiTTi- fiaXk-a, ire/tir-cii, I have, throw, send, we know that Xv-a means, I loose. In the same way, cf . Sia-;8aA.\-ci, dwo-Trejowr-ei : what will \v-t\. mean? Cf. €x- with I povX-o-fMxi £-Po«X.-e-TO J [ aSpoi^-o-vTai. Note that (a) the present and imperfect are from the same theme ; (&) that between the theme and the personal endings there is a vowel, c or o, called a tense-suffix ; (c) o is the tense-suffix before |i and V, € before other letters. LESSON XIV. 69 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. A final short vowel may be elided before the initial vowel of a following word. 2. (OS is used, both as a conjunction and as an adverb. 3. i is augmented to ^ ; e.g., wn^Xde from theme air-eX6. 4. The augment in compound verbs comes after the preposition. 5. T, S, or e before another t, 8, or $ (in the same word) be- come /SouXeUEIS. 2. TTE/tJrO/XEV, /SovXeuO/XEV, jSoAAojUEI/, KtvSuVEIJO^EV, /8a a verb of aiding. LESSON XVI. 76 7. <|ii\ovcra, loving, i.e., because she loved: (a) parte, from ijukito, nom. fem. ; (6) ^iki-av, nom. masc, and ^iXc-ova-a, nom. fern., become ^iXSiv and i^iXovcra in contraction ; the e has been absorbed and lost in ov and v, ^tXoBo-a, i\lo, as a result of the contraction, cf. onrOKTCvmv (-olv for -£0>v), ^(op&v (for i^topd-eui/). 8. Tov poo-iXeuovTa 'Apro^cp^v, the ruling Artaxerxes, or Artaxerxes who was king : (a) ^SacrtXeuo-vT-o from ^aa-iXevm, cf. ^aa-ikevcrei XV. ; (6) on -VT- and -o cf. apxavra X. ; 'O is the case-ending of the ace. sing., 3d decl. ; so /xijrep-a, nom. p-rir'qp, stem iJi.T]Tep; we can now write three cases of HapvcraTLs, viz. : nom. Ilapuo-aris, gen. IlapDo-aTiS-os I., ace. HapvadriS-a ; (c) case of 'Apraiip^riv ? construction ? declension ? 9. The Future : Compare ySao-tXevo-a XV., n. 6, 12, Obs. 6, 8, and write out on paper the conjugation of the fut. ind. act. of Xvo>. What is the difference between the pres. and fut. of this verb ? Form futures of jSovXevu, kivSuvcvo).' What do -iron^crw (cf. Troicu) and ^tXiycro) (cf. ^iXeci)) mean ? . Remembering what -a-%- means, what would you expect Xi5-crd-/Aei/os, \v-ao-pai, \v-cre-Tou, \v-iXS>v. 5. The future of \va> differs from the present by the insertion of -o- after the theme ; this applies to act. and mid. 6. The future of some verbs is formed without -i,\e(i>, cjuXto, I love. 4. ndXXov, more, rather. LESSON xvn. 77 5. EXERCISES. I. Conjugate : iXd/iPavov, tTre/jLTrov, i^acrikevov, KiySvveviTo), ttoit^ctio. II. Translate: 1. 'Apro^ep^s e/SaeriXeve. 2. -ij 8^ I^V'^^VP "■^o" eXtJe. 3. A.v£is, lAiJes, Xvu), iXvov, Xuovcri. 4. vrnjpf(ov tiKvoiTo . . . dir€')rl)i,irETo, and whoever came . . . he used to send back : (a) oo-tis, indefinite rel. pro. ; whoever came = if any one came ; (6) a^iKvoiro, from atp-iKveo/mi {diro + iKveo/juxi), con- tracted from d-iici'£-oi-To, £ being absorbed in -ot- as in tfjiXS) (for cfjiXe-ai) and in c^iXova-a (for ^iXe-ovaa) £ has been absorbed in - and -ov ; note 78 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. the circumflex accent, cf . ^iXava-a XVI. ; (c) for -oi-to cf . im/iovXev-oi XII., what mode ? (d ) d(^ (for a-Tr) = Atto, cf. Kad-ca-rrjiu XII. ; (e) note the force of air-t-TriixirtTo, sent back (from time to time), kept sending back, used to send back — a customary or repeated past action ; how does the imperfect differ in meaning from the aorist ? 2. Tuv irapA poo-iX^ws: (a) lit., of the {= those) from the king, a condensed expression = whoever of those (who were) beside the king came from the king to him (Cyrus) ; (6) vapa with the gen. =from beside, with the dat. = beside, cf. Trap-u>v VI. ; (c) ySacriXe'cos : note the omission of the article because the king ' of Persia is referred to. 3. pao-iX^us, of (the) king: (a) nom. /8ao-tA.eiis, cf. jBacriXevovTa and jSao-tXevo-a ; (b) -us for -os, cf. IXapi^o-aTtS-os I., case-ending of the gen. sing., 3d decl., cf. -is in Lat. 3d decl., e.g., honor-is, of honor; (c) so ap)(0VT-09, /3ao-i\ei;ovT-os, iratS-is, p.-i)Tp-6^ (Lat. matr-is,). 4. irdvT-os, all; ace. plu. masc. ; gen. plu. iravT-uiv VIII. ; so fiacnki-as kings, apxovr-as commanders, iratS-as boys; -as case-ending of the ace. plu. masc. and fern, in the 3d decl., becoming -ds in ^Sao-tXc-ds. 5. ovTcii . . . c3CXovs : pred. ace. to agree with the sub. of ctvoj,, which is under- stood from TravTas. 8. pa and o«. 4. The parte, suffix -vr- is lost before -s and a preceding vowel is lengthened in compensation ; a becomes d; e becomes a ; o becomes o«. 5. Masc. and fern, endings of the 3d decl. are -s, -os, -i, -o ; -t, -oiv ; -ts, -«v, -s, -d, -ds. 6. With the gen. of a person irapd denotes separation, _/5-om the side of, from. 7. Verbs which use the ending -|ii in the present system are called (ii-verbs ; verbs in -a are called «-verbs ; cf . Siaridri-^i and \v-a. 8. Middle participles belong to the vowel-declension, but active participles are partially of the consonant-declension. 4. VOCABULARY. 1. d<|>-iKv^o-|jiai, 1 arrive. 6. irdvrcs, all. 2. d PouriXcvs, king. 7. irapd with gen., from beside, 3. Sia-TC8T|-|u, 1 arrange, dispose. from. 4. otTTis, whoever. 8. d <|>C\os, friend. 5. ovTU, so, thus ; ita. 9. mm, so as, so that. 5. EXERCISES. I. Inflect the present and imperfect active of ire/xTro). II. Translate : 1. PaxnXeutav, PaxriXiuiv, PatTiXevovra, PaxnXia, Avcrcdv, \viKvcn,TO trap awoB irpos Tov PaxnXeaovTa ' ApTo^epirjV, (jiiXov dircTre/iircTO. 4. aXX' ^v Svyr/Tai jSarrtXeus etvai, irofqaa TOV aheX^hv CTTpaTrjyov. 5. ij /AijT7;p ovv ave^aive. irpos rav 'ApTo^ep^riv tos iiaLTrjO'op.ivri tov Kvpov. 6. o Se arlpacrOeU iTeXevrri, ot, ov XVI., XVII. ; elision XII., XIV. ; final u, and e before era in the 1st aorist XII. 3. Consonant Changes. — Assimilation XIII.; Unguals before Un- guals XIV. ; smooth mute before rough breathing XII., XVII. 4. Accent. — As affected by contraction XVI. ; as affected by final 01 in the optative XII. ; as affected by augment XVI. ; proclitics XIH 5. Declension. — Third declension stems and case-endings XIII., XVI. ; jSao-tXevs XVII. ; airds XII. ; cKEivos XV. ; mid. (pas&.) parti- ciples XIII., XVII. 6. Elements of Verb. — Eoot, theme, stem App. 72, 73 ; augment : belongs to indicative XIII., of £ XIV., in compounds XIV. ; tense- suffix of pres. and imperfect XIV., XVI. ; tense-suffix, formation, and inflection of future XV., XVI.; tense-suffix of 1st aor. XII. ; tense- suffix of 1st pass, system XIV. ; formation of 2d aor. XII., XV. ; mode-suffix of subjunctive XV. ; endings of principal and histori- cal tenses XIII., XV., XVI.; suffixes of participles XIII., XIV., XV., XVI. ; signs of voice XIIL, XIV., XV. LESSON XVIII. 81 7. (II- and a- verbs XVII. ; pres., 1st aor., and 1st pass, systems App. 71. 8. Conjugation of Xvw, tkvov, Xva-ui in the indicative active. 9. Syntax of Nouns. — Appositives XVI. ; after els XII. ; after dvTt XV. ; gen. with wapd XVII. ; after sttl in composition XII. ; after verbs of aiding XVI. 10. The Article. — As possessive XII. ; demonstrative XIII. 11. Syntax of Verbs. — Historical present XIII. ; aorist for pluper- fect XII. ; oTTMs with future indicative XV. ; optative in indirect dis- course XII. ; conditional relative sentences XVII. ; tense in participles Int. 55; temporal and causal relations expressed by the participle XVI. 3. VOCABULAEY. . aireti). 2. aTT-ipxoiuu. 3. air-^kOe. 4. dTTO-Tre/XTTO). 5. aTTO-KTeivm. 6. drtjua^o). 7. a.-iKviofuxi. 8. jSacriXEvo). 9. jSovXevo). 10. Sux.-^(iXXo>. 11. SwyrWri/u. 12. Svva/Jtai. 13. i$-aiTe(o. 14. en-PauXivu). 15. Ka6-LtS. 3. ^v SwcovTai, PacTiXcvcrauari. 4. oi crrpanqyoX K.vpio iire.PovXe.vov. 5. SiejSaXXov Tois <^iA.ovs. 6- IlapixraTis virdoxei K.vpio, III. Translate: 1. The elder brother became established in the kingdom. 2. But his mother wished Cyrus to be king instead of him. 3. Accordingly Parysatis supports the younger (son). 4. And Cyrus also deliberates how he shall be king. 5. He used-to-send (imperfect) all (men) away as friends. 5. TEST QUESTIONS. 1. How many declensions are there in Greek ? 2. Describe the stem of the nouns of each declension. 3. How is the article declined in the masc. ? fern. ? neuter ? 4. The adjectives which you have studied are how declined ? the participles ? pronouns ? 5. What is a deponent verb ? 6. What are proclitics ? Name those which have occurred in the text. 7. What is the difference in meaning between the imperfect and the aorist ? 8. How can you form the future from the present ' ? 9. From the stem of what tense is the imperfect formed ? 10. What endings of the present are alike ? of the imperfect ? 11. What forms of the pres., fut., and imperf., indie, act. really have no personal endings ? 12. For what is augment used? Where is its position in a compound verb ? 13. How does the aorist differ from the future in the indie. ? 14. What tense- and mode-suffixes have you studied ? ^ Not true for all verbSj as will be seen hereafter. LESSON XIX. 83 LESSON XIX. 1. TEXT. AnAB. I. I. 5, 6, Kttt . . . jSao-tXea. 2. NOTES. 1. Twv belongs with /SaplSdpwv : note that Trap iavrw is between the article and its noun, i.e., in the attributive -position, to show that the phrase modifies Pap^dpwv just as if it were an attrib. adj. ; e.g., tZv a-yaSuv I3ap/3a.pa)v. 2. Trap' for Trapa, cf. dvT XV. : with the dat. = by the side of; with the gen. what does it mean ? cf. XVII. 3. eavTia, reflexive pronoun, himself, Lat. sibi. 4. lir-E-|jiEXct-To, he cared for : (a) from ettijueXco/uu, deponent ; (&) contracted from €7r-e-ju,eA.e'-£-To, £-e contracts to £t, cf. -^crOivei III., j8ao-iA,E'-£s, ftamXei's XVII. N. 8; (c) governs the gen. case, rSiv Pap- pdpuiv, like many verbs expressing an action of the mind. 5. itoKi^iv, contr. from i7oA.£ju,£-£ti', to wage war, to fight: (a) pres. act. infin. from TroXefiea, cf. Eng. polemic; (b) -eiv end. of act. infin. ; another ending is -voi, cf. irapil-vai V. ; (c) what will be the mean- ing of A.u-eiv, TTEjUTT-Eiv, e\-av1 6. re for ri, both, correlative with the following Kai, and: the accent has been lost because te leans on the preceding word, and is to be read as a part of it, cf. Lat. hdminisque ; such words are called enclitics, because they lean on preceding words ; contrast enclitics with proclitics, th, un, etc., which have no accent, but are read with the following word. 7. <5s . . . e-CTj-o-ov, ut essent, that they might (or should) be: (a) from dfjLi, I am; cf. wv, being; dvai, to be; icrrai, (he) will be; (b) pres. opt. act. 3d plu., in a clause of purpose after a past (secondary) tense; (c) -it)- is a mode-sufflx of the optative; -i- is also a mode- suffix of the optative, cf. £7rt/8ouA.£i>o-i. XII. ; observe that the variable vowel ("%-) appears as -o- before -i-; (d) cf. uSs imISovXevoi XII. for the opt. used in indir. disc, instead of the indie, of the dir. disc. ; (e) cf. oo-Tis aipvri-v IX. 10. (is ntt\i'''aTOi' ap^ovra. 4. cttci 8e ^uSevet 6 fSaaiXevi, iire- /«.c\etTO airoi) 5j IlaoiJtraTts. 5. ETreKpinrTCTO Tous (TTpaTtjyovi (us pAXuTTa ISvvaTO. III. Translate : 1. But whoever arrived (opt.) from beside Cyrus slandered the king as secretly (= hiding) as possible. 2. But Cyrus was plotting that he might reign. '^ 3. The satrap accordingly went up when the king happened to be ( = being) most unprepared. 4. He will be a friend of the king if he is able (subj.) to hold (= have) the city. 6. The city will be as unprepared as possible. 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Elision. 2. Contr. of e-e, e-e, e-a, e-ov, e-o). 3. Depoilents. 4. Verb ending -eiv. 5. Different uses of the opt. 6. Accent of re. 7. Theme and pres. stem of Xapfidvo). 8. End. -te-v, nj-aav. 9. e^" with an adv. 10. ottws with fut. ind. 11. Cases with wapd. 12. At- tributive position. 13. Position of p.ev; of 81 14. Augment. 16. Participial suffixes. 16. Comparison of i/cavos. 17. Endings of the 3d decl. 18. Nom. sing, of masc. and fem. 3d decl. nouns; ace. sing.; voc. sing. 19. Declension of ttoXis (like 8wa/nis), App. 48. 20. Open and close vowels, App. 4. 21. Accent of gen. sing, and plu. of irdXts, App. 48, n. c. 1 Opt. of ^ao-iAEi/ci) ; for the form cf . eTrtjSovAciJ-oi Xll. LESSON XX 87 LESSON XX. 1. TEXT. Anab. I. I. 6, wSe . . . TToXeo-t. 2. NOTES. 1. uSc: an adv. not formed 'vrith the ending -us as in cuvoIkSh XIX. ; refers to what follows. 2. oir6^pvovs : (a) gen. sing.' of Tia-craipipvri'S, acc. Ticra-aipepvrjv IX.; (6) the stem, Hi(Tcra^tpvK-, loses o- in the gen. sing., Ttcro-a- <^£pv£(cr)-os, between two vowels, and e-o contract to ov. 12. TOts iroXecri. : cf. avTw XII. 13. Subjunctive: Cf. XV. n. 5, hw-w-jmi, Svv-tj-tcu: the theme is Sum, but here the a is dropped; « or rj (written -w/,;-) the mode- suffix ; -(itti and -rot are personal endings. The student will natu- rally infer that the subjunctive of the act. voice will be formed in the same way, except that the active endings will be used. Suppose now that we write out the conjugation of kvw in the pres. ind. act. : \v-o), \i5-as, \v-a ; kv-e-rov, Xi-e-rov ; Au-o-ju,ev, Xv-c-re, \v-ov-(n. If now instead of -"/f-, we put the mode-suifix -"/i]-, what shall we have ? What mode wrill the forms be ? Cf . Sw-tu-fuu, Syv-rj-rai. Hence the subj. act. of \i(i> will be : — S. 1. A.V-W (the same as the indio. here). 2. A.u^-s (for iota-subscript cf. a- for e in Xveis). 3. \i^ (for iota^subscript cf. ei for e in Xvei). D. 2. Av^-Tov. 3. X.v-r[-TOv. P. 1. \v-io-fi,ev. 2. \v-r\-Te. 3. A,i;-co-cn. Have the endings of the principal (primary) or past (secondary)' tenses been used? In like manner form the subj. of Aaju./3(£vo), €\ui, l3ov\tvta. 14. Optative: Cf. iiri-^ovkev-o-L XII., a-i-Kv-o-2-TO XVII., e;!^-o-i£-v XIX. Note, (a) that the variable vowel -o/j. of the indie. LESSON XX. 89 appears constantly in the opt. as -o-; (&) after -o-, -i- appears before the ending (cf. atjuKvolro) : this -i- is called the mode-suffix of the opt. ; (c) instead of -i- in the 3d plu. (cf. e)(o-u-v) -w- occurs; (d) the ending of the 3d plu. is -v or -vXaK'fj, garrison. 6. iv, in. 13. cSSc, thus, as follows. 7. dir6o-os, quantus ; as much as, plu. as many as. 5. EXERCISES. I. Decline : o /SeXTtcrTos /Sao-tXeus ; l/cacrTi; irdXts ; (ruXXoyij. II. Conjugate: 1. ctxov, £X°'/*'> 'X" (^u^bj-)- 2. Xa/iySai/d), e\ajU.)8a- vov, kafilSavo (subj.), Aa/tiySai/oi/ii. III. Translate: 1. And the city makes the levy as follows. 2. As many generals as he has in the city. 3. Cyrus sends word to each general to take a garrison. 4. If Cyrus takes ^ (subj., Cf. SvvrjTai XV.) the cities, he will be king. 5. The captains of the guard were taking good men in order that they might hold (= have) the city. 6. He is plotting against the city. 7. They were plotting against Cyrus in order that they might take as many cities as pos- sible. 8. I will make Darius general on-the-ground-that (. 13. "%-, -w/^- ; o and i in the opt. 14. Endings in subj. and opt. 16. Uses of the subj. and opt. 16. Accent in verbs. 17. Effect of final -ot on accent in the opt. 18. The genitive absolute. LESSON XXI. 1. TEXT. AlfAB. I. I. 6, 7, (cat . . . S' i^ejSaXev. 2. NOTES. 1. Kal y&p = Lat. et enim, and (this was reasonable) for : may be rendered "for in fact," or koC may be omitted and ydp rendered simply for. 2. i^o-av, they were, Lat. erant : (a) imperf. indie, act. 3d plu. from dfUL, lam; (h) on -crav, cf. eiTj-o-av XIX. ; (c) cf. el-vat, to be, m/, being, ea--Tai, will be, arj-o-av, opt. 3d plu. 3. r\a-av Ti6'pvovs, (had) belonged to Tissaphemes, lit. were of Tissaphernes, pred. gen. of possession. 4. TO opxettov, originally; cf. Eng. archaic; ace. sing, neut., with the force of an adv., called adverbial ace. 5. ix, from, out of, by (the) king : (a) cf. ^aLTrja-aiiivri XIII., cf =«; (&) ex used before consonants, ii before vowels; (c) note the absence of the" accent : why ? cf. ets, m. 6. 8E-So-|i.cVai, having been given : (a) perf. parte, pass, (or mid.) of 8t-8-ei--L-aa-TTJKEa-av N. 7 ; (&) cf. el-vat V. ; -vat is the ending of what ? (c) cf. Kar-ea-Trj XII. and note that the same theme a-ra (lengthened to cttij) appears in both ; they are 2d aor. ; what does Kara-crT^-vai mean ? cf. KaT-ea-rr] XII. ; (d) explanatory of the plan, i.e., to revolt, etc., cf. n. 11. 13. Tovs |i^v . . . Toiis U, some . . . others : on 5 as a demonstra- tive, cf. 6 §€ XIII., XIV. 14. dir-e-KT«iv-£ : (a) cf. diro-KTcvfiv XIII. for the theme kt€v and meaning; (6) cf. ■jrap-^yyetA.-e XX. for the tense; (c) note that stems in v, like those in X, i.e., liquid stems, form the 1st aor. by dropping o- of the tense-suffix -era- and lengthening the theme vowel ; e becomes a. 15. IJ-l-PoX-e-v : he cast out, banished : (a) from iK-^aXXw, I cast out; {b) imperf. ii-l-/3aXXe = he was casting out; (c) i^-i-fiaX-e, he cast out, 2d aor., theme ^aX; {d) v is often added after final e in the. 3d sing, of verbs before an initial vowel ; it is called v movable. LESSON XXL 93 3. OBSERVATIONS. *1. CK before consonants, i^ before vowels, is followed by the gen. ; ev by the dat. 2. -o-ov indicates the 3d plu. in some forms of the verb. 3. The ace. sing. neut. of the adj. may be used adverbially, and when so used is called the adverbial accusative. 4. The perf. stem is formed by reduplication, which prefixes the initial consonant with «. 5. irds has two stems : iravr- (masc. and neut.), irdo-a- (fem.). 6. airds in the attributive position means same; without the article, it may be a pers. pron. of the 3d person (but not in the nom.). 7. Middle (passive) participles in -/xevos are declined like dya^os. 8. -eiv, -vol are infin. endings. 9. The 2d aor. has a shorter stem than the pres. and commonly shows the theme : ai(r0av-o;u,ai, theme aio-O (shown in ala-B-o-iiei/oi) ; A.aju,;8av-o)5 theme Xa/S (cf . Xa^S-wv) ; ^aXXio, theme /3aX (cf. i^e-^ak-ev). 10. Themes of ta-Trnja and ktciVo) are ara, ktv. 11. Verbs whose themes end in X or v (liquids) form the 1st aor. without -a-, but lengthen the theme vowel. 12. o lUv . . . d 8e', one . . . another, plu. some . . . others, denote contrasted objects. 13. V movable may be used after e in the 3d sing, of verbs before an initial vowel. 14. Some 2d aorists (e.g., ii-i-^aXov, l-\a;8ov) are conjugated like imperfects. 15. ovTos takes the predicate position. 4. VOCABULARY. 1. alp.i, I give. 15. to. avrd TaOra, haec eadem, these 8. iK-pdWo), / eject, banish. same. 9. ifo-av, erant, they were. 16. t6t6, then. 94 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 5. EXERCISES. I. Decline : 17 avrrj apxv > ° olvto'S ^acriXevi ; to avrb TreSiov ; inflect iii^aXov (like eXvov). II. Translate : 1. 6 8' aOpoC^a ttjv pikTiaT-qv Swa/itv (OS eTTt/SouXeijoi'TOs Tov a8iXov iavTiS. 2. 01 fikv wudovrai, 01 §£ i/SovXtvovTO ottws Xd^ouv /SaciXia. 3. ouTtos cirfjUeXetTO t5v ^ap/Sapiov, cos TraCTat at 7roA.£is twoi/cus ep^oiEv. 4. ourot ol euym, Lat. fugio, I flee, cf . apx-o-vr-a X. for the form. 3. (ruX-\4|-ds (for o-uv-X^T-o-a-VT-s) . . . i-TroXj.6pK-ei {a ^ c-e) , having collected he besieged, translate : he collected and besieged : (a) on a-uX = crw, cf. «ruA-Aa/i/8avo) XIII. ; (b) On y-a = i, cf. K-cr = ^ in dir-e'Scilc VIII. ; (c) on -o-as for -cra-vT-s, cf . KtvSifveiJtras XIV. ; (d) on eTroXiop- K£t, cf. ■^o-^ei'ci III. 4. KaC . . . yi\v . . . KaC : (a) Kai . . . koC, both . . . and, cf. T£ . . . Kal XIX. ; (&) y5-v, a contract ace. fern. sing, of 1st decl., from y^. 5. irTp&Tcii|i,a, ace. sing., army : (a) 3d decl. neut., nom. arpdTevfw., stem o-TpaTcujoaT- ; (6) final t of the stem has been dropped and there is no case-ending; (c) the case-ending of the nom., ace, and voc. plu. is' -a. Let the student decline the word. 6. c-irciparo (for i-irapa-e-ro) , was trying : (a) from -Treipaofuu ; (b) what tense is it ? cf . e-^ovX-e-ro V. 7. Kar-dYtiv, to lead down or back, to restore : -eiv is the ending of what mode ? from Kar-ayo), Lat. ago. 8. ToOs iK-irt-TTToi-K-oT-as, those who had fallen out, those who had been cast out, = tovs <^£vyovTas, the exiles ; equivalent to the passive of iK^dXXw, cf. £^£/3aX.£v XXI. : (a) we, reduplication of the perf., cf. 8e-So(i.evai XXI. ; (6) perf. act. parte, from iK-mTTTui ; nom. iK-Tre-TTTw- Kus, -KO)s for -KOT-s ; parte, stem iK-Tre-TTTm-K-or- ; -as ace. plu. end. ; (c) note -K-, representing -Ka-, the perf. act. tense-suifix, as -a-a- is for the 1st aor. 96 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 9. KaC, translate and so, with inferential force. 10. aiVt), this: (a) refers to wliat precedes, the war with~ Tis- saphernes, but is attracted into the fern, gender by the pred. noun 7rpo(^a(Tis; we should expect the neut. tovto; from ovrog, avrrj, tovto; (&) the subj. of 17V. 11. oX\ti, other, another: from cJAXos, oXK-q, SXKo, declined like 12. itpo^iuri's, pretext : declension and gender like ttoXis XX. 13. ^v, was .■ 3d sing. ; ^-aav 3d plu. XXI. 14. aiJT, / lead down or back. 13. irtirrco, I fall. 3. aiXoi, another ; o S3O1.09, the other. 14. itoKiopKiio, I besiege. 4. av, again. 15. ij irp6i|>a(ris, pretext. 5. ij ■yfi,i eortA, tonrf. 16. to crrpdrcviia, army. 6. d EKirciTTUKc&s, exile. 17. trvX-X^YO), / collect. 7.. ■qif, era*, loos. 18. virb-Xaiupdvu, / take under, re- 8. 1] OdXarra, sea. ceive. 9. KaC . . . KaC| both. . . and. 19. tf^iiYu, 2 flee ; d i^6V7uv, 2^e 10. Kard, down; Kara, yffv, by land. fugitive. 11. ovTos, this, that. 5. EXERCISES. 1. Inflect the pres. and imperf. indie, the subj., opt., act. of evy(o, TTiTTTO), 5ya) ; decline 6a\aTTa, TrpofjmaK. II. Translate : 1. dv^jo to (rrpdrevixa cruveXeyev ws Xd/Soi ttjv ttoXiv. 2. ayoixev, r/yofiev, avveXtyo/jiev, avXXiyofiev, tjtevyofxiv, i^evyofiev. 3. rjv 6 ds, pred. nom. 3. «v, causal, because he was; cf. KJuXovcra XVI. 4. So-Sfj-vai, to be given : (a) on the theme 8o, cf. Se-So-iievai XXI. ; (&) ^jj, long form of -de-, 1st pass. SufiSx, cf. aTifjuurOeii = aTl/MKr-Be-vTi XIV. ; (c) -vat, infin. ending in aor. pass. ; -vai is also used as the ending with other infinitives, cf. airo-a-T^-vai XXI., el-vtu V. 5. ot, to himself = eavrw XIX. 6. ravTds, cf. Tot avTo. Tavra XXI. ; note that ovTOi takes the pred. position. 7. Tnr, / claim, ask as a right. 7. •ni^ira, I send. 3. dpx, / rule. 8. irpdrTu, 1 do, effect, accomplish. 4. rj eiriPovX^, conspiracy, plot. 9. crvfi-irpoTTa, / do with, cooperate. 5. ot, sibi, to himself. 5. EXERCISES. I. Decline : ■!rp6a(ni, airos, CTTjoarevyna, ^ao'iX.evi, iTn^ovXij. II. Write: (a) synopses pres. system act. (cf. n. 16) of apxi>, TrpaTTU) ; (&) conjugation of eka/iov, XaP, Xd./3oLp,i. III. Translate : 1. ovtoi oi avSpes avrois ravra iv Trj TrdXa /8ouX£uo/u.e- vov; yaOdvovTO. 2. KSpos tu>v ttoXcoiv toutwv rip\£v. 3. eXa/i/Sdvcrc, IKa.- ^ere., iTrpaTTCxe. 4. ijv oi Yivpov d8e\<^ot rrfv ttoXlv X.a.j3(i>lpvci (Ti(r(Ta<^epv£a--t),^ with or against Tissaphernes : (a) dat. of association or opposition with ■jroke/jLofvvTa ; (b) nom. Turtra^epVTji XII., gen. Tttra-ac^tpi/ovs XXI., dat. Turcracjaepva, acc. Ticr- a-atfiipvyiv XXIII., stem TuT(Ta^epvta--, v, was not at all angry at their (lit. them) waging war or because they were waging war : airlov may be regarded as the gen. of cause with TJxOeTo, a verb of feeling, or gen. abs. with the parte, expressing cause. 9. Kal ■yelp, cf. XXI. 10. air-^mjiTr-e, was forwarding, continued to forward; tense? 11. -yiYvoii^vovs, accruing (lit. becoming, arising) : note the attribu- tive position, cf. ^aunXevovra XVI. 12. Sao-noiis: gender? 13. mi;, which : what part of speech ? cf. ijs VII. ; (a) antecedent irdAecov; (&) for as, acc. fem., obj. of £x«)i'; attracted from the accusar tive to the case of its antecedent ; (c) nom. os, 17, o, declined like airos except that the fem. dual is generally like the masc. and neut. 14. Tiiro-ac|)lpvows, of (belonging to) Tissaphernes. 15. Itvyxivj-v f\av, cf. Trapfbv irvyxavc VI. ; how translate 2j(0)v ? 16. X£ppov^, Cherronesus, a peninsula on the Thracian side of the Hellespont ; dat. fem., 2d decl. 17. rfi . . . "APvSov, attributive to Xeppov^a-a as the article ry shows ; note the two ways of writing attributive modifiers, e.g., 6 ayaObi avrjp = 6 av^p 6 i.ya.Oo's = the good man. 18. KOT avTiirlpds, over against, opposite, an adv. phrase often written KaTavrnrepdi, gOT. the gen. 'A/SuSau. 19. TivSs Tov Tpiirov, in the following manner, thus, as follows = uSe XX. : (a) adv. acc, cf. oiSh n. 6 ; (6) nom. oSe, ■^Se, toSe, declined like the article with -8e added, but note the accents of oSe, iJSe, oTSe, aiBe; (c) takes the predicate position like outos. 20. (jnryAs (for vyaS-s), fugitive, exile: (a) stem vya^ loses 8 before -s, cf. Latin virtus for virtut-s; (6) dat. plu. ^uya'-o-i (for LESSON XXIV. 108 <^uya8-vya.&-i, etc. ; complete the declen- sion ; the voc. sing, is like the nom. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. Verbs of association or opposition take the dat. case to express tlie person or thing with or against which something is or is done, called the dat. of association. 2. c-o contract to ov. 3. Nom., ace. and voc, plii. neut. end in -o. 4. irtiv contract to ov. 5. The ace. is used adTerbially. • 6. An expression is in. the attributive position (1) if it is between the article and its substantive or (2) after the substan- tive, provided that the article of the substantive is repeated before the attributive expression: e.g., (1) o ayaSis dvyjp, (2) 6^ dvrip 6 o.'yaSds. 7. Participles and phrases, like adjectives, may take the attribu- tive position. 8. Adverbs of place may govern the gen. case. 9. T, S, and 6 are dropped before s. 10. Stems in eo--, 3d decl., lose o- between vowels. 11. Verb-themes ending in e or a, contract e or a with a fol- lowing vowel. 12. The relative may be attracted into the case of its antecedent, especially from the ace. to the gen. or dat. 13. The subj. of an infin. is in the ace. case. 4. VOCABULARY. 1. tfi^l, about. 6. vofilla, puto, I think. 2. dvTiiripds, directly opposite. 7. oSt, this, the following. 3. axOofiai, / am vexed, annoyed. 8. ouSeCs, ovS^v, nobody, nothing. 4. Sairavdu, 1 spend (waste} money. 9. d rpdiros, manner. 5. Xtppoviinf la tbe text omits the first article, because It Is a proper name, and proper names generally require no article. 104 INDUCTIVE GREKK PRIMER. 5. EXERCISES. I. Decline: <^uyas (<^DyaS-s), o8e, Sao'/tdf. II. Translate : 1. oi <^vyaSes oiSev -^xOovto. 2. oiSets ^axriXeutra. 3. Oi Sacrijiol ot /SacnXetoi iv Mi\ijra> (TweXeyovro. 4. ivo/xi^oV) vofi-i^ovtri, Tvy)(a.v€ii;, aTrtTre/XTrK. 5. rjv 8vVTi]Tai, ^acnXu. TroXtfii^cra. III. Translate: 1. He thinks that Tissaphernes is spending money upon the army. 2. The satraps used-to-forward the revenues from the cities which they happened to have. 3. In order that the king might receive ( = take) the revenues of the province, he (had) appointed Cyrus satrap. 4. To be thinking; thinking. 5. The mother of Cyrus happens to have an army opposite Miletus. « 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Adverbial accusative. 2. Accent in contraction. 3. Case with verbs of fighting. 4. Contraction of a-av. 5. Effect of long ultima on accent of ttoXeo)?, App. 48, n. c. 6. Agreement of the relative. 7. Mutes before ^^^^- ^i^® a-Tpdrev/M. 8. dp|i.(i-|i.cvo-s (op/xa-d-juevo-s), rushing or setting out from Cher- ronesus : (a) from op/xaoi, / start, cf. Sairavdo) XXIV. 9. Tots Qpi^^l . . . otKovo-i, waged war with the Thradans who dwelt beyond the. Hellespont: (a) note the attrib. position of Toii . . . oIkovo-i., cf. X.f.ppovrjo-m . . . 'A^iSov XXIV. ; (6) nom. ®pai (©/jax-s), gen. ®paK-6g, dat. plu. ®paii (©paic-o-t) ; construction ? cf. Tiipvei XXIV. ; (c) oiKovcn (for oiKe-o-jr-cri) ; e-o contr. to ou, cf . (iroAe/te-o-j/T-a) iroXefjiovvTa XXIV. ; vr lost before a-, cf. artfjuiaBeii XIV., {Xvo-vT-ai) kiovai XXIII. N. 18. 10. wfiEXei (tu<^eA.e-£, cf. (^trflcVe-e) ■^(rOeva HI-), he aided: (a) from iieXe-m ; (6) o> remains unchanged by augment. 11. KaC, also. 12. (Tvv-E-pdXX-o-vTo, contributed means, lit. cast together (from their resources or for themselves) : note the force of the mid. 13. Tfiv o-rpaTiuTuv, of his soldiers : (a) nom. (TTpanmrrii, gen. -ou, 1st decl. masc, cf. ottAiti^s, oTrStrdi X. ; (6) note the accent of the gen. plu. — why circumflex ? voc. sing. ? 106 INDUCTIVE (JREKK PRIMER. 14. tKovo-oi, willing, Eng. willingly as if adv. ; from cKiav, fern. cKoScra, cf. XXIII. 7. A palatal mute (k, y, x) before s forms with it |. 8. a-o, a-o) contract to u>, cf. opiJ.u>(a-6^fi.£voi, 6p/iG (a-0)) . 9. VT is dropped before o- and the preceding vowel is lengthened. 10. v. 12. Adjectives and participles in -uv have the fern, in -ova-a. 4. VOOABULABY. 1. a7a|i.ai, / ac^mire. 9. v CTTpaTKoTuiv T(yu jSafftAevovTos. 6. TroAe/u.^trojuej' rovrois tois crTpaTttorais, Tois airois (TTparimraK, TOts oi, cf . Tpoi^ XXV. 3. ovra, thus, as precedes; (58e, thus, as follows. 4./ i-\dveav-c(v), escaped notice being supported, was secretly sup- ported : from Xav^avto ; tense ? stem XavOav, theme XaO, cf. Xap-^dv-io, 5. {fvos, guest-friend, friend. 6. wv, with iTuyxaviv, ci. wapiav VI 108 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMEK. 7. liiro . . . dvTurrao-iuTuv, lit. by his at-home-adversaries, hy his adversanes at home : (a) vtto with the gen., 6y, = Lat. ab with abl. ; (b) oiKoi, adv. in attributive position with the force of an adj., cf. Trap' iavTiS XIX., Kar avmrepai 'A^vSov XXIV. ; On the mean- ing, cf . oticeco, I dwell XXV. ; note the accent, cf . the optative ; (c) ovno-rao-KOToiv, cf. a-TpaTLoyr&v XXV., what decl. ? nom. sing. ? 8. 4'pxcTai, cf . d7r-^A.^e XIV. 9. atret (aiTe-et), asJcs, demands: (a) from aireu, cf. i^-aiTri-a-a-fjiivr] XIII. ; (6) e-ci contr. to a, cf. 7roA,e/ic-av, -eiv XIX. 10. air6v, the person asked ; ievov?, fuaOov, the things asked; asked him for mercenaries and pay; note the hist. pres. 11. cts, into, about (with numerals), about 2,000 mercenaries. 12. J^vous, cf. ievtK N. 5, hired soldiers, mercenaries; note the two different meanings of $evoi. Mercenaries were called ievoi, guest- friends, by a polite fiction, to avoid the uncomplimentary term " hirelings," iu(t6(otoC. 13. Tpiuv, three : nom. T/oets, Lat. tres. 14. )i.i)v-av, months : (a) nom. sing, fji'qv, gen. (x.rjv-o'i ; (6) on nom. sing, without case-ending -s, cf. p-riT-qp XIII., avqp XX. 15. MS, orirthe-ground-that, saying that, with the parte, cf. -/i£vo-s XXV. ; ircpL-yev-o-iievo^, getting or becoming beyond ov over, i.e., overcoming; (6) av belongs with the parte, giving it the potential force, would; (c) note the gen. case after a verb of superiority, cf. apxo XXIII. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. TUYX^"'* ^3'S the parte, with it where the infin. might be expected ; this is called the supplementary parte, because it supple- ments the meaning of the verb on which it depends. 2. JIvos has two different meanings, (1) guest-friend, (2). hired soldier, mercenary. 3. -ivi with the gen. of a person expresses agency. 4. Adverbs, like participles and phrases, in the attributive posi- tion, have the value of attributive adjectives. LESSON XXVI. 109 5. Verbs of asking, demanding, take two objects, one of the person and another of the thing. 6. cts, with numerals = about. 7. Stems in v and p, 3d decl., do not take the case-ending -s in the nom. sing. 8. Verbs of superiority, ruling, take the gen. case. 4. VOCABULARY. 1. aM(ii, / beg, demand. ' 9. d Je'vosi gwU-friend, mercenary. 2. ov, with the opt. or parte. 10. otKoi, at home. gives a potential force, 11. ir«p£, around. might, would. 12. ircpi-7C7V0|j.ai, / become superior, 3. 6 dvTiirTa(ri(&TT]5) adversary- overcome. . 4. Surx^Xioi, 2,000. 13. iri^^u, / press, pass, am hard 5. cpxo|i.ai, / come. pressed. 6. XavSdivoi, / escape notice. 14. rpcts, three. 7. d [i^jv, month. 15. Tp^(|>iu, I support. 8. d |i,i(r66s, pay. 16. i5ir6,i under, by. 5. EXERCISES. I. Decline: jU,i;i', dvTto-TacriolTiys, fiurOoi. II. Translate : 1. awj; 8' ovv outoj tiS jSao-iAeZ iiri^ovkevcnxTa XavOdva ^ TToXis. 2. Henas 8' o Tlappdcrioi c^iXos w Kvpio iroXep.-qaa.. III. Translate : 1. These armies were secretly supported. 2. The mother of the king happened to be supported by Cyrus. 3. The guards at home were secretly supported. 4. The soldiers were se- cretly supported at home. 5. The soldiers ask (aiToBo-t) Cyrus for a month's pay. 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Supplementary participles, — how translated. 2. Construc- tions after alriu). 3. Construction with verbs of fighting, verbs of 1 vno = by only with the gen. in expressionB of agency. 110 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. superiority, compounds with crvV and in. 4. wo with the gen. 6. jrapa with the gen. 6. Use 6f oticot in Anab. t. i. 10. 7. Circum- stantial participles. 8. [Uv Xmp XirjTov Xvrjre \i5-(r-ijs Xv-(T-r]TOV Xv-a--r]T€ Xvy XvjjTov Xvma-i Xu-tr-jj Xv-(T-rjTOV Xv-fT-axn (c) Eemembering the analysis of Xt-o-i-fu, the pres. opt., and given the tense-stem Xvo-a-, we may expect the aor. opt. to be Xi5v, i\ovcj-a, i\dvv, cf . ^(XoSo-a XVI. and App. 67. LESSON XXIX. -REVIEW. Pn preparing this Review Lesson follow closely the directions given with previous Review Lessons.] 1. TEXT. Anab. 1. 1. 5, /cat tS>v Trap' ea.vTo). ~"44. I (fievyw. 45. wfttkio). 118 INDUCTIVE GREEK , PRIMER. 1. o&injp.^ 2. o ocvTUTTa(nu)Trji- 3. o jSapjSajQO;. i. vyv- 5. 6 SapeiKOi. 6. 6 SacTjuds. 7. ij Swa/Lus. 8. ij iiri^ovhj. 9. 17 doAao'O'a. 1. AXXoi- 2. oLTrapda-KcvOi. 3. piXruTTO'S. NOUNS. 10. 6 /iiyv. 11. o /jLUrdoi. 12. 6 ^ei/os. 13. IJ TTOAlS. 14. TO irpayiw.. 15. ^ irpo^atni. 16. TO crTpaTtvpa. 17. 6 o-TpaTtrijTiys. 18. ■^ o-uXAoyjJ. ADJECTIVES. 5. EKaOTOS. 6. iKiav. 7. I|, Tpcts. 8. iKavds. 9. pxpioi. 19. 6 TpOTTOS. 20. ^ TpOfj>T^. 21. 6 tftevytov- 22. 6 (jivyds. 6 povpapxoi. TO -Xprtpa. TO xpi'O'toi'. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 10. OTTOffOS. 11. ovh'iis, cfvSev. 12. irSs. 13. itAeTo'tos. 1. av. 2. CWoi'KbJf. 3. avTirripdi. 4. /«;, OV, OVK. PRONOUNS. 1. eavToC. 2* « ^ . o, -q, TO. 3. SSe. 4. ol. 5. "OUTOS. 5. oIkoi- 6. irpouOiv. 7. TO ipxoiiov. PKBP0SITI0N8. 1. &IJ,L. 2. eV. 3. Trept. 4. irXiji'. . virep. 8. Tore. 9. <58e. 10. (OS. CONJUNCTIONS 1. irpiv. 2. > TE. 3. (US, ort. 4. EXERCISES. I. Tor Oral Translation:^ 1. Cyrus collects his Greek force in (=into) the city. 2. The king took the exiles as unprepared as possible. 3. The city Miletus formerly belonged to the soldiers of Cyrus. 4. The force of the king was plotting against Tissar 1 Many teacbers may prefer to have these sentences written on paper by their classes and corrected* and then given orally as a review lesson. ' This plan should be followed with the ezerclaes " For Written Translation." LESSON XXX. 119 phemes. 5. The guards thought (that) Tissaphernes was-waging- war against Cyrus. 6. I continued-to-forward (= was forwarding) the revenues to my (= the) friends. 7. The fugitives were Lacedaeraoniaiis. 8. The guest-friends of Cyrus came to the king. 9. .Thus the guards were secretly supported for Cyrus. 10. You ordered men to get (= taka) soldiers and to come. II. For Written Translation : 1. They will wage war against the king, setting out from Miletus. 2. In company with these men you (plu.) were collecting the Greek force. 3. In company with the same men the fugitives were taking as many cities as possible. 4. These cities belonged to Clearchus. 5. The men had (of. XXII.) other pretexts for taking the soldiers. 6. We ordered our (= the) opponents to ask the king for a month's wages. 7. Mercenaries in Thessaly were secretly supported. 8. We were taking ; we took ; we were having ; to be taking ; to take to order. 9. If the king (shall) order (subj.), I will wage war against Cyrus. 10. -The generals released ( = loosed) the guards in order that they might collect the soldiers. LESSON XXX. 1. TEXT. Ajsab. I. II. 1, 'Eirei . . . (jTpd.Teujjja.. 2. NOTES. [With the aid of the vocabulary in the latter part of the book, the pupil will mas- ter the meaning of some words not given in the Notes of this and subsequent liessons.] 1. 4-8iK{i, it seemed best: (a) from hoKia, imp. for c-Sokc-c, cf. ^o-^e- vu III. ; (6) although translated impersonally, its subject is iro/oew- (rdoj., to proceed. 2. iropE^lc-o-Sai, cf. irapa-yeve-o-floi XXVIII., from Tropev-o-fjuu, dep. ; pres. infin. mid. 3. (ifv, without the corresponding 8e here, so that only the pretext of Cyrus is given and his real reasons are omitted. 4. l-irowt-To (e-TToie-e-To) from Troie'o), I make, imp. mid., made (for himself). 120 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 5. los PovX6|iEvos, saying that he wished, on tos cf. XXVIII. 6. «K-po\-etv, from £K-j8aUo), cf. £^£-y3a\-e(v) XXI.; what tense? of. Xa/Setv, Xiirdv ; -what suf&x is -av ? iK-^aXK-av is what ? differenee in meaning between this and iK^aXuv ? 7. rTovTAirdo-iv, adv. (TravTa + 7racrt(v), all-in-all, ef. iras; neut. ace. and dat. plu., TrdvTa, Trao-i), wholly, entirely. 8. t6 re papPapiKdv, sc. (TTpaTtv/jM : note that the accent on t6 does not change to the grave because an enclitic follows and is read as if a part of to. 9. oo-ov Tiv a (of. dvA, up), upward. 7. tjkoi, I have come. 2. papPapiKds,^ barbarian. 8. oo-os, quantus, how great. 3. SoKEi, it seems. 9. iravrdirdo-iv, wholly. 4. 'E\Xi)viKd5, Greek. " 10. iropEvo|i,ai, I advance. 5. IvravSo, there. 11. o-uv-aWdTTa, I reconcile. 6. TiSi), now, at length, at last. 6. EZERCISSS. I. Decline trwoAAayei/rt, TouTous, irpd^airtv. II. Write a synopsis of Xiym in the pres. system active. III. For Oral Translation: 1. He was wishing -to banish the Pisidians wholly from Miletus. 2. But he did not have a pretext for banishing (= of banishing) them. 3. Cyrus sends the army which he has back to the king. 4. They sent orders to the generals • to come with their armies. IV. For Written Translation: 1. At length they resolved (=it seemed best to them) to collect an army. 2. Therefore they ordered Aristippus and Xenias to come with (from Xa/3u>v; sing, or plu. ?) all the army which they had. 3. And Clearchus also sends the army which he has. 4. The generals were collecting the soldiers at home. ^ The instructor should explain od the board the formation and inflection of words assigned as a grammar lesson before the pupil is asked to learn the paradigm. Let this practice be adopted not only with Avdet'?, but with all other paradigms referred to in this book. * fh BapPapiKov (sc. oTparev/ia), the barbarian (army). 122 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Elision. 2. Enclitics. 3. Grave accent before an enclitic. 4. First and second passive suffixes. 5. us with the participle. 6. Uses of the aorist participle. 7. Words in the attributive posi- tion. 8. Present system. 9. Act. imv. endings. 10. Decl. of the relative pronoun. 11. Stem and analysis of Xv9as. LESSON XXXI 1. TEXT. AnAB. I. II. 1, 2, Kol UfvCq. . . . OlKttSe. 2. NOTES. 1. irpo-ci-o-T^i-KEi., praefuerat, was comTnanding, cf. df^eo-T^Kecrav XXI., plup. indie, act. 3d sing. ; a, augmented reduplication ; a-Trj, for o-Ta, theme; -kei-, suffix of 1st pluperfect, cf. iK-TreirTmiK-or-ai XXII. ; pres. irpota-T'^iJ.i, cf. Karia-r-q XII. 2. Tov . . . |«viKoi), gen. governed by the verb of commanding; cf. a.p\av XXIII. ; SC. (TTpaTevfjuiTOi, cf. ^ap^apiKov, 'EAXjjvtKov XXX. ; why does h rais TroXeo-t stand between tov and ieviKoS ? 3. li'Keiv = eX0£iv. 4. XopivTo, for Aa/So'vTi to agree with Bevi'?, attracted to the ace. case as if agreeing with the subject of the infin. 5. ToOs oXXovs ir\i\v, the or Ms others except, i.e., all except. 6. <|>vX&TT-(iv, cf. \v-av, i^v'Xal (^ ^v'Xa/c-s), .^uXax-i; XX. ; what does the verb mean ? 7. i-KdXc-o-E, cf. i-TToiTj-cre, i-Xv-a-e. ; where found ? from KaXE-m, 1 call ; £ of the theme KaXc does not lengthen to ?; as in i-Troir]-a-e. 8. k-Ki\tv-' a. arpaTevo/tat, ov irpoaOev iravaopM irpiv av vpSs KaTaya.yu> (subj.) oiKa^; On irpXv Sv cf. XXVII.: (a) Ka\-»s, adv., well; cf. cuvoiK-fis XIX. (6) KaTa-irpd$-ei6(v) = Kara-Trpaycr-ae^y), cf. oTT-e-Sei^e VIII., Xi5-<7-ae; aor. opt. act. 3d sing, from KaTa-^parTio, should succeed. (c) Tci irpaYiiora or TavTa, the antecedent of o, in the things, or in those {things) for which, etc. (d) |i ; T, fl ; K, X- 10. The negative with the infinitive is usually /*?/. 1^4 1^'DUCT1VE GK£KK PKIMEK. 11. £70) has a reduplicated theme in the 2d aor. 12. y&p, like the Latin enim, does not stand first in its sentence. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Conjugation of the pres. and 1st aor. act. imv. of X.vo>, and the 2d aor. imv. of IXittoi/, App. 76, 84. 2. The 1st perf. system: reduplication, tense-sufBxes, personal endings, App. 71, 6; 80. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. TJiaKp6iro\\,9, citadel. 7. ^ivm6s, mercenary (^ force) . 2. KaX^u, / call. 8. oIlKaSE, homeward. 3. KaX6$, beautiful. 9. imva, I cause to cease; mid., 4. KoXus, beautifully, well. I cease. 5. Kar-i.yo, I lead down or back, 10. irpo-Cirniiu, I set before. restore. 11. liir-KrxvfotJiai, I promise. 6. Karo-irpoTTw, I accomplish, sue- 12. i|>vXdTTa>, / guard. ceed. 6. BXERCISSS. I. Decline aKpoTroXis, ^uyaSas, oAAos. II. Analyze : e/coA.eo'E, iroXiopKovvra?, vydSa^, KaTwirpa^eiev, ■iravac- (tOol, iiTicrTf.vov. III. For Oral Translation : 1. These men were guarding the Greek (force) in the city. 2. Xenias was able to take the citadel. 3. And we also called Xenias the fugitive. 4. We were ordering the men to stop the guards. 5. They ordered the hoplites to make the expedition with them. IV. For Written Translation : 1. AU. men were friends to Cyrus, except as many as were in the king's army. 2. If the generals suc- ceed well, they will release (= loose) the fugitives. 3. Xenias commanded the mercenary force in the city for Cyrus. 4. If I suc- ceed, I will restore (/caT-a^o)) the exiles to their homes. 1. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Formation of the perfect stem. 2. The genitive after wpo' iiTTrjfii.. 3. Attributes used substantively. 4. Principal parts of LESSON XXXII. 125 the verb' 6. Active infinitives and participles of Xiai. 6. First and second pass, suffix. 7. Principal parts (act.) of keXcuai, n-oteco. 8. Augmeiit and reduplication of at. 9. edv with the subjunctive may be changed to what in indirect discourse after secondary- tenses ? LESSON XXXII. 1. TEXT. AnAB. I. II. 2, 3, oi 8c iJSeMS . . . (TTpaTevo/ievrnv. 2. NOTES. 1. oi S€', cf. 5 Si XIV. 2. ijB^ois, adv., cf. KoXfis XXXI. 3. c-ire(6--o-vra, obeyed, were persuaded, cf. ■mWeTca XIII. 4. J-irtirTe«-o-v, takes the dat., indirect obj. ; Eng. would have ace. 5. irap-fjo-av, cf. Trap-uvax V., ■^aav XXI. ; for accent cf. aTr-rjXOe XIV. 6. els instead of iv, because Trap^a-av implies previous motion. 7. SdpScis, declined like the plu. of ttoXk. 8. ToOs Ik tmv ir(S\cci)v, the (soldiers) from the cities : the substantive omitted and ck rStv TroXewv attributive ; Ik for iv because of separation implied in Xa^dv ; cf . irapa. ^Sao-tXcws XVII. ; the thought is : he took the men (in the cities) out of the cities and arrived. 9. dirXfras els TerpoKicr-xiXCovs, about 4,000 hopUtes, lit. to the num- ber of, etc. 10. ■yii|jiv-iKvi-o-fuu, cf. a^-iKvoiTo XVII. ; I augments to I. 4. KaTo-vo^-o-ds, when he perceived, cf. KtvSui/ewos XIV., Xu-o-as j from Kara-vofrio, -voj}, KaT-€-v6r]-tra, KaTa-verVOTj-Ka ; circumstantial parte. ; tense ? 5. TaiiTo, lit. these (things), Eng. this. 6. (leCjov-a, greater: from fiei^oiv, irregular comparative of /xcyas, great; ace. sing. fern, agreeing with Trapaa-Kemjv. 7. ■t\yr\-v6r]uvo-s, {and) because he thought (the preparation to be greater) ; from Tjye-o-/*ot, dep., I lead, think; fut. ^yq-a-o-imi, aor. ■^yrj-a-d-p.'qv ; if, like i\u XXV. 128 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 8. Tj cos, than as (against the Pisidians), i.e., greater than would be needed against, etc. 9. as pacriMd, to (the) king ; ms as a preposition is used only with the ace. case of persons. 10. B ISvvaro Ti\\.vpa, bridge, sub. of lir-^v, was upon or over : note the accent of yivpa ; words in -pa preceded by v have -a in the nom. and ace. and voc. sing. ; declension ? 23. t-liyr{-yAtii\ irXoCois, joined by means of boats, made of boats: (a) from ^evy-vv-p,i, I join, perf. mid. parte. ; (b) note that the reduplication consists of £ because the verb begins with the double consonant ^ ( = ds) ; (c) the perf. mid. does not have the suffix -ko-, e.g., \i—\v-pxa from. Xvm, cf. SeSojuei/al XXI. ; (d) ■ttKolol^, dat. o{ means. LESSON xxxm. 129 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. I augments to I, a to t], o to w, -q and m are unchanged. 2. TauTo (plu.) is often used in Greek where Eng. requires this. 3. i^vas, great, is not compared with -repo-, but has the comparar tive fi,€i^-, \vs. 2. NOTES. 1. toBtov, why masc. ? 2. SvorPos, {after) going across (lit. through), {after) crossing: (a) 2d aor. parte, from Sia-^aiva, cf. aai-frPrf X.; {b) theme )8o, -jScts for -j8a-vT-s, cf. AiS-o-a-s for Xv-tra-vr-s; (c) on decl. of. irSs XXI., Avcras. 3. Iv-a, from nom. els (for h-Cds, gen., loisdom; here, musical skill. 12. S^p-fUk, cf. CK-S^p-Cl). 13. Kp<|idirai, from Kpeim-wvfu, cf. StiK-vvfu, to hang {up), 1st aor. act. infin. coordinate with iK-hupax. 14. o-Btv = l| o« ; the suffix -Oev shows the place from which, source. 15. alirqYaC, cUri(v) understood. 16. Sid, with ace, on account of; with gen., through. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. eoTi for Eo-Tt at the beginning of sentences. 2. io-rC and eitrt are enclitics. 3. A word before an enclitic, if proparoxytone or properispome- non, takes an acute on the ultima. 4. Enclitics retain their accents when emphatic. 5. Jird with the dat. denotes place under which, as h denotes place in which. 6. V becomes p. before labial mutes. 7. The genitive of measure is used to express extent, duration, or value. 8. Linguals are dropped before s. 9. Sid with aec, on account of; with the gen., through. 10. -Bev denotes place whence, e.g., o-Oev, Ivreu-Oev. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Enclitics, App. 23. 2. Declension of ttou's, Note 6. 3. Declension of veawds, App. 35. 136 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. TO avrpov, cave. 9. X^7, / say. 2. TO Sip^a, hide, skin. 10. viKdu, / conquer. 3. cK-S^po), I flay, skin. 11. o6«v, whence. 4. iyk-PiWa, flow into, empty. 12. irept, about, concerning. 5. ipiCfit, I contend. 13. d iroils, foot. 6. ipv|iv6s, fortified. 14. rj o-oitiCd, wisdom, musical skill. 7. ia-rl, est, is. 15. iiir6 (with dat.), under. 8. Kpe|jLdvvv|ii, I hang. 6. EXERCISES. I. Decline trriytj, aoLa., Scp/xa. II. Write a synopsis of ifi^dWa in the present system active. III. For Oral Translation: 1. At (= upon) the source of the rivers there is a city. 2. Apollo strives with Marsyas about his (= the) wisdom. 3. And for this reason they call (KoXavcn) the river Marsyas. 4. This river flows through a city. 5. This city is called Celaenae. 6. The great king (dat. of poss.) had a palace and a park in Celseuse. IV. For Written Translation : 1. There were within this palace the sources of a river. 2. The river was twenty-five feet in width (ace). 3. Through the park; on account of the river; about the hide. 4. There is a river in Celsenee which is called Marsyas. 5. And there is also a citadel in this city. 6. The park in Celaenae is said to be full of wild beasts. 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Ala with the accusative ; with the genitive. 2. Enclitics. 3. The accent of enclitics. 4. Accent of words before enclitics. 5. Enclitics and proclitics contrasted. 6. mo with the genitive ; with the dative. 7. Genitive of measure. 8. Declension of evpos. 9. -6ev in o6ev. 10. " before other consonants. 11. Agreement of verb with neuter plural subject. 12. Declension of Mapa-vas- 13. Breathing on pet 14. Stem, nominative singular, and declension of ttoSIov. 15. For- mation of the nominative singular of words declined like Seppa. 16. Formation of the 1st aorist of liquid verbs. LESSON XXXVI. 137 LESSON XXXVI. 1. TEXT. AnAB. I. II. 8, 9, ivTovOa 'Beptt]^ . . . Sur)(iXunK. 2. NOTES. 1. ore, when: ore introduces an event presumably known to the reader, and uses it to fix the time of the main act; cf. cum with the indie, in Latin. 2. i]TTi)-eE(s, cf. \v-Ods, from ^TToofuu, lam defeated; where found? 3. T^ fAxa, in the (well-known) battle: note that the article is used to refer to something well known or famous — the battle of Salamis. 4. air-<-xiip(ci = e-€), tense ? 5. olKO-So)iii-o-ai, cf. Kpijuurai, EK-Sctpoi XXXV. 6. Tc . . . Ka(, both . . . and; cf- xai . . . /cat. 7. I^Too-tv, nom. e^erarrts; declension? 8. api6)MSv, cf. arithmetic. 9. t^tv-o-vTo, became ; with numbers, amounted to ; tense ? 10. C, with numerals like els ; cf. the adv. p^(i>, / retreat. 7. olKoSa)Ua>, / build. 2. o &pi6|i6s, number. 8. oKraKdo-ioi, eight hundred. 3. 1] 'E\Xas, Greece. 9. ort, aeti, when. 4. 1) 4£cTao-is, examination, review. 10. , Xvm, Ktkev Cf. Eng. agony. z Cf. Eng. athletic, ' Cf. Eng. theory. LESSON XXXVIII. 141 LESSON XXXVIII. 1. TEXT. AnAB. I. II. 11, "EvTcS^ei/ . . . diroSiSovot. 2. NOTES. 1. Kavo-Tpov ircSCov, " Cayster-plain," cf. Spring-field. 2. ir\&v, used as au indeclinable adj. in the gen. plu. agreeing with itTjvmv understood. 3. l-i-vT-cs, e-VrnUes, going: pres. parte, from £t)at, I go, theme i, nom, sing. Imv, uruua, iov. 4. dir-u'Tou-v, from ott-oitco), / ask back, ask what is due, demand; ai augments to g, cf. ■girOd.vero XXIII. ; -ow for -e-o-v ; where found ? 5. Si-f|-y-c, from St-ayo), I lead through, continue; note the augment and the accent; why not St-ijyc? with Xeyon/, continued to express hopes, cf. wapiav irvyxave VI. 6. SfjXos ifv dvui|icvo5, was evident being troubled, was evidently troubled; dvlujuei'os for dvia-o-/^cyQ;. 7. irpds, according to, with the gen. rpoTrov. 8. Toii belongs to rpoTrov ; note the attrib. position of Kvpov. 9. txovra, having (means), if he had (means), in the ace. to agree with the omitted subject of the infin. 10. (1^ with the infin. ; cf. p.r] KaraXvaaL XXVII. 11. diro-8i-86-vai, to give back or over, i.e., pay what was due; pres. act. infin. from diro-8t8ai/it : (a) note a reduplication with i in the present ; theme So ; (6) -vai, infin. end. of the act., unlike Av-av, belongs to /*i-verbs ; (c) used as the subject of rjv. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. cl|u, theme t, I am going ; ei/ii, theme ea-, I am. 2. |i^, instead of oi, is the negative generally used with the infin. 3. Verbs in -fu have the pres. act. infin. in -vat. 4. The gen. which limits a substantive may be put in the attribu- tive position. 5. irpis is used with the gen., dat., and ace. 142 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 6. T(fli)|ii, S(8o)|u, and ^Cyvoiiu have a reduplication with i in the present system. 7. The infin. may be used as subject of a verb. 8. Circumstantial participles may express condition. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Declension of stems ending in a lingual mute (masc. and fern.), App. 44. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. dvldo, / trouble. 7. ij IXirCSi hope. 2. air-aiW(i), / ask as my due, demand. 8. eirx«iTos, rer^otesi, last. 3. airo-&CS(i))i,i, I give over or back, 9. i] Ovpo,^ door. pay. 10. o(|k(X.ii>, 1 owe. 4. Sf]Xos, evident. 11. irXt'ov,' more. 5. Si-dY", / continue. 12. itoXXcIkis, often. 6. clfii, 1 go ; Uvai,^ Cf. Eng pleon-atm. '< Cf . Bhig. poly-sylldbie. LESSON XXXIX. 143 infin. in -vai. 6. Augment of ai. 7. Use of the circumstantial parte. 8. Greek for "he continued to say" ; "he was evidently saying." 9. Reduplication in the pres. of tCOtiiu, SiSio/u. 10. The supplementary participle. LESSON XXXIX. 1. TEXT. AnAB. I. II. 12, 13, "Evrav^a . . . oikov/xei^v. 2. NOTES. 1. di|>iKVciTai (afft-iK-vi-t-Toi). 2. Sucw^o-ios, gen. of Svewco-is (-ws for -eo)?) ; note the attributive position. 3. Tov . . . paa-iX^ms, in apposition with 'SvewicruK ; note the attributive position of KiXiKtov. 4. irapd, with ace. to a place beside; with the gen. from beside, cf. Trapa /SacnXeajs XVII. ; with the dat. beside, cf. Trap' iavTiS XIX. 5. IX^cTo, lit. she was said to have given, it was said that she gave, personal for the impersonal construction. 6. Sov-vai, 2d aor. act. infin. of SCSafu ; cf. airo-a-T^-vai XXI. ; pres. Si&o-vai, cf. XXXVIII. ; note that the pres. and 2d aor. act. infini- tives of /xi-verbs end in -vat. 7. iroWd xp^tiara, iroAAo from iroXvs, ttoXXt^, iroXv, — much money. 8. 8" ovv, but at any rate. 9. dw-^-Su-Kt, cf. l-6-q-Ki XXXVII., another 1st aor. with k instead of (T, from SSwfu, fut. Swa-ai. 10. [iTivffiv, gen. of measure. 11. KtXio-o-a, the substantive omitted, so. ■yvv^. 12. av'Wjv, contracted form for eaw^v, from eavrm the reflexive, not from airos. 13. iKiytro has the infin. for its sub. ; but translate impersonally, it was said. a. OBSERVATIONS. 1. The present and 2d aor. act. infinitives of verbs in -/ti end in -vat. _ 2. Infinitives in -vat accent the penult. 144 INDUCTIVE GREEK PKIMER. 3. iroXis is declined irregularly in some of its cases. 4. SC8(i)|i,i, like riOrnu, has its 1st aor. in k. 5. c'avTov may contract to airoS. 6. The indirect object is put in the dative. 7. The dative is governed by prepositions in composition, e.g., CrVV, CTTl. 8. Limiting genitives are often put in the attributive position. 9. The personal construction is of frequent occurrence in Greek where English uses the impersonal construction. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Declension of ttoXv^} 2. Conjugation of the aor. mid. of Xdirm, App. 84. 3. Accent of the verb, App. 87. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. T] •yvvi], woman, wife. 3. crvy-7(7vo|iai, have intercourse, 2. rj o-Tparid, army. acquaintance with. 4. WTTOpes, four. 6. EXERCISES. I. Conjugate Xcyo/uu in the present system middle. II. Decline orpaTia, ^(prjijui. III. For Oral Translation : 1. The woman gave much money to Cyrus. 2. They will pay (from diroSroo-o)) a month's wages to their armies. 3. Cyrus used-to-have (imperf.) a garrison about him(self). 4 They call {KaXovm) the city Thymbrium. IV. For Written Translation : 1. In this place a woman gave the commander much money. 2. But at any rate more than four months' pay was given {iSoOrj) to the soldiers. 3. The woman comes from the king of the Cilicians to Cyrus. 4. And Cyrus also associated with the Cilician woman. 1 Cf . fieyai : there are two Btems^ iro^v- and noWo-, and they are used like the two sterna in fteyas; the dual number is not used. LESSON XL. 145 7. TOPICS FOB STUDY. 1. Infinitives in -vat. 2. Accent of infinitives in -vat. 3. Stem and decl. of ■jrokvvpa. (b) veavtas. (c) oSos. (d) ttoCs. (e) Stems ending in a lingual mute (raasc. and fem.). (/) ev/jos. (g) Adjectives : Contr. in -oSs. (h) eiyevTjs. (i) evhaiihrnv. (j) /j-ei^uiv. {k) X.v6m. (J) \v(Tai. (m) fie'yas, woXvi. (n) The Relative. (0) Formation of adverbs, (p) Local ending -8e. 3. Conjugation. — (a) Tense systems. (6) Principal parts in active voice, (c) Synopsis of Xvu) act., pres. and fut. mid. (d) \vq>, act., mid. and pres. (e) XeCino, 2d aor. act. and mid. (/) Augment. (g) Reduplication, (h) Accent, (i) Fut. stem, '{j) 1st perf. stem. (Jc) Tense-suffixes and endings of the 1st perf. system. (1) 1st aorists in k. (m) Endings of the act. imv. (w) Endings of the mid. voice. (o) Formation of the perf. mid. system. (p) Tense-suffixes of the 1st and 2d pass, systems. 4. Syntax. — (a) Extent of time and space. (6) Gen. of fullness, (c) Gen. of measure, (d) Partitive gen. (e) Gen. of source. (/) Dat. with marevai. (g) irapd, irpos. (h) Imperfect, (i) Fut. cond. more vivid, (^j) Negative with infinitive, (k) v. 3. TO d6Xov. 4. rj aKponoKi^, 5. TO aVTpOV. 6. 6 apiOfioi. 7. TO. y8a(rtA.£ta, 8. ^ yi;. 11. TO Sepjua. 12. 15 'EXXcEs. 13. ij lAirt's. 1. aKow(i>. 2. avldo). 3. dir-atT£ci). 4. (ITrO-8t8. 1. aypioi. 2. PapfiapiKOs- 3. S^Xos. 4. 'EAAijviKOs. 5. epu/tvos. 6. etrxoTos. 3. VOCABULARY. NOUNS. 14. 1J i^iTaCTK. 15. TO EVpOS. 16. ij rjp.ipa.. 17. TO OrjpCav. 18. ^ ^upd 19. 6 tTTTTEVS. 20. 6 'rriros. 21. ri pAxr]. 22. ^ 680s. 23. TO. OTXa. 24. 6 TrapdSeio'os. 25. o irapatrdyyrys. 26. ij wapaarKivrj. 16 . ^evyviJ/it. 17. riytopax. 18. ^'ko). 19. ■^TTa.ofiai. 20. 6cpeia. 21 . Orjpevu). 22. ftjM. 23. KaXioi. 24. Kwr-dyto. 25. (caTa-j/OEOJ. 26. KpefidwifU. 27. Xeya). 28. /icVoi. 29. viKdo), ADJECTIVES. 7. EvSatju.(i>v. 8. KoXos. 9. jixcyas. 10. fjLei^mv. 11. p.£0-09. 12. ^£W/«JS- 27. o TrfXTao'T'^s. 28. ij irijyij. 29. TO irXiOpov. 30. TO irXoiov. 31. 6 TroTap.os. 32. 6 iroijs. 33. ■^ (rotjiid. 34. 6 ' ■a. for im rj, upon lohich, at which. 4. XtY«Tai MCSds, personal construction for impersonal. 5. Tov Sarvpov, tlie (well-known) satyr, Silenus ; cf . rrj paxr) XXXVI. 6. otvif . . . aiT(\v, lit. by mingling it (the spring) with wine, by mix- ing wine in it; oivw, dat. of association, or means, cf. irXotbts XXXIII., Ty p.d,xvj XXXVI. ; Kcpd-a-a.'s 1st aor. parte, from Kipavwpj,. 148 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 7. Sei)-6{)-vai, that the Cilician (queen) asked Cyrus; dep. from Seo- jtiot, cf. Setrai XXVII. ; on form of. So-0rjvai. XXIII. ; takes the gen. case, cf. avTov XXVII. 8. ciri-Sei^ai, to exhibit, aor. act. infin. from iTn-huKvufiL, obj. of Seiy- OrivoL ; with the 2d CTriSci^ai SC. avro, or to crTpaTCVfia. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. irapd is followed by the gen., dat., or ace, with 'different signi- fications. 2. 84o|iai takes the gen. of the person from whom something is asked. 3. The infin. may be used as object as well as subject. 4. The dative denotes means, manner ; it is also used with verbs which express association. 5. The 1st aorist active infinitive accents the penult. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Conjugation of the fut. mid. of Xim, App. 78. 2. Numerals 1-10, App. 59. 3. Declension of tjocis, retro-apes, App. 59. 4. Synopsis of the 1st aor. mid. of Xta, App. 74, II. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. ciri-SeCKvv)ii, I show, exhibit. 3. ij Kp' Cf. Lat. vinkm, Eng. wine. LESSON Xl^n. 149 much money to the Cilician (woman). 6. To ask money of the king. . . V. For Written Translation : 1. The king of the Phrygians caught a satyr. 2. He mixed wine in the fountain called that (= the) of Midas. 3. The soldiers showed money to the fugitives. 4. He was making the review of his armies on the plain of Phrygia. 5. It is said (personal constr.) that a satyr was caught (from O-qpcim, cf. 807- ^vai) at the. spring. 6. The soldiers were said to be on the plains. 7. TOPICS FOB STUDY. 1. Trapa with the gen., dat., ace. 2. i)eclension of MtSas. 3. The fut. mid. differs how from the present mid. ? 4. The infin. as subj. and obj. 6. Construction with Seo/juu. 6. Dative of means, manner. 7. Other uses of the dative. 8. Declension of the numerals rpdi, Tf■) from ;(aA;foSs contr. like p^piJoroBs. 20. lK-Ke-KaXii|i-pievas, perf. pass, parte, from iK-KaXxmrui, cf. T£-Tay- fdvoi N. 13 ; theme koXv^ ; a 7r-mute becomes fi. before /x. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. The dat. of possessor is used with the verb to he. 2. 7 before 6 becomes x- 3. t4ttw, theme ray. 4. Both substantives and verbs may be omitted when easily understood from the context. 5. Infinitives in -vai accent the penult. 6. A verb with two or more subjects may agree in number with one of the subjects, either the most important one or the nearest one. 7. The article with 8e often has the force of a demonstrative. - 8. (Uv points forward to a corresponding Se in a contrasted expression. 9. A iT-mute before /«, becomes /x. 10. The perf. mid. (pass.) attaches the personal and participial endings directly to the reduplicated theme. 11. Contract adjectives like ;^oiviKoSs, -T], ovv,';jurpie. 21. xo^Kovs, -f[, -ovv, brazen, of bronze. 22. o x>'™''j tunic. e. EXERCISES. I. Decline : to^is, ap/ta, Kpdvoi, )(a\KOvi, do-Trts. II. Analyze : ra^Oy/vax, a-njvaL, (ravrdiai, iOiwpei, T^Tayp-evoi, exKe/ca- III. For Oral Translation : 1. As the generals ordered, thus the Greeks were arranged. 2. Each general arranged his own (men). 3. Menon has the right wing. 4. Clearchus and his men have the other wing. 5. The barbarians rode by in fours. 6. The Cilician (woman) first beheld Menon and the (men) with him, and then the other generals. 7. The Greeks were arranged by companies. IV. For Written Translation : 1. The Greeks arranged their own (men), as their custom was, four deep. 2. The other generals held, some (oi pjiv) the right, others {ol Se) the left wing. 3. All the ^ CF. Kug. Apo-ccUypse, Kevelatiou. 2 In the 2d aor., perf., and plup., I stand, station myself. 3 Ueually metallic leggings, to protect the lower part of the leg in warfare. * Cf. Eng. Byn-tax (o-uf + Tofts). ' The P/ioentc-ians are said to have discovered the purpte dye. 152 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. generals were riding by upon their chariots. 4. Each one has a helmet,^ tunic, and shield. 5. They ordered the Greeks to-take- their-stand (to stand). 6. Each general first reviewed his own men and then those (=the) of the others. 7. We were riding by upon our ( = the) chariots. 7. TOPICS FOB STUDY. 1. The sub. of the infin. 2. ^ in e<^' ap/iaros. 3. Kar fXas. 4. em with the gen. 5. Cases used with iv, ek, avv, Ttpos, Sta, irapd. 6. Classes and orders of mutes. 7. y before B. 8. The numerals from 1 to 10. 9. /icV . . . 8e. 10. Formation of perf. mid. (pass.) ; 1st aor. passive. 11. Agreement of the verb with subject. 12. The article with 8e'. 13. Eut. and 1st aor. of themes in y, k. 14. vtto with gen. ; with dat. 15. Labials before /t. LESSON XLIII. 1. TEXT. AnAB. I. II. 17, £7reiSi; . . . iTKrjvai. 2. NOTES. § 17. irafHfjXo-o-E : had ridden by, 1st aor. of iXavvm, theme eXa ; aor. where the plup. might be expected in Eng. a-Tif-a-a-s : 1st aor. parte, from l.i, causing to stand, i.e., stopping; cf. \v-cras; a-Trjvat is 2d aor. infin. ; what is the 1st aor. infin. ? Note the two aorists of ifTTTjixi ; the 1st aor. is transitive ; the 2d, intransitive. fUin\% : cf . fiiaov § 7. n-^iujrds : for Tre/iT-cras, from irifLirto, cf . crTijeras. irpo-Pa\W-o-8ai : to throw before one's self, to present; from irpo^aWw, 2d aor. infin. mid. ; note the accent on the penult, and cpntrast with Xvca-Oai the pres. infin. eiri-x or <^j;/«', / say. i-(rdKit\,y^-i : for c-troXTrtyy-tre, blew the trumpet, ' GTreek: a helmet nnd a tunic and a shield. LESSON XLIII. 163 supply the trumpeter as the subject; tense? Iir-flo-ov: advanced, imperf. ind. act. 3d plu. from tTr-ufu (= im+dfu, not em+ei/w.!, to be) ; note the i subscript. Ik Toiroti: from this, hereupon. BarTov: adv., comparative (for rdx-lov, t after a palatal forming with it a-a- or tt ; a few roots beginning with t and ending in x> when the rough sound at the end is lost, change the initial r to 6; this is called transfer of aspiration) ; raxi-o-ra superlative ; toxcw^ positive. irpo-i6vTci>v : sc. tS>v (TTpaTiuiTmv, gen. abs., as they advanced faster and faster, lit. more quickly; f rom Trpo-a/xi (irpo + et/tt) , cf. evrgo-av; nom. sing, irpo-mv. dird Tov airo-iiaTov : from the spontaneous, spontaneously; lit. self-moving. Sp6)io$ : the soldiers began to run; Spdjuos subj. ; tois orpaTtuiTats, dat. of poss. Tos o-KTivds : lit. the tents, i.e., camp here. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. Xo-TTi(4i has a 1st and a 2d aor. ; the 1st is transitive, the 2d intransitive. 2. |t^s is compared Ta^e'tos, Oarrov^ Tax'o"ra.^ 8. The accusative is used adverbially ; cf . Oarrov, rax'-o'Ta. 9. elirov, / said, has no regular present, but may be classed as the 2d aor. of ^i;p,t or Xe'yo). 10. The theme of iXavva is iXa (cf. aor. •^Xa-o-a) ; of PaCvw, ^a (cf. 2d aor. i-firj) ; of fidXka, ^aX (cf. 2d aor. i-fiaX.-ov). 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Mutes before mutes, XLIII. Obs. 4, XIV. 2. Declension of a-dXiriyi, App. 41. 3. Conjugation of Xewro), 2d aor. act., App. 84. 1 The comparative of the adv. is tbe ace. neut. sing, of the adjective. 3 Tbe superlative of the adv. ie the ace. neut. plu. of the adjective. \r,i TXDITTIVE GKKEK I'lUMER. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. avTOiiaros, -t], -ov,i spontaneous. 9. irpo-paXXa, / throw before, pre- 2. o Spofios,^ a run. sent (arms). 3. dirov (\iyw), I said. 10. itp6-ii\u, irpo-Uvai, I go forward . 4. 6'ir-6i|ii, liri^voi, / advance. 11. , I blow the trumpet. 5. im.-\apia, I advance. 12. ij trKr\vl\, tent. 6. 6p|itiv6ils, interpreter. 13. ra^vs, ijuick. \_qtdcklij. 7. T] KpavyTJ, shout. 14. raxcus, quickly : Oottov, more 8. oXos, -11, -ov,' whole. 15. t] (|>d\a-y£, phidanx. 6. EXERCISES. I. Decline : ep/iTji/eus, v . . . omrav. 2. NOTES. § 18. <)>v7-e-v: from <^eijy(o, imperf. l-(j>cvyov, 2d aor. ivyov; difference in meaning between the imperf. and aor. ;' Ik ttis ayopas : cf. £K rSv TToAewv XXXII., the {men in the market-place) fled from the market-jjlace. KaTo-Xnr-6-vT-«s : from KaTa-Xdwoi, Heave behind ; '2d aor. parte. ; theme Xnr, changed to \enr in the pres. ; cf. dpov: note the attrib. phrases between t6v and 4>6/3ov, the fear from the Greeks into the bar- barians, the fear ivith which the Greeks inspired the barbarians. § 19. lir-^-Tpe>|/£ : from iin-TpiTrw : tense? 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. The article may be used with a phrase, the whole being equiv- alent to a substantive. 2. A lingual mute (t, S, 6) before s is dropped ; a lingual mute before another lingual mute becomes s. 3. etSov, I saw, is classed as a 2d aor. of opdo). 4. <|>EV7(ii, theme ^vy (cf. 2d aor. e.-<^vy-ov) ; \dwto, theme Xnr (cf. 2d aor. e-Xm-ov). 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Synopsis and conjugation of the perf. mid. (pass.) system of Xtm, App. 74, II., 82. 2. Accent of perf. mid. infin. and parte, App. 81. 156 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. dpird^u, / seize. 9. Kara-XctTru, / leave behind. 2. 6 yi\as, laughter. 10. iroXcfiios, -Co, -lov,^ hostile. 3. i\,-o.pTt6.X,a, 1 plunder. 11. rpiira, I turn. 4. el8ov (dpdu), I saw. 12. Iiri-rpeirii), I turn over to, entrust. 5. ■{{iotiai, I am pleased. 13. ^eiya, IJiee. 6. davyAtfi), I wonder, admire. 14. d <|)6Pos,^ /ear. 7. 11 \o|iirp6Ti)s, ftn'g'Atoess, spZenrfor. 15.. to, avia, goods for sale, wares. 8. XcCiru,^ / Zeaue. ' 6 . EXERCISES. I. Decline : yeXtos, Xa.fx.irporr)';, Ihwv. II. Analyze : KaToXmovrei, Ihiitv, tvy£v. III. For Oral Translation : 1. The Greeks were leaviug, left ; were fleeing, fled. 2. The Cilician (woman) saw the lines of the army. 3. And she was pleased to see the wares of the barbarians. 4. They (generals) are marchiag through this country on the ground that it is hostile. 5. The barbarians left their wares in the market-place. 6. And they also fled because of (Sia ; with what case ?) fear. 7. The soldiers came to the tent of Cyrus with a shout. IV. For Written Translation : 1. He permits the army to plunder it (country). 2. The Cilician (woman) began to run. 3. The barbarians leave (parte.) their tents (and) flee into the market- place. 4. The Greeks are pleased to see their (= the) fear. 5. They plundered the hostile city. 6. This country was hostile. 7. Of their own accord and with laughter the Greeks ran to their tents, when they had seen (aorist) the fear of the barbarians. 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Reduplication. 2. Accent of the perf. pass, infin. and parte. 3. Formation of the perf. pass. subj. and opt. 4. Theme of the perf. mid. (pass.). 5. Futures and 1st aorists of themes in t, 8, 6. 6. w, /3, with a-. 7. K, y, X with a. 8. Declension of iroXus. 9. Stem and declension of yeXus. 10. . 4. auTig modifying a noun, but in the predicate position, = self; in the attributive position it means same. 5. In indirect discourse after a past (secondary) tense the opt. may take the place of the indie, in the direct discourse. 6. Many adverbs, especially those of place, govern the genitive. 7. In Greek there are adjectives of two terminations, the masc. and fem. being alike. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. 1st perf. system, active voice, App. 80. 2. Adjectives of two terminations, rja-uxo^, masc. and fem. alike, otherwise like dyaflds. 3. 2d perf. system, active voice, App. 86. 160 INDUCTIVE UREEK PRIMER. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. d oLYYcXos, messenger. 11. lo-xvp, 7 Zeawe. 4. diiTixavos, -ov, impracticable. 14. nerd (with gen.), with. 5. pdX\(i>, I throw. 15. op6ios, -d, -ov, steep. 6. clir-pdXXu, 7 throw in, make 16. to opos, mountain. an entrance. 17. oti (conjunction), that; because. 7. 1] eto-poX'^, entrance. 18. -rrX^u, / sai7; orepi-^X^u, sai7 8. Si6, wherefore. round. 9. €to-(i), within. 19. ii Tpi^pqs, tri-reme. 10. cta--^pxo|iai, tlcr-'fiXBov, / envyav, 2d aor. system act. 6. The form eirupmvTo. 7. Adjs. of two terminations. 8. Compensative lengthening, with examples. 9. Dat. of time. 10. Formation of the 2d perf. 11. Sup- plementary participles. LESSON XLVII. 161 LESSON XLVII. 1. TEXT, Anab. I. II. 22, 23, Kvpos . . . TrkiOpm. 2. NOTES. § 22. 8' oiJv : but at any rate, ef. § 12. av-i^ iirl : went up upon, so of mounting a horse, to go up to a position upon. ovScvos KwXuovTos: nom. ouS-£is, acc. ovS-eva, cf. eca § 6; gen. abs., no one opposing, without any opposition, an attendant circumstance. fI8c : cf . i8u>v, ISovaa § 18. SIvSpov . . . (rv|JiirXcuv Kal aiiiriXuv : covered with trees and vines, gen. after (ru/iwrXeuv, full of; oT/xTrXeajs masc'. and fem. ; (rvfiTrXemv neut. opos : subject. a^p\vo> in the active voice. III. For Oral Translation : 1. No one is hindering. 2. They saw the tent where we were guarding. 3. Thence they were going down into large and beautiful plains. 4. The tree is full of vines. 5. Lofty mountains surround the plains. 6. They descended [and] marched into a city of Cilicia, Tarsi by name. 7. Here there was a large and beautiful palace. 8. The river was a plethron in width. 9. Cyrus was hindered on the plain. 10. The mountains were hindering Cyrus. IV. Tor Written Translation : 1. Since the Cilicians do not hinder, they ascend the mountain. 2. Now there were all-sorts-of trees and vines in the plain where they saw the tent. 3. The mountain itself was lofty, but it also produced wheat and barley. 4. After marching through a large plain into a beautiful city, they came to (arrived at) a river whose width was two plethra. 5. Syennesis was guarding the mountains in Cilicia. 7. TOPICS FOB STUDY. 1. The gen. absolute. 2. Case after adverbs of place. 3. Adjec- tives of two endings. 4. The accusative of specification. 5. The gen. of measure. 6. //.eVos in the attrib. position. 7. Declension LESSON XLVIIl. 163 of numerals. 8. rormation of ouSets. 9. Construction after words of fullness. 10. Duration of time and extent of space are how expressed ? 11. Agreement of verb with neuter plu. subject. LESSON XLVIIl. 1. TEXT. Anab. I. 11. 24, 25, Tttifnyv . . . oTrkiToi. 2. NOTES. § 24. ig-^iirov : from iK-XciTTm ; tense ? ol Iv-oikoSvtcs : those who dwelt in, the inhabitants, els x^p'o" • ^^fi • • • /o»* « stronghold. irX^v : conjunction, SC. puV eiiXnrov. § 25. irpoWpa : earlier (than) Gyrus by fioe days, Jive days before Cyrus; Trpo-repa comparative, nom. masc. irpa^epiK, cf. Trpea^vrepoi ; Kvpov, gen. after the comparative, cf. Lat. use of the abl. ; ■^p^poug dat. of degree of difference, cf. the Lat. usage, t^ els to ireSlov: attrib. of virep^oXri,i.e., in passing over the mountains into the plain. dir-ri-p.U opird^ovTas : sc. avTov'i, the sub. of the infin. Kara-iKoir-ii-vai : had been cut down, cut in pieces, 2d aor. pass, of kotttw; pass, suffix of the 2d aor. is -e-. lengthened here to -q, cf. -Be-, the 1st pass, suffix, lengthened to d-q. i)ir6: Lat. ab, by. olS": sc. ea.(rav. ijiro-Xti<{>-e^vT-os : left behind; for viro-XfiTT-Oe-vT-aq ; tense ? on <^ for ■n- before 6, cf . Tax6rjvai § 15. tvpitv -. 2d aor. infin. from evpia-Kio, perf. -qvp-qKa, Eng. Eureka (it ought to be Heureka), I have found (it) ; depends upon Swa/AtVovs. to oX\o: the rest of, cf. /ieVos in the pred. position ; declined like aurds. air-oK-i- o-floi: cf. a7rojA.ovro; tense? ffovv: cf. § 22. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. The gen. is used after the comparative degree when ■q, than, is omitted. 2. The dat. is iised to express degree of difference. 3. The suffix of the 1st aor. pass, is -6e-; of the 2d aor. pass., -e-. 4. vv6 with the gen. expresses agency. 164 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 5. IT and P become before 6. 6. The 2d aor. mid. infin. accents the penult. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Coniugation of the 1st pass, system of Xim, App. 83. 2. Endings of the 1st pass, system, App. 83. 3. -Tense-suffixes' of 1st pass, system, App. 83. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. Air-iXXviii, / destroy, lose; mid., 7. K6irT(i>, / cut; Kara-Kdirra, 1 cut perish, die. down, destroy. 2. cKariv, hundred. 8. o XfSxoSi company. 3. cK-XcCirai, / leave, abandon. 9. irXavdoitoi,^ / wander. 4. IXavvo, / drive, ride, march. 10. irpdrcpos, -d, -ov, earlier, prior. 5. 4v-oiK^T||i,C,' / say. 6. EXERCISES. I. Conjugation of tne 1st aor. pass, and fut. pass, of KwXvca; synopsis of the pass, system of KiiiKtm. II. For Oral Translation: 1. Cyrus arrived many days before Epyaxa. 2. In the passage of the mountain the army perished. 3. The army, while committing some act of plunder (while plunder- ing something), was cut down by the king. 4. The others were plundering the palace in the city (attrib. modifier). III. For Written Translation : 1. And in the mountains a hundred hoplites, while plundering, perished. 2. Some said that they had- been-left-behind (aor.) by Menon; but others, that they did not find the rest of the army. 3. When Cyrus arrived he was both angry and plundered the city. 4.. The inhabitants abandon these cities with the Greeks. 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Suffix of the 1st aor. pass. ; 1st fut. pass. 2. Endings of the 1st. aor. pass. ; fut. pass. 3. -65t- in the subjunctive. 4. -ri for -6i in ^ Note that Kv9u> iB for Xv-di-a, Av0^s for kv-6e-fi^, etc. * Cf . Eng. pUm-ei, wanderer among the fixed Btars. ' Cf. Eng. eu-pAem-ism, blas-pAerne. LESSON XLIX. 166 the imperative. 5. Accent of the 1st aor. pass, infin. and partici- ples. 6. vrro with the gen. 7. Dat. of degree of difference. 8. Gen. after comparatives. 9. Suf&x of the 2d aor. pass. LESSON XLIX, 1. TEXT. AnAB. I. II. 26, 01 8" 3X\oi . . . I\a)8e. a. NOTES. § 26. ol oXXoi : sub. of ^Kov, came, from ■qKw. Sid : with ace, on account of. oXcOpov: cf. oXXv/jli. opyiXfifjivoi : causal. iUr-i\\aa-av -. had marched into, aor. for plup. neT-€ir^|i.ir6To : kept sending for. wpds eauT6v : lit. to himself, i.e., to (come to) him. irpdrcpov : adv. ovScvt : lit. to no one, Eng. to any one, translate of any one; a compound negative following a simple negative strengthens the negation in Greek, while in Eng. two negatives make an affirmative; he said that he had not hitherto gone into the hands (power) of any one stronger than himself nor, etc. cavroC: gen. after comparative. (Is x'Jpo* «\9«iv: to come into hands, i.e., to come into the power of one. Uvai: so. as x"P"s- eireio-t: from Trti9a>; tense? What has become of 6 before -o-e ? eXoPe : received, sc. SiitVi/OTts. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. With ttfiL, ylyvo[uu, and similar verbs, the dat. may be used to denote the possessor. 2. -repo- is a comparative suffix. 3. A compound negative following a simple one strengthens the negation. 4. Before

,C£cTai : pass, irapd pao-iXci : by the side of the king, i.e., at the court of the king, rtiiia: pred. adj. koC . . . x<&pav . . . dit>-apird£c ? 6. Infini- tives as substantives. 7. Cases after irapd, eh, iv, vw6, /i£Ta, avv, Trpos, ircpt. 8. Declension of iavrov, rk, OS, ovrds, exeZvos, a\A.os. 9. Use of negatives /aij and ov. 10. Enclitics. 11. Proclitics. LESSON LI. -REVIEW. 1. TEXT. Anab. I. II. 13-27. 2. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. (a) Mutes before mutes. (6) Mutes before a. (c) Mutes before Unguals, (d) Enclitics, (e) Transfer of aspiration. 2. Declension. — (a) o8os. (6) a-dkinyi. (c) dv^p. (c?) ijo-u^os. (e) evSaifiwv. (/) fiii^tov. (p) tXecos. (A) Tts. (i) eavTov. (J) dA.A.iJ- A.oti'. (fc) Numerals : 1-4. (Z) Comparison of adverbs. 3. Conjugation. — (a) Tense systems. (6) Principal parts, (c) Variable vowel, (d) Synopsis of kvm act., mid., and pass, (e) \vdXay$. 11. 6 SpopXK. 27. if oSds. 43. 6 <^d/3os. 12. 6 Svvdxmp. 28. oTvos. 44. 6 . 29. KCpa.vvvp.i- 45. VTTO-XiLWW. 14. eXavvo). 30. KOjrrm. 46. epia. 15. CV-OIKCQ). 31. KCdXllCd. 47. r)pX. 170 INDUCTIVE GREEK PKIMER. 1. a/xa^iros. 2. d/ijjxavos. 3. avTO/taTOi. 4. Se^ios. 5. licaoTOs- 6. imppvTO'S. 7. Irepos. 8. fiuivvfjUK. 9. t(rxupos- 1. 8id. 2. eiTa. 3. ci'crb). NUMERAL. 1. t-Kwrov. CONJUNCTION. . OTl. ADJECTIVES. 10. KpUTTWV- 11. 0A.OS. 12. opdios. 18. ovSeis. 14. 6j(vpos. 15. iravToSaTTOS. 16. ttoXe/u'cs- 17. TrpoTEpos- 18. irpuTos. ADVERBS. 4. ZcrxwpSs. 5. aTov, but was the first {of the generals) to try to force, etc. avTov : note the attrib. position of the reflexive ; meaning of kavTov ? i-^\.6.%-i-To : the imperf. generally represents an action as in progress, e.g., was forcing ; it may express repeated action, e.g., kept forcing; here it expresses an attempted action, tried to force, ol 8^: note the change of subject : hut they, i.e., the soldiers. e'-paX\-ov : sc. XlBoi^, stones ; repeated action ; they repeatedly threw at him with stones, eiret : whenever, apgaivro : began, 1st. aor. opt. mid. 3d plu. of ap-)(a>, for apx-ca.-i-v:ro, ^ + riva, H. 327 ; G. 482. 2. First aorist of liquid verbs, H. 431 ; G. 672. 3. Position of lauroS, H. 673, b ; G. 977. 4. Imperfect of attempted action, H. 832 ; G. 1255. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. apx>' begin. €. ov ^|>ii, refuse. 2. pdXXu, throw, throw at, hit. 7. irp6a-a, forward. 3. Pid^ofiai, raid, dep., yaree. 8. irparos, -r\, -ov," first. 4. Iirl TovTip, for this (purpose"). 9. to virojv'yiov, pack animal, hedst 5. \i.\,vy-c : why not ck ? tense ? imperfect ? the neg. fn^ with the infin. is redundant and is not to be translated. vo-Tcpov: ef. fUKpov. e-Yv«: he came to know, i.e., became convinced; 2d aor. of yi-yvia-cTK-a}, Lat. gno-sco, Eng. know; note the absence of a personal ending, cf. Koxea-rtq, dveySij, Chap. I. §§2, 3. o4 Suv^o-crai : he would not be able, could not; the direct form of expression is used, but the sequence of tenses in Eng. requires would for will. pido-oo-eai: SC. avTovi levai; why not ^La^etrOai? v : (tov €-a-iu)Tra-ov) , were silent. €-\cJ-e: (for l-Xty-tre), SpoTce. roiiiSe: nom. roidcrSe, such (words) as these, such as follow; he spoke substantially as follows, not exactly; rdSi would indicate that the exact words of the speech followed. The direct discourse makes the narrative more vivid and dramatic than the indirect. § 3. "Av.Spcs oTpoTiffiToi: Soldiers! ai/Spes, a term of respect which cannot always be translated ; sometimes it is equal to Eng. " Gentle- 174 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. men" or "Fellow" in "Fellow-Citizens." ^■f\: the negative used with the imperative when a negative is required ; also the regular negative with the infinitive. x°^<'^'^s ^P<' = {that) I bear, endure, in a difficult manner; {that) I am troubled, vexed, rots irapovo-i wpaYiioo-iv : because of the present affairs, difficuUies, dat. of cause ; nom. sing, of TTpdyfuunv ? of Trapoviri ? what is v in Trpayfuicnv ? <|i«uYovTa : when an exile; part of speech ? construction? rdreoWa: lit. in respect to the other things; trans, not only honored me in other ways, but gave me ten thousand darics; why the accent on rd? tense of eSukc? what other verb is like it ? 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. irp6T€pos and vo-repos are defective in comparison, wanting the positive. 2. The neuter accusative is used with the force of an adverb. 3. A palatal mute {ic, y, x) with o- forms |. 4. fUv points forward to a corresponding 8e and is used in con- trasted expressions. 5. |i|u and tC6i)|u have 1st aor. forms in k instead of s. 10. The dative is used to express that for which something is or is done, dative of advantage. 11. The accusative is used to denote that in respect to which something is true, accusative of specification. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Comparison of va-repoi, ■n-poTepos, H. 255 ; G. 363. 2. Comparison of voXvs, plKpoi, H. 254, 5, 3 ; G. 361, 8, 5. 3. Declension of perfect act. parte. XcXukms, eo-Tios, H. 244; G. 335, 342. 4. Accusative of specification, H. 718 ; G. 1058. 5. Adverbial accusative, H. 719 ; G. 1060. 6. Declension of iy^, uv, ov, H. 261-263; G. 389-390. LESSON Lin. 175 5. VOCABULARY. 1: yiyv&rKia, knowA 9. ij irarpCs, fatherland. 2. SaKpvu,' weep. 10. o-iuirdo), be silent. 3. ij lKK\r](rCd,^ assembly. 11. o-Dv-d^u,'' bring together. 4. Ik-cjicvyu, _/?ee away, escape. 12. riiidu, honor. 5. KaTO-ireTp6^pu,° &ear. 7. dpd in the present system. III. Por Oral Translation : 1. But afterwards they barely escaped being forced to go forward. 2. They know that they will not be able to force Clearchus. 3. Therefore they are standing (still) and weeping. 4. We wondered when we saw (parte.) Clearchus standing (still) a long time. 5. Do not, soldiers, be displeased at Cyrus. 6. We took the darics which Cyrus gave. 7. We did not honor the king in anything. IV. For Written Translation : 1. But later, when the soldiers saw (ciSov) Clearchus weeping, they were silent. 2. And then he speaks as follows, (substantially) as follows. 3.. The soldiers stood (still and) wept. 4. The pack animals were (number of the Gr. verb?) not stoned-to-death. 5. If the soldiers remain (subjunctive) here, they will be able to escape being stoned-to-death. 6. Men, I do not wonder that you are vexed at me. 7. For while a fugitive from my fatherland I was honored in many ways. 7: TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. iA,€v and fie. 2. The negatives oi and juij. 3. Duration of time is how expressed ? 4. Palatal mutes before o-. 5. 1st aor. of liquid verbs. 6. Stems of participles in -<■)?. 7. Uses of the gen., dat., * Of. a-^no-stic. 2 Lat. lacrima, tear. ' Cf. ecclesia-Btical. *C1. Lat. petra, rock; petr -oleum, rock-oil; petri-fy. " Cf . micro-Bcope. « Cf. Eng. pan-orama. ' Cf. Eng. synagogue. * Note the comparative ending -repo-. ^ Cf . Lat. fero, Eng. bear. '» Cf. Eng. cftron-lc, chron-ic\e, cAron-ometer, ana-cAro7>-lsm. 176 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. ace. 8. fitTo. witli the gen. 9. mo with the gen. 10. Dat. of cause, advantage. 11. Ace. of specification, adv. accusative. 12. Com- parison of adjectives. 13. Declension of personal pronouns. LESSON LIV. 1. TEXT. AlTAB. I. III. 3, 4, ous . . . iKtivov. 2. NOTES. § 3. oips : i.e., darics : And I took them (but) did not . . . nor did I squander, etc. ; a relative at the beginning of an independent clause should often be translated by a conjunction and a demonstrative or personal pronoun, els to ISiov : lit. for the private, or own, use for me; for my private use; the substantive is omitted. KaT-c-e4-|i,T|v : from KaraTtOrini ; put down, lay aside : I did not lay them aside for my own use. i^ol : dat. of advantage, contrasted with as u/iSs, nom. iyii, I. Kae^SuirdeT|(ra . '. . I-Sairdvuv, nor did I squander (aor. of an event which is represented simply as coming to pass) them, hut I kept expending (imperfect of a repeated or customary past action) them on you. § 4. irpuTOv |i^v : contrasted with kirahrj 8c KSpos ckoXci. liroX^iiifo-a : I commenced war, aor. used to express the beginning of an action, called inceptive aorist. €-Ti|ici)pov-)ir)v : imperf. for e-ri/xojpe'ojmjv, sc. avTov's. |i.c6' (for /jLerd.) v|ifiv: in company with you; fierd with the ace. means what ? avrovs . . . PodXo(i,«voi>s : by driving them out because they wished. a(|i-aipciireai : to take away, to deprive the Greeks who dwelt therein of their land; from &ir6 + aipim : note the two accusatives, 'EAAi^ras, yrjv, after the verb of depriving ; one object of the person, the other of the thing. iKdXti: for exoXe-e, but when Cyrus kept calling, summoning; at the summons of Gyrus, tva: = oiruK, ckm avTov. dv9' av . . . vir ixelvov : lit. in return for what {things) I suffered well by that one ; in return for the favors I had received from him; S>v = Tovrav a, those things which; avff gov- LESSON LIV. 177 ems Tovrwv ; a is the obj. of tTraOov, cognate ace. tiroBov : 2d aor. of 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. An accusative -whicli repeats the meaning of a verb in the noun is called a cognate accusative, e.g., to suffer sufferings, to do deeds. 2. The neuter accusative of the adj. is used adverbially. 3. |iee', iierd, with the gen. is the usual way of expressing accom- paniment. 4. Circumstantial participles express attendant circumstances of time, place, manner, cause, condition, or concession; they may be translated by clauses. 5. Verbs of depriving take two objects, one of the person and one of the thing. 6. Clauses of purpose are introduced by Zva, m, ottois, in order that, and may take the opt. after a past (secondary) tense. 7. vir6, by, with the gen. expresses agency; with the dat. = under. 8. -I- and -it|- are mode-suffixes of the optative ; -v and -jii are personal endings of the optative 1st singular. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Verbs of depriving, H. 724 ; G. 1069. 2. Purpose clauses, H. 881 ; G. 1366, 1369. 3. Participles, H. 968-969, 980-984 ; G. 1557, 1563, 1578-1587. 4. Cognate accusative, H. 725, and a; G. 1051. 5. Conjugation of the present system act. of (<^iA.eiXS>v, H. 243 ; G. 340. 5.- VOCABULARY. 1. alpia, take. 9. KaB-TiSviroBlu, waste in luxury, 2. ovrt (with the gen.), instead of. squander. 3. ac|)-aLp{(i), take away, deprive. 10. (lerd (with the gen.), with. , 4. Satravaa, expend. 11. ir6,ir\a,* suffer ; tv irairxa, suffer 5. 84(1), need, want ; 8ei, it is necessary. well, receive favors. 6. i^-tKaiva, drive jout, march. 12. Tlf-apia, avenge ; mid. punish. 7. tv,'' well. 13. vfiEis, you; sing, a-i, thou. 8. iSi.09, -a, -ov,^ private, peculiar, own. 14. vitip,^ above, in behalf of. 1 Learn the contracted forms. ^ Of. Eng. eu-\ogy. ' Of. Eng. idio-t, idio-ByncvSLSy. * Cf. path-OB, path-etic. ^ Cf . Eng. over ; Lat. super. IND. GK. PR. 12 178 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 6. EXERCISES. I. Decline "EXXas, ivoiKwv. II. Conjugate {alp&o) alpS> in the present system active. III. For Oral Translation : 1. First wage war against Greece ^ in our behalf. 2. We wish to deprive you of your land. 3. We were proceeding in order that we might take you. 4. You received favors at our hands (= by us). 5. You were waging war against us.* 6. In order that you may be waging war. 7. Aid me, that I may aid you. IV. For Written Translation: 1. And I received ten thousand darics which I am expending (SairavS) upon my army. 2. First I shall make war upon the barbarians, and afterwards I shall drive (e^-cXfi) the inhabitants out of the land. 3. I am proceeding with you, therefore, in order that I may aid Cyrus. 4. If Cyrus needs (StTjTai) me (gen.) at all (ti), I shall aid him. 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Circumstantial and supplementary participles. 2. The double object. 3. Clauses of purpose. 4. The personal pronouns. 6. End- ings of the opt. in contract verbs in -ea. 6. Accent of contract verbs. 7. Enclitic forms of the personal pronouns. 8. Use of m ; of auTos. 9. Some uses of the accusative,, dative. 10. Case after avTi, cK. 11. Formation of adverbs. 12. Accent of a n. 13. De- clension of yrjv. 14. Mode-sufl6xes of the optative. LESSON LV. 1. TEXT. AnAB. I. III. 5, £ir£i . . . £i\o/i,ijv. 2. NOTES. § 5. lireC: since, also means when, vnets: personal pronouns are used as subjects-nominative only when they are emphatic, otherwise they are omitted. avA-yKi] : sc. ia-ri, it is necessary. S. o ti av 8^x1 '■ whatever may be necessary; o n is compounded of the relative and indefinite pronouns, hence called an indefinite relative pronoun ; both parts are declined. The clause is called a conditional relative clause because it implies a condition and is equivalent to if anything be necessary; 5 n av Siy = iav (ei + av) Ti Serj ; the subjunctive follows after principal (primary) tenses ; the opt. without av may be used after a past (secondary) tense, ipti: used as a fut. of <^?7jU,t. oviron . . . owBtCs : note the double negative ; Eng. no one shall ever say. •os: = oti, that. aya>i&v: from ayoi; tense ? cIX, I chose, cf. alpijaofuu ; theme eX, augmented like dxov from ex<»- 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. Personal pronouns are not used as subjects-nominative except when emphatic. 2. xP°'<>l^<>^>' takes the dat. of means or instrument. 3. |i.ov, |i.oC, )Ei; a-ov, o-oC, iri; ov, ol, i, and iri|>(a-i, are enclitics. 4. Double negatives strengthen the negation if the second is compound. 5. A relative clause may have a conditional force, the relative word implying if, thus : whatever be necessary ia nearly equivalent to if anything be necessary; such clauses are called conditional rela- tive clauses. 6. The subjunctive with av is used in conditional relative clauses after principal (primary) tenses, cf. r^v (=£i-|-ov) with the sub- junctive. 180 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Enclitics (pronouns and verbs), H. 113, a-c; G. 140, 141, 1-3. 2. Conjugation of the present system mid. of ^iA.S, H. 324; G. 492. 3. Future condition with more probability (more vivid), H. 889- 891, 898, 899; G. 1385-1387, 1403, 1405. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. aip^u, take; mid. choose. 6. ol8a, know. 2. ij dvdyKTi, necessity. 7. irpo-SCS(i>)i,i, betray. 3. SCxaios, -o, -ov, Just, right. 8. XP°'°I''°''' (dep.), use. 4. tirsC, when, since. 9. t|>eiS) to go with me, it is certainly necessary for me to use their friendship. 2. But, at any rate, I choose them and with them I shall endure many sufferings (= suffer many things), if necessary. 3. And they will never say that I chose the barbarians instead of (di/Ti) the Greeks. 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Personal pronouns as subjects. 2. Forms of pronouns and verbs which are enclitics. 3. Accent of words before enclitics. 4. Double negatives. 6. Negative with the imperative ; with the infinitive. 6. The subjunctive in conditional sentences ; in condi- tional relative sentences. 7. Case after -xpdofua. 8. Contraction. 1 Cf. Eng. pseud-oaym. LESSON LVL 181 LESSON LVI. 1. TEXT. AnAB. I. III. 6, aSX eirei . . . ex^Te. 2. NOTES. § 6. Ijiot: with irciOea-OcLL, to obey, trust in; cf. iirCcrTeuov avTiS Chap. II. § 2. lnoVetvot: dat. of poss., 01" advantage. iroTptSa: pred. ace to agree with the sub. of the infin. dv etvoi Tf|iios : I think (that) / should be honored = av drjv rt/xtos. oirov dv a: cf . o Ti av M-qTOL : wher- ever I may be, Eng. requires might be; c3, a-qv, subj. and opt. of eimt; cf. subj. and opt. of the perf. mid. of Xvix) for the full conjugation of the subjunctiye and optative of dvax. vnwv ept)|j.os av. being bereft of you, i.e., if I should be bereft, etc., words of want as well as of plenty take the gen. case, dv : belongs with eW and is repeated for em- phasis in the next line, us : with the gen. abs. : therefore make up your minds that I shall go wherever you {may go, sc. /iryre), or be assured that, etc. ; lit. have your opinion thus that, etc., cf . ws irapc- XovTojv Chap. I. § 11. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. ir€Cednai, obey, takes the dat. of indirect object where English requires the ace. 2. The infin. with av may stand in direct discourse for the opt. with ov of the direct, discourse. 3. Words of want take the gen. 4. A future supposition with more probability ("more vivid future") is expressed by idv {= rjv) with the subjunctive in the condition, and the fut. indie, or some equivalent form in the conclusion. 5. A relative clause with av and the subjunctive may be equiva- lent to a future condition with more probability. 6. A phrase or participle may express a condition, e.g. : crw vfuv /jikv av oTfjial eivat tIijluk, I think that I should be honored with you, i.e., if I should be with you; eprjfws wv, if I should be bereft, etc. 182 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Conjugation of ei/xi, subj., opt., infin., parte, H. 478, G. 806. 2. Conditional relative clauses, H. 912, 913, 916; G. 1428, 1, 2; 1434. 5. VOCABULART. 1. aX^|, ward off, protect. 6. ot)jiai, think. 2. 1] 7v<4|it|,^ opinion. 7. ir^, in some way ; oirf\, in what- 3. eiroiiai, follow. ever way. 4. cpT||ios, -T], -ov,'^ desolate, de- 8. iroi, somewhere; oitod, wherever. prived of. 9. d o-ii|j,(ioxos,' ally. 5. 6 ix9p6s, personal enemy. 10. Tt^Lios, -a, -ov,^ honored. 6. EXERCISES. I. Decline : irarpk, yvu>iJ.r]. II. Analyze: hrofuu, xl/ivcrd/JLtvov, iovToiv. III. For Oral Translation : 1. It is necessary, certainly, for you either to abandon me or to prove false to Cyrus. 2. I do not know •whether you choose to do right, but at any rate follow him. 3. For whatever you suffer, with him you will be honored. 4. We shall obey you. 5. We shall persuade you. 6. They are fatherland, friends, and allies to us. 7. I think that Cyrus would not be able to ward off his foes. 8. But if he is (= be) able, he will assist his friends. IV. For Written Translation: 1. Clearchus spoke as follows: 2. "Greeks, if you choose (subj.) to follow Cyrus, you will do right ; for your friends ( = the friends of you) will never say that you chose the friendship of a foe. 3. But since you are unwilling . (fr. iOiXm) to consider him as an ally, I do not know whether you will aid even (= Kai) a friend. 4. For without him (= being de- prived of that one) I think that you would not be able to ward off the barbarians." 1 Cf. yi-yvut-trKtij. 2 Eng. hermit, 3 Cf. (Tvv+iJLaxofiaL, lidxri * Cf. Ti/x^, a-ri^a^to. LESSON LVn. 183 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Case after TreiSofjuu, cTro/icu, xpdofuu. 2. Case after words of plenty and want. 3. Ways of expressing condition. 4. The infini- tive with av. 5. The opt. in indirect discourse. 6. Dat. of possessor, association, means, advantage. 7. us with the gen. abs. 8. Future condition and conditions^ relative clause with more probability (more vivid future). 9. & with the subj. 10. cw, ^v. LESSON LVn. 1. TEXT. AnAB. I. III. 7, 8, TavTa . . . livai,. 2. NOTES. § 7. elirev: 2d aor. of ipS) (fut.). otre ff. : lit. both those of that one himself and the rest, partitive apposition with a-TpaTiSirai ; why the accent on ol ? raBra : this, so ravra eiTrev ; plu. often used where Eng. requires sing. ; explained by on . . . irop«««ireoi. o4 (JkvCi) : refused, cf . Chap. III. § 1, ovK e^ao-ai/ ; opt. of tjni/jiL, indirect discourse for ou ir€, applaud, praise. 6. tA o-KEuo<|>6pa, baggage carriers, 3. SappEu, be of good cheer, cour- beasts of burden, baggage. ageous. 7. crpaToireScvu (com. mid.), en- 4. \d6p^^ secretly, without the knowl- camp. edge of. 6. EXERCISES. I. Write synopses: l6iXw pres. system active, iropt-voiiai pres. system mid. II. For Oral Translation : 1. They hear that Cyrus is unwilling to go to^ the king. 2. We were applauding the soldiers. 3. These men were grieved because of us. 4. They send messengers without the knowledge of Cyrus. 6. They kept sending for the messengers ; but they themselves refused to go. 1 From a-negative and n-opog (cf. n-opevo/iai) way, witlwut a way. ' From Aafl in \av9dvu. 8 How many words can you U6e for " to " ? LESSON LVIII. J.85 III. For Written Translation : 1. Many soldiers on hearing (parte.) this took their arms and encamped near the king. 2. Therefore Cyrus sent for him ; but he was grieved at this. 3. More than two thousand took their arms. 4. They heard that Cyrus refused to go to the king. 5. They sent a messenger without the knowledge of the soldiers. 7. TOPICS FOB STUDY. 1. Meanings of avros. 2. Opt. in indirect discourse. 3. The infin. in indirect discourse. 4. Declension of comparatives ; of superlatives. 5. wapd. 6. Case with certain adverbs. 7. Impera- tive in indirect discoursfe. 8. The substantive use of the participle. 9. Some uses of the accusative. 10. Conjugation of eifii. LESSON LVIII. 1. TEXT. AnAB. I. III. 9, ixtTa . . . otSa. a. NOTES. § 9. TaBra as in § '8, this. 6'-. = rc. ToOs irpoo-tXBivTas : those who had gone over to (him), airif-. indirect object of TrpocreXflovTas. twv oXXuv : partitive gen. with rov Pov\6fi.fvov, the one who wished, whoever wished (to come), to. |»ev 8i] Kvpov: the affairs of Gyrus, you see (Stj). SfjXov (sc. eo-Tt) oTi: lit. it is evident that; translate, dearly, evidently; /xeV here has no corresponding 8e. ovtws i\fi: are just the same {towards us as ours towards), etc. Ix<" with adverbs = ci/ai with pred. adj. to ijiie'Ttpa: sc. Trpay/nara : pOSS. pronoun, nom. ij/xeVepos, ^jueTepa, ^/uerepov, declined like dya^os. i])i.ei5 : sc. are. o-TpariuTai : pred. nom. Ikeivos : sc. ia-rL dSiKeia-6ai : the subject is not expressed because it is the same as the subject of voju,t(;«. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. |Uv is used occasionally without a following Si. 2. ex<» with an adv. = elfii with pred. adj. 3. The subject of the infinitive is not expressed when it is the same as that of the main verb. 186. INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 4. The aor. parte, may refer to an act previous to that of the principal verb. 5. i|, than, takes the same case after it as before it. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Indefinite relative pronoun, H. 280; G. 425. 2. Conjugation of {tXixAio) rlfiSi in the present system active, H. 323,243; G. 340,492. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. SfjXos, -1], -ov, evident. 5. o fua^oS6Tr\9,^ paymaster. 2. SfjXov oTi, it is evident that, 6. irpocr-^pxo|jiai (aor. -^Xjdov), come evidently. to, go over to. 3. ijii^Tcpos, -a, -ov, noster, our. 7. uio-ircp, Just as. 4. |ji£Td (with ace), after. 6. EXERCISES. I. Write synopses : eXe|a 1st aor. act. ; (rweirofuu pres. mid. II. For Oral Translation: 1. They were collecting their own (men). 2. They are not accompanying us. 3. All the soldiers were honoring Cyrus. 4. We are, were, messengers of the king. 6. More than twenty soldiers came from Clearehus. III. For Written Translation : 1. After this Clearehus speaks to his own soldiers as follows : 2. ■ " You are no longer soldiers of Cyrus, since he is no longer your paymaster." 3. Clearehus, we at least shall not accompany you. 4. Soldiers, be honoring your generals. 5. Our generals are brave ( = good) men. 6. Let Cyrus be king of this land. 7. Cyrus will honor his soldiers, if they honor (subj.) him. 8. The generals kept sending for Cyrus in order that they might honor him. 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Position of eaDToS. 2. Declension of possessive pronouns. 3. 2x<" with adverbs. 4. Comparatives with and without ■^. 5. Uses of the imperfect. 6. Partitive genitive. 7. Formation of oo-tw. 8. Use of 'AvSpes in the text". 9. Construction of avr

: = Tomuiv 5. ; ToruTwv gen. of cause, or crime; a cognate ace, or ace. of specification, with ■qSiKrja-6a.L ; the antecedent of ,''' neglect. 8. xP^i *' ** necessary. 4. ScCSu, fear. 9. upd, hora, season, time. 5. ij SCkt), justice. 6. EXERCISES. I. Decline : wpd, hiK-q, outos, ttSs. II. For Oral Translation : 1. They think (that) they are wronged by Cyrus. 2. So that even though we keep sending for them they are not willing to come. 3. I am ashamed, and moreover {hrtLTo) I think that I have been wronged by him. 4. We are neglecting you. 5. Be planning what it is necessary to do. 6. It is a time for you to sleep. III. For Written Translation : 1. We consider that you are wronged by him. 2. I fear that the king will punish me for this (= these things). 3. So that it is a time for us to deliberate what ^ a-negative and 2i'k7}; cf. a-TtjULoadeis. ^ a as in a.-5iKiu>. LESSON LX. 189 we (ace.) ought to do. 4. If the king takes (subj.) us, he will punish (from imO'^a-w) us (dat. ; why?). 5. Therefore do not neglect yourselves. 7. TOPICS FOB STUDY. 1. Gen. and dat. of cause; gen. of crime. 2. Uses of the genitive. 3. Comparison of adjectives ; comparison of ayadoi, /icyas, 7roA.iJs. 4. Construction after verbs of fearing. 5. Meanings of Kat. 6. Declension of reflexive pronouns. 7. The gen. absolute. 8. Circumstantial and supplementary participles. 9. Eeduplication in the perfect; in the present of a few verbs. 10. Clauses of result. 11. Declension of oo-tis. 12. Verbs which take the gen. LESSON LX. 1. TEXT. AkAB. I. III. 11, 12, icat £lXu>; note that o- does not occur in the fut. of liquid verbs, and that € contracts with a following vowel. d ^o*^ ^^^ rough breathing. o<|)e\os: SC. icrnv. oviiv: adv. acc. § 12. d avf]p: i.e., Cyrus. iroXXov agios: SC. iari, \it. is a friend worth . much, a valuable friend, to whomsoever he may be a friend; iroXXov, gen. of value after SiuK. Note the conditional rel. clauses in this section, rel. + av and subj. nearly equal d + av (= idv or ^v) and subj. dpu)uv from opdm, conjugated like Ti/idw. koI -ydp : and (we see and know) for. ovSe . . Ka6f|o-eai: lit. we seem, i.e., it seems to me that we are encamped not at all far from him ; personal construction where English would expect the impersonal ; afiroS, gen. with adv. liipd : SC. €o-Ti. dpuTTOv : SUperl. of a.ya66<;. 190 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. Verbal adjectives in -reos denote duty or necessity. 2. The superlative of adverbs is the neut. ace. plu. of the super- lative of the adjective ; the comparative is the neut. ace. sing, of the comparative of the adjective ; both were originally adverbial accusatives. 3. The fut. of liquid verbs adds c, omits a-, and contracts. 4. Words signifying worthy or worth take the genitive of value. 5. The adverbs Troppat, daw, ttA^v, take the genitive. 6. The infin. may depend upon a noun like the Latin gerund. 7. The verbal in -reos takes the agent of the action in the dative, called the dative of agent. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Verbal in -reos, H. 299, c, 475, 988-991; G. 776, 1594^1599. 2. Future system of liquid verbs ((^avfi), H. 326, 422; G. 482, 663. 3. Comparison of adverbs, H. 259 ; Gr. 369. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. ave« (with the gen.), without. 10. ews, while, as long as, until. 2. a|ios, -a, -ov, worth, worthy. 11. d ISi<4tt|s,^ a private (soldier). 3. cLir-EipLi (-Uvai), go away. 12. Kd6-r))i,ai, sit down, be encamped. 4. avToS, here. 13. dfJioCus, equally, alike. 5. ao-aX'i)s, -^s, safe. 14. to o<|>£Xos,° use, benefit. 6. aaXus, safely. 15. iroppo, adv., far from. 7. apio-TOs, -T|, -ov,i best. 16. (\ios, -d, -ov, friendly. 9. rd lirir/jSeia, provisions. 18. xaXeirds, -^j, -dv, hard, violent. 6. EXERCISES. I. Decline : 7ro\e/*tos ; conjugate the present system of Sokeo). II. For Oral Translation : 1. You will remain as safely as pos- sible if you (shall) have provisions. 2. There is no advantage in a general without soldiers. 3. The soldiers are valuable friends to 1 Cf . aristO'Cracy. ' Of. tfiios ; Eng. idiot. 3 Cf. ai^eAew. * Cf. Eng. skeptic. LESSON LXI. 191 whomsoever they may be friends. 4. They see the force which Cyrus has. 5. It is not a time for them to be sitting still ( = down). III. For Written Translation : 1. Therefore you (dat.) must con- sider how you will have provisions as long as you remain here. 2. For with these you are valuable friends (to those) to whom you may be friends. 3. You all see the power which he had. 4. For you were not far from him. 5. Speak, therefore, whatever you judge (=know) to be best. 6. Say (plu.) this (plu.) [and] stop! 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Expressions of duty, necessity. 2. Dative of agent. 3. Posi- tion of the gen. of reflexive pronoun. 4. e^u. 5. Future of liquid verbs. .6. Comparison of adverbs. 7. Gen. of value. 8. Gen. with adverbs. 9. Construction after , seize in ad- 2. oTTO-vX^u, sail away. vance, pre-occupy. 3. o ij-yeiii&v, leader. 5. <)>6dv(i), anticipate. 6. EXERCISES. I. Decline : ttoXu's, ijye/iuv ; conjugate axrw in the present system. II. For Oral Translation : 1. We shall go (aor. parte.) [and] ask Cyrus for a boat that we may sail back. 2. Clearchus, send (men) ■LESSON LXIII. 196 to ask for a friendly land. 3. If Cyrus does not lead (subj.) us back, ask for another leader. 4. In order that the enemy may not occupy the heights, choose other generals. III. Tor Written Translation: 1. "Go and ask Cyrus for a boat that you may sail back. 2. And if Clearchus is unwilling to lead, ask him for some other general. 3. And in order that the king may not occupy the heights, send men to preoccupy them." 4. After this the Greeks chose Clearchus to lead (parte.) through the friendly land. 7. TOPICS FOB STUDY. I 1. Purpose in Greek. 2. The negative in purpose and conditional clauses. 3. Modes in indirect discourse. 4. Aorist participle with an infinitive or with a finite mode. 5. Construction after verbs of asking, demanding. ; 6. Dissyllabic verbs in -eu. 7. Subjunctives in this lesson. 8. Future conditions with more probability (more vivid future). 9. Construction of t^v raxCa-Ti^v, iv before ttoXXous. LESSON LXIII. 1. TEXT. AnAB, I. 111. 15, 16, «os fiiv . . . TrpSiw. 2. NOTES. § 15. us oP«(i>,^/n()'AXvdp(d, nonsense. e. BXBBCISES. I. Write a synopsis of okveu in the present system. II. For Oral Translation: 1. We hesitate to embark in the boat. 2. You are afraid that ( = fi-q) they will lead you away. 3. We should wish to obey our leader. 4. Cyrus wishes to sink us, boats and all. 5. If Cyrus trusts his soldiers, no one will hinder. 6. If the soldiers trust thfe leaders whom Cyrus may give to them, nothing hinders our ( = us, i/jnas) pre-occupying ( = to pre-occupy) the heights. 7. He showed how (aCvr)Tai: in the act. <^atVa) = 7 show; mid., I show myself, appear; am found; why the subjunctive ? &giovv: from d^io'o), cf . ^ijXoBi/ ; se. So/cet from above; avrov (i.e., K.vpov), sub., with which the following participles agree. irECo-avra . . . x«i-Uvai : sc. ^/iSs ; to send away, to let go, from a^ytrjiu {airo + lr)ii,i) ; liqiu, dfu, cl/u are three very common verbs which must not be confused. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. The verb to be is often omitted in Greek. 2. The infinitive is often the subject of a verb. 3. Verbs which seem to be impersonal often really have subjects. 4. xp^trSai takes the dative of means. 5. Words of resemblance govern the dative. 6. Comparatives take the genitive when ^ is omitted. VOCABULARY. !. 7. Katdav, -lov, worse. 8. oo-Tis, whoever ; o ti, whatever. 9. irapair\'aCvo|tai, appear. LESSON LXV. 201 7. xp^orOiit irregularly contracts to )(prjlXoi Kal irpieuiioi : pred. adj. where adverbs might be expected in English. dir-uSvTjs . . . dir-£oi|Mv : from aTT-eijtit, I go away, o n av . . . \i-iT\ : whatever he may say in refer- ence to this, conditional relative clause of more probability. dir-a7YctXai : SC. Soke?; aor. infin. ij^ds: sub. of PovkeicaOai. oucovo-av- Tos: when we hear (it), or on hearing. ^ § 20. tSoJe TaOra: lit. these things seemed good; translate, this was resolved upon, was voted, rfj a-rpan^-. lit. {the things which seemed best) to the army. air-eKptvaro : 1st aor. of a liquid verb, okoipoi : opt. in indirect disc. Iir£: upon (the bank of), at. iir-ixovra: distant. i;. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Crasis, H. 76; G. 42. 2. Conjugation of the present system of 8[8, (isk besides, ask 2. ij|ii-4Xios, -a, -ov,* one and a in addition, half. 5. viroi|>(d,' suspicion. 3. alius (adv.), nevertheless. 6. 4>(i'VEp6$, -d, -iv,^ evident. 7. xPtf^"! desire. 6. EXERCISES. I. Decline ovSek, o^ros. II. Write a synopsis of d|too) in tlie present system. III. For Oral Translatioii : 1. And they said that they desired to go to him. 2. But Clearchus (dat.) suspected that the soldiers ■were going against the king. 3. Nevertheless he followed. 4. If the soldiers ask for extra (=7rpoor- in comp.) pay, Cyrus will give each man twelve darics per month. 5. If we flee (subj.), Cyrus will follow us. 6. If we should flee, Cyrus would follow us. ly. For Written Translation : 1. "If he does not flee (suhj.), I shall inflict punishment upon him." 2. Nevertheless it seemed best to the soldiers, although they heard (parte.) this, to ask for extra (Trpoa--) pay. 3. Therefore they asked for ten darics a month as wages. 4. The king was evidently (Gr. evident) leading against Cyrus. 5. If the king leads (mode ?) against his foes, we shall follow. 6. If the king should hear (it), he would lead against us. 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Prepositions in composition which govern the dative. 2. Omis- sion of the subject of an infinitive. 3. The genitive and accusative of time. 4. Extent of space is how expressed? 5. The optative in indirect discourse. 6. The infinitive in indirect discourse. 7. Future conditional sentences. 8. Crasis. 9. /ii-verbs. 10. Pres- ent subjunctive and optative of StSu/it. 11. Endings of /at-verbs. 12. Theme and formation of SlSwfu. 13. Nominative singular of SiSovi. 14. Name several uses of the subjunctive. 15. Construction of TOK 8e in § 21. 16. 5yoi in § 21. 1 Of, ftemi-sphere, Lat. semi; -oAios from oAo?, whole, entire. 2 Of. viroTTTeuw, ^ From it>av, the theme ot'^alvui. 206 INDUCTIVE GREEK PBIMER. LESSON LXVIII.- REVIEW. 1. TEXT. Anab. I. III. 2. GRAMMAR LESSON.i 1. Crasis. Enclitics. 3. Declension. — (a) eiyevjys; (&) SiSou's; (c) iroA,«s; (d!) comparison of adjectives, dyaSds, /caicds, ;u,cyas, fUKpog, TToAus, TTjOOTcpos, vo-repo's ; (e) i-jfio, (TV, ol; (^f)ifjuivTov, (TcavTOv, iavTOv; (^g) tis, tIs; (Jl) i\Siv, TifxSiv, SiyXfiv ; (i) A,£A.vK(i)s, IcttoIs. 3. The Verb. — (a) (^iA.e, ri/xao), Si^Xdoi; (6) ff>a.vS>, ii^-qva; (c) SiSco/xi, pres.. system; (d) verbals in -reos; (e) «/it; (/) et/w; {g) verbs in -e'(i). of two syllables. 4. Syntax. — (a) Position of genitive of reflexives; (6) verbs of depriving ; (c) verbs of action of the senses or mind; (d) gen. of crime; (e) words of likeness; (/) ace. of specijication ; adv. ace; cog. ace; (g) double object; {h) attempted action; (i) potential optative; (j) final clauses; (ft) rel. clauses of purpose; {I) con- ditions; (wi) cond. rel. clauses; (m) indirect discourse; (o) parti- ciples, circumstantial; (p) genitive absolute; (g) supplementary participle; (r) verbals in -reos (syntax). 1. 2. dyojoa^o). dSlKCO). 3. alpeo), alpiop/u. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. ai(r)(vv-aipim. 16. d4>-irjpi. 17. fiiaiopjxi. 18. ytyvaJcTKU). 19. SaKpvo). 20. Sairavdo). 21. 8ei'8(0. 22. Seo), Biopai.. 23. 8d Only topics are Buggeeted ; the teacher should divide this lesson to suit the needs of the class. 31. ip& (^rqiu,). 32. EpcoTao). 3-3. iTn-TiOrjfU. 34. hroiuu. 35. OappiiD. 36. Kad-e-uSo). 37. KoB^tnmaOiut. 38. KaO-ritiai. 39. KaTa-Svo). 40. Kara-TreTpoa). 41. XiJ/uuVojuai. 42. X-uir£o>. 43. ixicrdoa. 44. ofSa. LESSON LXVIII. 45. ol[uu. 46. oKvio). 47. opaw. 48. Tracrxft). 49. Trpo-SiSoj/u. 50. irpo-KaTa-Xaii^dvio. 51. TTpoiT-aiTeii). 52. irpoaa/(i>, a.LvopM. 65. epa). 66. <^}7/xi. 67. 6dvoi, 68. <^o/3€b>, -eopxu. 69. ^^paojuai. 70. xpi?. 72. i/^euSo). 1- ^ dvayKjj. 2. ^ diropCd. 3. ^ yvutp-Tj. 4. ■^ StKi;. 5. ^ eKKXTjcrid. 6. TO eirtTijSeia. 7. ^ einjOeia. 8. 6 ix9p6s. 1. dxtuv. 2. ^^tqs. 3. ^plO-TOS. 4. dcr^aX'^s. 5. S^A.os. 6. &Kato$. 7. SuyaTos. 8. £yKe\ev{7Tos. 9. iinKaf&uvos- 10. iirLTTOvoi. 1. awoC. 2. dcT^aXbis. 3. devpo. NOUN8. 9. 6 ■^yepMV- 10. 6 t8tO)Tijs. 11. o pxaOa^Trji. 12. TO o^eAos. 13. ^ irarpk. 14. ^ wpSfis. 15. TO. 0pa. ADJECTIVES. 11. En-IT1}8£(05. 12. IprripsK- 13. tvTJOrp. 14. ■^/xerepoi. 15. ^/utoAiofl 16. rSios. 17. KUKOS, KaMUV. 18. plKpoi. 19. oTos. ADVERBS. 4. S^Aoi' OTl. 5 9 O . £K£(. 6. EJTEtTa. 16. ij (TTpaTTjrfid. 17. o (rup,paxoq. 18. TO viro^vyiov- 19. ^ VTTOKJ/Cd. 20. ij t^Xvdpid. 21. o xpwos. 22. 'ij eev : adv. used as attribu- tive. TO . . . KiXikCos : attributive to Tcixos understood. irp6: toward; on the side of, lit. before, etx* : sing, to agree with the first named LESSON LXX. 211 and most important subject. <|>vXoKv\aKa-ci-(rT^-Kc-(rav : had been set in, trans., had been built in; construction of reLx^mv? § 6. evEKo : preposition governing the gen., usually placed after the word which it governs ; on account of the pass. va«s : case ? diro- PiPdo-Eicv : why opt. ? Tfflv miXav : gen. with adv. Piavkd.TT(o(nv in direct discourse, oirep: which very (thing), the very thing which. 6 . . . KOpos tov 'APpoKo'|iav : the article is used with proper names to refer to one well-known or named in the context. «x°vTa : causal, because he had. Kvpov . . . ovra : {heard that) Gyrus was, suppl. parte, here called participle in indirect discourse, used -with a verb of hearing. o-Tpands : of army = of soldiers. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. o-TdSiov (plu. o-TciSia and ardSioi) has forms belonging to two genders. 2. The verb to be may agree in number with its predicate instead of its subject. 3. ta-n, co-rai, rfv, sometimes = is, will be, was, possible. 4. cvEKa, iiiv, ovv, U, put after one or more words in their sentences, are called post-positive. 5. The supplementary participle follows verbs of hearing and is translated as if an infinitive. 6. The Greek often uses the personal construction where English prefers the impersonal. 7. Adverbs and phrases may be used as attributives. , 8. (jL^o-os in the predicate position = middle of. 9. Many adverbs of place govern the genitive. 10. The article is used with proper names to refer to what is well known or named in the context. 212 INDUCTIVE GRP:EK PRIMER. 4. GBAMMAB LESSON. 1. Conjugatioii of the present system of io-tijiu, H. 331, 414, 415; G. 506. 2. Principal parts and meaning of tarrjiu, H. 534, 5; 500, 1; G. 509. 3. Principal pa^s of Tre/tiru,^ H. 508, 21 ; G. p. 396. 4. The future in indirect discourse, H. 855 ; G. 1276. 5. The infinitive in indirect discourse, H. 930, 2 ; 946 ; G. 1494, 1495. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. &,va,-a-Tpi^, come down, extend down. 20. to Tttxos, wall. 11. 1] )ivpids, myriad, 10,000. 21. virEpBev (adv.), above. 6. EXERCISES. I. Decline : vavs, ava(TTpeij/a.i, retp^os, <^u\aK^. II. Write a synopsis of 7r£/x.ira) in the active voice (cf. H. 313 ; G. pp. 96, 97). III. For Oral Translation: 1. There were two walls in Cilicia which the guards held. 2. It was said that the garrisons were guarding the outer wall. 3. Between the gates rivers flow. 4. The inner wall was more narrow than the outer. 5. They will send for their ship. 6. The enemy passed by. 7. For they thought that Cyrus would keep guard {vXdieiv) with ( = having) a great army. 8. Cyrus will hear that they are in Cilicia. 9. Therefore he wUl ^ Note that the perf. Qiid., 7re-irE/i-/xat, loses tbe final tt of the theme between two fi'a. 2 Lit. cause to go off'. ' Cf. ipUiero Chap. IH. § I. * Cf. tK, ef. = Cf. eif. 8 Cf. paeud-onywi, au-onym-oua. '' Cf. Thermo-2fyUe, Sot^^ates. ' Cf. Eng. steno-graphy. LESSON LXXI. 213 turn back (aor. parte.) (and) march away (from airekm, conjugated like tIjuco). IV. For Written Translation : 1. The gates were two walls. 2. The inner (wall) the garrison of Syennesis occupied, but the outer (one) the king was guarding. 3. Between these gates there was the Carsus river. 4. On account of the gates Cyrus sent for a ship to overpower (parte.) the enemy. 5. For he thought that A"brocomas would keep guard at the walls. 6. But he (Abroeomas) turned away, since he had heard (aor. parte.) that we were in Cilicia. 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1". Postpositive words. 2: The neuter plu. subject. 3. Agree- ment of the verb with two subjects. 4. Tenses of the direct dis- course in indirect discourse. 5. Modes of the direct discourse in indirect discourse. 6. The parte, with aKovo). 7. Modes in clauses of purpose. 8. The fut. infin. in indirect discourse. 9. Peculiari- ties of jut-verbs. 10. Personal construction. 11. Attributives and the attributive position. 12. The article with proper names. 13. Adverbs which govern the genitive, 14. Meanings of io-ttj/j-i in different tenses. LESSON LXXI. 1. TEXT. Anab. I. IV. 6, 7,'Evr€vO£v . . . aXuxroLVTo. a. NOTES. § 6. 4nir6piov : pred. nom. ; why not subject ? § 7. cueivav : theme /xev, fut. /xevS for ii.ive{(r)o) contracted like tf)i\m ; tense ? 4|i-pd-vT-cs : embarked in a boat . . . put on board . . . (and ) sailed away; note that the aor. participles are used where we should expect aor. indicatives coordinate with airtTrkeva-av. tA irXEdrrou o^ia : their (things) worth most; trans., their most valuable effects; TrXeCa-rov, gen. of value after a|ui. «v-e^-|jitvoi : 2d aor. mid. parte, from ivTiOrjfu ; force of the middle ? air-4irX€ua-av : 1st aor. of dTrtwrXetu. (is . . . 48(S- Kovv : as it seemed, lit. as they seemed, personal construction. <|>i\o- 214 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. TtiiifBivTcs : being jealous, from jealousy, or because they were jealous, causal. Tovs o-TpaTidTds ovtSv : their soldiers, who had gone away (= over) to Clearchus, supposing that (m) they were going, etc., . . . Cyrus was permitting Clearchus to have; tous o-TpanolTas is the obj. of txav. ctd : imperf . of ido), cf. £Ti/Aa (for i-rtfia-e.) ; has the syl- labic augment contracted with initial vowel, e-ea-e becoming dd, cf. eixov for i-exov- Note the article with the proper name KXiap^pv. av£ts: unseen, out of sight; from d^av^s, cf. aIvofuu, like dXi/fliys, euytvijs. SitjXSe: werU through (the army), became current, \6yos: a rumor. 8i6{ivai : from Xafi^dvtt) ; where found ? ipKrcipov : sc. avrovs ; imperf. of oiKTupm. dXiio-oivTO : fut. opt. of aXitTKOfnal (USed aS a paSS. of alpim), cf. StMKoi preceding; the direct thought was: "We pity them, if they shall be taken." 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. Aorist participles are often used with finite modes as well as with infinitives where English expects coordinate verbs. 2. Value is expressed by the genitive. 3. The participle with an article may generally be translated as a relative clause. 4. The optative may take the place of an indicative or subjunc- tive in indirect discourse after a past tense. 5. Liquid verbs form their future, without o-, in -iw and contract as in v\dTTu>, H. 514, 11 ; G. p. 405. 3. Principal parts of SeUvHiu, H. 528, 3; G. p. 379. LESSON LXXI. 215 4. Principal parts of Xa/i^Saveu, H. 523, 5 ; G. p. 390. 5. The mutes before /i, H. 53 ; G. 75. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. a\Co-KO|iai, be taken, captured. 9. i&a, permit. 2. air-^pxo|tai, go away. 10. ^)i,-PaCvcii, go on board, embark. 3. airo-irkia,^ sail away . 11. to ifi,ie6piov,' port, place of trade. 4. a,iT66i, he7-e, there. 12. iv-Ti9r\^i, place in, on (board). 5. 6.^a,v'f\9,-h,'' out of sight, invisi- 13. cvxo|iai, ^ra^. ble. 14. \d'Yos,* word, rumor. 6. Sa\69,-i\,-6v, cowardly, misera- IS. olxTcCpu, ^liV^. We. 16. r\o\Ki,i, freight ship. 7. Si-^pxo|i,tu, ^o through, spread 17. (|)iXo-Ti|ico|iai, (fove honor), be (of I'umor). jealous. 8. SuiKu, ^urjue. 6. EXERCISES. I. Decline oXjtd's, Sciki/vs, aavqs. II. For Oral Translation : 1. The city Myriandus was captured by an army. 2. Many ships lie at anchor there.. 3. They embark in ( = into) the boats of Pasion. 4. Many thought ( =they seemed to many) that they were jealous. 5; Cyrus does not permit his soldiers to go back ( = away) to the king. 6. Their valuable effects were placed on (board) {=iv£Te6ri). 7. Cyrus will permit (from iaa-povpoii)i.eva : neut. because both wives and children are considered as things or chattels. dX\' oiU: but not even of these shall they be deprived, tovtwv: gen. of separation. o-Tsp^ia-ovTai : mid. with pass, signification. j'vcKa: governs what case ? its position ? wepl kfU -. in the attributive posi- tion; why? note that the longer forms of the personal pronouns are used after prepositions ; not inpl. /*£. § 9. TaBTo : this, ct tis . . . ifv : even ( = Kai) if any one had been somewhat disheartened (lit. more disheartened), whoever had been, etc. ; note the force of the comparative degree here, somewhat, or rather, disheartened. oKoiovTes: on hearing. dptT^jv: magnanimity. t|8iov : more gladly, comparative adv. ; positive ^Se'eos, comp. ^Slov, superl. lySttTTa; the ace. neut. sing, of the adj. is used for the com- parative of the adv. ; the ace. neut. plu. for the superl. ; both were originally adverbial accusatives; cf. irpqOvfwrepov following. 3. OBSBEVATIONS. 1. Before palatals v becomes y nasal. 2. oliSo is a 2d perfect with present meaning. 3. otxo|iai is a present with perfect meaning. 4. aa-Ti with the infinitive expresses result. 5. The subject of an infinitive is not expressed when it is the same as the subject of the principal verb. 6. The nominative case of the personal pronouns is not used except for emphasis. 7. General conditional relative clauses of present time take a rel. -f av with the subjunctive in the condition, and the pres. indie, in the conclusion. 218 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 8. xpio|*<"' governs the dative (of means, instrument). 9. Verbs of depriving may take the genitive of separation. 10. k^ov, l|ioC, i^ are used after prepositions rather thau- juni, IJiOL, fit. 11. Adverbs take for their comparative the ace. neut. sing, of the adjective ; for their superlative, the ace. neut. plu. of the adjective. 12. yvvl] (plu. yvvaiKc;) is irregularly declined. 13. Enclitics of two syllables after paroxytones retain the accent on the ultima, cf. xaKtous «W § 8. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Declension of yw)/, H. 216, 4; G. 291, 8. 2. Principal parts of ((ieuyo), H. 511, 15 ; G. p. 404. 3. Conjugation of olSa, H. 491 ; G. 820. 4. Principal parts of ij,iv,s, with spirit, zealously. 7. 1) dperl), goodness, magnanimity, 18. a-npia, deprive. fidelity. 19. o-vY-KaX^u, call together. 8. iyayi, equidem, I at least. 20. to t^kvov, child. 9. iviihmi^ (with subj..), whenever, 21. ^povpla,^ guard.. after. 6, EXERCISES. I. Write a synopsis of the middle and passive of iroipoviiapxoK XX. LESSON LXXni. 219 3. For I will neither seize him nor do harm to his children and wives. 4. However, he will be deprived of his triremes and boats." 5. The soldiers were more despondent than Cyrus in respect to the valor (fr. dperj;) of the generals. 6. However, they followed most gladly and zealously. III. For "Written Translation: 1. The generals said : 2. "We shall neither arrest nor pursue Pasion. 3. But by the gods, let him go, well knowing that he is most cowardly. 4. But whenever we may wish to do harm to him, we will seize his wife and chil- dren. 6. However, on account of his former fidelity, although we have possessions of his (=him), we shall not deprive him (ace.) of these." 6. The Greeks, on hearing this, wiere rather despondent. 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Gamma nasal. 2. Clauses of result; purpose. 3. When is the subject of the infinitive omitted ? 4. Pronouns of the 1st and 2d person as subjects. 5. General cond. relative clauses of present time. 6. Genitive of separation. 7. Case after xpao/uu. 8. Forma- tion and comparison of adverbs. 9. Enclitics of two syllables after paroxytones. 10. Accusative with adverbs of swearing. 11. alpim and aXio-Ko/Mu, their relation in meaning. 12. Declension of a'f>avTJs, Tpi^^fnjs. 13. Location ' of the verbs in § 8. LESSON LXXIII. 1. TEXT. AnAB. I. IV. 9-11, MiTO. . . . CT-EO-^ai. 2. NOTES. § 9. ovra . . . irX^flpou : being, which was (i.e., the river) of a pleth- ron in respect to width; -irXiOpov, gen. of measure; construction of TO cvpCK ? stem ? irX'^pi] : nom. ttA^/ot/s, cf. d-qpiutv irX'qp-qi Chap. II. §7. Ixeiwv: nom. ix^us; why gen.? Oeovs: pred. ace. dSimtv: sc. Ttva as its subj. etwv: cf. £to § 7. irtpio-Ttpos : nor yet (did they 1 Cf. LXIX. "Exercises." 220 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. permit any one to injure) the doves. Ilapvir&TiSos : cf. ^o-av . . . 8e8o- /uwot Chap. I. § 6. cts l&vx\v : lit. for a girdle, ef. Eng. " pin money," " spending money," for her private purse. § 10. TO cvpos ; sc. ^v. Construction of irXiOpou ? pao-CXcia : /Sao-i- Xeta means what ? tov . . . op^avros : the one who once, or had, ruled over Syria = the former ruler of Syria; the aor. parte, expresses action prior to the action of the principal verb; to? . . . apxovTos would mean the one who was {then) ruling, etc. ; why gen. case %vpia.% ? irapaScio-os : construction ? c$-^koi|>c : from Ik-kotttw, cut out, destroyed, 1st aor. Kar-EKavo-E : 1st aor. of Karaxda), burned {down, i.e., completely). §11. i^K&To : was situated. ovo|io : 6y name ; construction ? cVoito: fut. opt. of ei/xt; opt. in indirect discourse; the direct discourse was: "the journey will be" {t(TTai). K«\evti: historical present, dva- ircieciv tirtorOoi : SC avTov% (i.e., the soldiers) ; to try to persuade them to follow. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. "A river four feet wide" is in the Greek idiom "a river of four feet in respect to width." 2. " The cities belong to Parysatis " in Greek idiom is " the cities are of Parysatis." 3. Words of fullness govern the genitive. 4. Verbs of considering, regarding, take a predicate accusative in addition to the direct object. 5. Participles, eveA when used as nouns, govern the case which the verb from which they come governs. 6. Verbs of ruling take the genitive case. 7. The future optative is used only in indirect discourse to rep- reoent the future indicative of the direct discourse. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Declension of IxOi^, H. 201 ; G. 257. 2. Conjugation of the aor. system of Ti6i]iJ.i, H. 333 ; G. 606. 3. Principal parts of ndOw, kotttoj, H. 511, 8 ; 513, 9; G. pp. 395, 388. 4. Uses of the ace, H. 711, 712, 715, 718, 719, 720, 723, 724, 726 ; G. 1047, 1049, 1051, 1058, 1060, 1062, 1066, 1069, 1077. LESSON LXXIIT. 221 5. VOOABULARY. 1. dSiK^u,^ harm, injure. 6. Kara-Kao),^ burn down, destroy by 2. itva-mlia, persuade, induce. Jire. 3. iyt-Kiirra,^ cut out, destroy 7. ij Ktifii), village. utterly. ^ 8. irp^os, -eta, -ov,* mild, tame. 4. ij X,&vt[,^ belt, girdle. 9. o-khv^w,' encamp. 5. iyjivi,* fish 10. ^va,^ produce, yield, bring forth. 11. 'ij . o Ti : from Sans, indef . rel. pro. ; what. diroKpivoOvrai : f ut. of a liquid verb. S., OBSERVATIONS. 1. In conditional sentences, fiy is the negative in the condition (protasis), ov in the conclusion (apodosis). 2. Kal ravra = and that too. 3.. Conditional relative clauses with more probability are ex- pressed by a rel. + av with the subjunctive. 4. . The 1st aor. of Iottjixl is transitive, = to set or place. 5.. wptv is sometimes followed by the infinitive, but generally by the subjunctive when the principal verb is negative. 6. The interrogative, tU, never changes the acute accent to the grave. . . 7. ov at the end of a sentence becomes m. , 8. The modes of the direct discourse are often retained in the indirect for vividness. 9. The comparative is followed by the genitive, when ^ (fhan) is omitted. 224 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 10. xp'^i. ** ^s necessary, has an irregular pres. infin. xp^vai. 11. Verbs of anger take the dat. of indirect object where English expects the ace. with a preposition. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Declension of ^va, H. 144; G. 183, 184. 2. Declension of xari^p, H. 188, 189 ; G. 274, 1. 3. Aor. system of 8CBa>ii.L, H. 334; Q. 506, 802. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. d.ir-a'y'Y^Wu, report. 9. irdXai,^ long ago. 2. TO apYilpiov, silver money. 10. d irar^p,* father. 3. lav \ii\ (with subj.), unless. 11. irov^ai,' labor, toil. 4. IvTeXyjs, -h, full, complete. 12. irdrcpov . . . f|, whether . . . or. 5. tirfjv (with subj.), when. 13. irpo-Ti)jLd>P'^> opor< yrom. 6. EXERCISES. I. For Oral Translation : 1. Although the generals knew (parte.) this, they were concealing (it). 2. The soldiers will not go unless money is (=be) given (80^3) to them just as to their fathers. 3. The generals were going up with Cyrus to his father. 4. Gyrus will give money to each of the Greeks when he comes ( = shall have come) to Babylon. 5. Will Menon persuade the Greek force or not ? 6. Before Menon' follows he speaks to Gyrus apart from his own men as follows : 7. " Gyrus, if the soldiers obey me, what shall * I order them to do ? 8. They ought to follow you (dat.) against the king. 9. But they will toil more than other men. 10. What ( = tO shall 8 1 reply to them ? " II. For Written Translation : 1. The soldiers are angry at Cyrus ^ Cf. aJTi-Kpvn-TOjaei'o?, Eng. crypt '' The sixtieth part of a talent =100 drachmae, about $18.76.' * Eng. paJoe-ontology, « Lat. pater. ^ Cf. efft-TrovMTepa Chap. Ill, §.19. 8 From 'xaAcjTos, hard, difficult. ' Make " Menon " the subj. of " speaks." 8 Use the subj., called the Deliberative Subjunctive. LESSON LXXV. 225 and refuse to go unless they receive more money. 2. For they say that the father of Cyrus gave money to his soldiers, and that, too, though they were not going for battle. 3. To the generals who reported this Cyrus spoke as follows : 4. "I will give eiach soldier a mina when I come to Babylon. 5. But until the soldiers follow me they will receive (fr. Xaju/Sai/u) nothing." 6. Accordingly the majority (= the many) of the soldiers were thus persuaded. 7. But Menon's soldiers spoke as follows : 8. " If we obey we shall follow Cyrus to Babylon. 9. But we (ace.) ought to cross the river and go back to Ionia. 10. But if he pays (fr. diro8t8o>/it) us full wages until we arrive in Ionia, we will do whatever he orders." 7. TOPICS FOB STUDY. 1. The negative in the condition (protasis). 2. ov at the end of a clause. 3. Construction after wpiV. 4. Construction after comparar tives. 5. Case after x<^p^^ i "with apx'^ ; with 8eo/uii. 6. Case with hro/mi, TriiOofiuu {obey). 7. Conditional sentences. 8. av in condi- tional relative sentences is used with what mode ? 9. Accent of the interrogative pronoun; indefinite. 10. Modes in indirect dis- course. 11. Koi ratJTa. 12. Meanings of iaTriix.i. 13. The future of liquid verbs. 14. trortpov . . . ^. 15. to iroA.v. 16. wiyv. 17. Con- struction with verbs of anger. LESSON LXXV. 1. TEXT. AiTAB. I. IV. 15, 1&, rjv lJ.ev . . . vo/xiXcTC. 2. NOTES. § 15. ^v(ji^v: contrasted with fjv Se below; rjv = lav; what form of condition ? atnoi : construction ? why not ace. ? apfavres : causal, because you began the crossing ; note that verbs of beginning govern the genitive, tov 8iapa(veiv : the infin. with the neut. article may be used as a substantive in any case. c5s . . . owiv: {to you) lit. as being most zealous, on the ground that you were, etc. cfo-crai : fut. of otSa, lit. {Gyrus) will know gratitude, i.e., will feel the obligation. IND. GK. PK. 15 226 INDUCTIVE GREKK PRIMER. diroSiio-ci: will give it back, mil repay it. lirJo-Tarai: knows how, sc. ^aptv d7ro8oSi/ai. ct tis KaV aX\os : if O/ny one does. diro-i|n)i)>(ir«iVTai : VOte away from, vote "No"; Atto here has a negative force. airi|icv: peculiarity of el/xi in meaning ? roviiiraXiv : crasis, = t6 e/xiraXxv, adv. ■ujiiv: with )(p-^(r£Tai, will use you, as most trustworthy, us itovois-: on the ground that (you) alone obeyed. koC . . . Ka£, both . . . and. dXXov : usually explained as for aXXo, obj. of reviea-Oe, inverse attraction, aX.\o attracted to the case of the relative oSrivoi; but rvyxavo governs the gen.; translate whatever else {you may need), ovnvos . . . S^t|o-6e: what kind of clause ? us <|iC\oi . . . Evpou : you will obtain from Cyrus, as friends, i.e., if you are his friends. K-ipov. gen. of source. Tiv^arde : fut. of Tvy)(ava). § 16. ]j'crfl«To SiapcPriKdras : perceived that they (sc. avrous) hud crossed; supplementary parte. iJo-eT) : from rjB-o-iJuu, aor. pass. «... KaC, = Ka£ . . . KaC : note that re is post-positive and an enclitic. T«f irTpa«i)(i.aTi : with both jrc/ii/fos and tlwev. 'Eyii: emphatic; so also efie, ejuot following, oirws . . . |i^XT)povpiov,^ a citadel, a garrison. cerns. 10. t|/i)<|>(£o|iai, vote. 5. {iiiK^Ti, ovKCTi, no longer. 11. diro-il(T|<|>tSo|iai, vote against. 6. |i.6vos, -1), -ov,^ alone. 6. EXERCISES. I. For Oral Translation : 1. If the soldiers follow, we shall begin the marching (fr. e^eXawui). 2. The soldiers will be grateful to us. 3. We shall use the most faithful soldiers. 4. Whatever we need we shall obtain from our friends. 5. The generals per- ceived that Cyrus was pleased (pres. parte). 6. Cyrus, praise us, or we will no longer be your soldiers. 7. Cyrus considers us soldiers. 8. We know that Cyrus will go to the king. II. For Written Translation: 1. If you begin the voting, the other soldiers will be grateful to you. 2.. And Cyrus also knows how to repay it (i.e., the favor). 3. But if you vote to go back, Cyrus will not use you for ( = ets) anything else that he may need. 4. Thus the soldiers were both persuaded and pleased. 5. But before they crossed the river, they said to him. 6. "Take care (= let it be a care to you) that you praise us when we have crossed" (perf. parte). ^ Cf. the Eng. mono-eylltible, mono-tone, mono-gr&m. ^ Cf. tjtpovpapxo'-^ Chap. I. § 6, t^povpovfLiva Cb^p, IV. § S. 228 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Verbs which govern the genitive. 2. Verbs which take a supplementary participle. 3. The negative with the imperative. 4. The substantive use of the infinitive. 5. ottws with the future indicative. 6. Source is how expressed ? 7. Personal pronouns as subjects. 8. Construction after jucXet. 9. Inverse attraction. 10. Crasis. 11. Lingual mutes before linguals. 12. Meaning of it/ii. LESSON LXXVI. 1. TEXT. AnAB. I. IV. 17—19, ot ix.iv . . . iirecrlTitravTO. 2. NOTES. § 17. 7]v)xovTo : rjv augmented from ei. IXcy'to : sc. KCpos ; personal construction ; translate, it was said that Gyrus, etc. raBra : this. iroi'/), SeiKvUfit, Xa/ji^dvo), ttuOio, KOTTTio, tj>tvyo), fi,€vu>) ip\of'ai', i(TTrjiJ,i,, Tre/ATTO), rWrjfU, OiOoyfii, LESSON LXXVn. 231 3. VOCABULARY. NOUNS. 1. ■q avajSaais. 12. 6 /oao-Tos. 22. 17 TTcrpa. 2. TO apyvpiov- 13. juicr^o^opos. 28. 5J TTvK-l]. 3. ^ apir-q. 14. ■q pva. 24. 6 (TITOS. 4. riPiS.. ^ 15. ri /xvpidi. 25. TO (TToSlOV. 5. TO i/iiropuw. 16. 6 vavapxos. 26. TO TEt^OS. 6. ■qiayvTj. 17. ■q vaSs. 27. TO TtKVOV. 7. i 6leds. 18. ■q oAkcis. 28. 6 <^t'A,os. 8. O l^^VS. 19. TO ovopa. 29. TO pOVpUIV. 9. ^ Kli/Mj. 20. ^ irdpoBos- 30. ■q KJivXaxq. 10. 6 Xoyos. 21. 6 irwr-qp. 31. ■q (Spa. 11. ^ \oxoyia. VERBS. 1. dSlKECl). 18. Skoko). 35. opySflpjox. 2. dXCa-KOfuu. 19. edo). 36. OpJUECd. 3. ava-iriidta. 20. iK-KOmiO. 37. irap-epxopai. 4. dva-aTpetJMii. 21. e/t-jSotVo). 38. TTOviiO. 5. djr-ayyeAAo). 22. iv-^t6r]pj.. 39. Trpa-upx. 6. (XTr-eAawo). 23. im-X,€Lirpf(i). 12. dTTO-OTJAaoi. 29. KaO^KU). 46. ^iKoripAopjox. 13. diro-^Euyo). 30. Kara-Kdo). 47. ^paupiia. 14. a7ro-\j/7ii^OfJUU, 31. KpVTTTW. 48. iv9£ou: construction? irXiipes: limits what? A U Ti : whatever, lit. if there was any. SXKo -. else, or other (kind). vXijs, KaXdjiov: with akXo; what kind of genitive? diravTa: refers to Ti, plu. because of the collective idea in n, cf. avTovs Chap. IV. § 8. ■^(Tov: would regularly be singular number with a neut. plu. subj. § 2. o'voi a^pioi : SC. ^vrjaav. ti KaC : and . also, ravra rd 6T|pCa : in emphatic position, cf. cSimkov following. ISUkov: customary past action. lireC ns SiiGkoi: whenever anyone pUrsued ; a conditional rela^ tive clause, referring generally to any one of a class of actions. irpo-SponiSvTts eo-Tao-ttv : they ran forward {on would run forward) , (and) stood still (or would stand still) : 2d aor. parte, of irporpi)(o> ; 2d plup. LESSON" LXXVIII. 233 of to-Tij/tu, but imperfect in meaning ; e'°|' '■ (Pv) relieving one another {by turns = 8ia). Td Kpc'd: plu., because more than one are referred to (tSv dXuTKOfLiviov) . Tots €\o<^6Cois: sc. KpiaEVYovo-a : imperf. of customary past , action; it would outstrip (tliem) in flight, lit. withdrew fleeing. iro> : cf. TrpoSpa/ici'Tes § 2, dat. of manner. aCpovo-a: (by) raising them (i.e., wings), mrmp io-rCip: just as a sail, i.e., using its wings as a sail; for construction, cf. irripviiv. av ns . . . dvio-T^ : a present general supposition, not fut. with more probability as ecrrt, the conclusion (apodosis), shows. to-Ti: is possible; note the accent when it denotes possibility. \a|ipdvEiv: object? Ppaxv : acc, construction ? rfSio-Ta: superl. adv. ; positive i^Scu;; comparative? very sweet; the superl. is sometimes used to denote " a very high degree of the quality." 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. o«Tos requires an article with its substantive and takes the predicate position. 2. The imperfect may express customary or repeated past action. 3. A general conditional sentence referring to present time takes idv + the subjunctive in the condition, and the present indicative in the conclusion. 4. The optative is used in general conditions which refer to past time; in the conclusion, the imperfect is used. 5. *s 5. airo-o-irdii),^ draw off, withdraw. cpT))jios, a day's march through 6. TO apufia,^ spice. a desert country. 7. TO on|/tvBiov,' wormiDood. 16. £ii&8i]s, -es,^ fragrant. 8. ppaxvs, -«ta, -v,^ short. 17. ijSiis, -tta, -v,' sweet. 9. 8i.a-S^xo|i.ai,^ receive in turn, 18. d KdXoiios,^" reed, brushwood. succeed, relieve. 19. to Kpioi,^^ flesh, meat. 10. Si-Co-TT]|u, set apart; intrans., 20. d|ji,a\^s, -h,^^ even, level. stand, apart. 21. d ovos, ass, donkey. 11. rj SopKds,^ gazelle. 22. iravToios, -d, -ov,^' varied, of all 12. £Xdit>cios, -ov, belonging to a deer , kinds. Kpcas IXdi|>Ei,ov, venison. 23. iravu,^^ stop ; mid., cease. > Cf. Eng. spasm. ' Cf. Eng. aromatic. 3 Cf. French absinthe, brandy flavored with wormwood. * Hence Eng. ii-i-brach, 6rac%-Iogy. f* Cf. Eng. take. Hence the name Dorcas. ' Cf. Eng. eremite, hermit, " €5 well, cf. Eng. czi-logy; tiS, from the theme oS (Lat. od-or), smell. ^ Cf. TJSo/Aai, he pleased; ^Se'w^, gladly. i" Hence Lat. calamus. " Cf. Eng. cren-Bote. ^ Cf. Eng. tm-omalous. 13 From iravT-, stem of was. ^* Cf . Eng, pause. LESSON LXXVin. 235 24. 1] wepSi^, partridge. 28. ij irr^pv£, win^. 25. ir^TO|iai,i_;?y. 29. rj o-Tp6ii06s,^ ostrich. 26. ir\T|en-»a, wing, for pet-na. ^ Cf . TrapairA^o-ios, like. 8 Cf. Spo-fto^. * Cf. Eng. ostrich. " Cf . Eng. v: lived by buying food {in exchange = dvrfi)), i.e., they lived by bartering the mill-stones in exchange for food ; l^wv imperf. of ^ao)., § 6. TO o-TpdT€v(jia : emphatic by position, o-itos : masc. in the sing., neut. in the plu., i.e., ra o-ira. irpCao-Sai: sc. (TtTOv; aor. of wviofmi, depends on -^v, it was not jjossible to buy, etc. A ^■i\ -. except, pop- PapiKiu: SC. what? ti]V KairCeT)v : SC. {it waS possible tO buy) . iTov (usually plu.), 6arZey- 7. itn-Xiiira, give out, fail. grits. 8. €irpid|i,ii)v, cf. wvfojjai. 3. dvT-a-yopd^u.l buy in exchange. 9. Idw,^ live. 4. 'AmK6s,-'i\,-6v, Attic, Athenian. 10. riiu-a^Xiov," half-obol. 5. Svva)iai, be able; worth. 11. ij KoiriSii,* kapithe, two quarts. 1 Cf. ayopa, market. ' Ct. Eng. soo-logy. * Cf. i7jiit-dAto;' = 13. * A Persian dry measure = (about) two quarts. 238 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 12. d kvkXos,^ circle. 19. iroKla,^ sell. 13. d Xi|i,6s, hunger. 20. d o-(7Xos,* shekel, 24 cenis. 14. d dpoXos,^ o&oZ, (about) , H. 216, 20 ; G. 291, 36. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. at ava|vp(S(s, Persian irowsers. 9. ij cvrolCd,^ good order, disci- 2. o 7os,^ hill. pline. 3. tia-TtKia,'^ bring through, to an 10. (!t||»,i, send, hurl; mid. hasten. end, complete, continue, go on. 11. Rpdrio-ros, -i\, -ov, most power- 4. Svir-ir6pEvTos, -ov,* difficult of ful, best. travel. 12. piaKpds, -d, -6v, long. 5. cIo--irT|Sd(a, leap into. 13. )i,dXa, vei'y, exceedingly. 6. lK-KO|i[|(ii, carry out. 14. to )i.^pos, pai't, portion. 7. evioi, -oi, -a, some. IS. iiETcupos, -ov,^ lifted, raised (in 8. tidis, immediately. mid air). • y5, earth; Xdi^oc, an eminence. ' Of. Te^evTain, finish. 3 Cf . tropevofiai., airopia, anopeta ; Sva- has the Sense of difficult, cf . Eng. dys-TpepsiA. * eC, well, and tottw, arrange. c Cf. Eng. meteor. IND. OR. PK. — 16 242 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 16. ij vtKT|,^ victory. 26. ij , help in hastening 20. itoikIXos, -t), -ov, many-colored, onward. embroidered. 29. o-xoXaios, -o, -ov, slow ; -s, adv., 21. iroXvTtX'^is, -«'s, costly, rich. slowly. 22. irop<|>vpcos, contr., -ovs, -a, -oSv, 30. o TpdxijXos, throat, neck. purple. 31. TO v8(iip,° water. 23. irpdv^s, -is," steep. 32. ij x«'p,' hand. 24. pfirTo), throw, throw off. 33. 6 X'^**, grass, fodder. 25. a-ircv8a>, hasten, 6. EXERCISES. I. Decline Swo'TrdpeuTos, juEpos, TroXDreXiJs, irop^vpov^. II. For Oral Translation : 1. Some of these stages were very long. 2. And once, certainly (= 8ij), the bravest of the companions of Cyrus (= the bravest about Cyrus) conveyed the wagons out. 3. The Persians leisurely threw off their robes where they severally (from EKao-Tos) happened to be. 4. Some of the men ran down the steep hills faster than horses. 5. The Persians wore (= had) neck- laces and bracelets. 6. The generals would run if Cyrus should order. 7. If Cyrus were ordering, the generals would run (imply- ing that they are not running). 8. If Cyrus orders (subj.), the generals will throw (off) their robes. III. Por Written Translation : 1. Whenever Cyrus wishes either water or forage, he (always) makes (= marches) long stages. 2. Once mud was found (= appeared). 3. Therefore Cyrus ordered the barbarian army to assist (in) conveying the wagons out. 4. And when it seemed that they were acting leisurely, in anger Cyrus ordered the bravest and strongest Persians to throw off their tunics (and) to convey the wagons out. 5. And immediately they leaped into the mud (and) did so (= outo)(s)). 6. The soldiers would run faster, if Cyrus should order. 7. If I had a tunic, I should think it beautiful. iCf. i-iKiiu Chap. n. §8. ' Of . iraf, all. s Cf . Lat. pronus. * arevo^, narrow ; xiiipa, place. « Cf . iiro-pi^afu Chap. IV. § 5. « Cf . Bng. hydrant, hydro-phobia. 1 Cf. Eng. cMr-ography. LESSON LXXXI. 243 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. The partitive genitive. 2. Cognate accusative. 3. Decl. of vStop, -xiip. 4. Comparison of lyaflds ; of stems in ov. 5. Potential optative. 6. Hypothetical indicative. 7. Conditions with less probability ; conditions contrary to fact ; general suppositions, past and present. 8. Uses of the Greek article. 9. The supple- mentary participle. 10. The aorist participle with infinitives. 11. Translation of gen. absolute. 12. The infinitive as subject. LESSON LXXXI. 1. TEXT, Anab. I. V. 9, 10, T«5 . . . irXfurrav. 2. NOTES. §9. TO a-v(i,irav: adv. acc, On the whole. 8t]\os 11V : personal con- struction, Eng. it was evident that Cyrus. o-ireuSuv : suppl. parte. dSov: construction? owou ^i\: except where; fL-q because the sen- tence implies a condition; cf. ei ft.-^, except, ivina.: note its posi- tion ; postpositive. o«r<[) . . . too-outi^ : quanta . . . tanto, lit. by how much . . . by so much; translate the . . the, i.e., the faster he went, the more unprepared, etc. ; the dative of degree of difference. IXeoi : opt. of indir. disc, standing for oo-cu av 6S.ttov tkOia, as we judge from the future apodosis frnxda-Oai. pao-iXet: with ijuixT)s: gen. after a word of touching, to i'Swp: subj.; cf. ras SwdfjieK above, otvov : appositive. to€to : refers to /ieA.ti/ijs as a thing. irXeto-Tov : very abundant. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. The Greek prefers the personal construction. 2. |i'avi^, aivm, H. 539, 4, 343 ; G. pp. 394, 404. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. dva-yKaCos, -a, -ov, necessary ; 11. kov(|>os, -t|, -ov, light. neut., a necessity. 12. iidxoiiiai,^,^?^^^, contend with. 2. airro|i.ai, touch, lay hold of. 13. to ijitikos,^ length. 3. TJ pdXavos, nut; (of the date- 14. d (vdos) voBs, mind. pahn) date. 15. ir^po(v),^ beyond, across. 4. Sia-o-irdu,^ draw apart; sep- 16. irt|jtir\T)|i,i,''_/fH. arate. 17. to irXfiOos, number, multitude, 5. Sia-Tpip,^ wear away; delay. extent. 6. 1] Si<|i6epd,^ hide; (hide made 18. ■irpoo--^x'"> ^old to, apply. into a) bag. 19. to o-Tl70o-(ia,* covering. 7. o eK\.&vni], hay. 6. EXERCISES. • I. Compare iroA.us, dyaflds, aa-6ev^s, ra^euK, a-)(oXxxiuK. II. Tor Oral Translation : 1. The generals were plainly (= plain) not delaying except (d p,!^) for (heica) corn. 2. We think (that) we shall fight the king's army (while it is) most unprepared. 3. The king is strong in territory but weak in his forces. 4. It is evident that the king's army is strong (personal construction). 6. The greater the king's army is, the more leisurely he marches. 1 Of. iiriaira. § 3. ^ Of. Eng. diairibe. ' How different from to Sepixa^ Cf. Eng. diphtheria. * Cf. /laxff battle, Eng. logo-machy. " Cf. /loicpof, long, § 7. '^ Cf. lear' ocTtTrepds Chap. I. § 9. ^ Cf. TrA^-pTjs, crii/i-irAe-nj?, irA^-doff. * From trreytii = tego, cover. ^ Cf. an-o-ff-iraw § 3 ; Sia-triroM § 9. " How different from to irAoioi'? 246 INDUCTEVE GREEK PRIMER. 6. The water did not touch the com. 7. Cyrus crossed the river upon these rafts ; by means of these rafts. 8. We shall take pro- visions out of the city; away from the city"; in the city; into the city. 9. Cyrus is filling my rafts with provisions. 10. Cyrus was crossing; kept crossing, attempted to cross ; crossed. III. For Written Translation: 1. On the whole, it was evident that the soldiers were hastening the entire way on account of water. 2. For they thought the faster they marched (opt. of indir. disc), the stronger the king would be (fut. infin.) in the number of his men. 3. The king was evidently weak in his forces. 4. Cyrus was buying provisions for his army from the city Charmande beyond a river, Euphrates by name. 5. He was filling his rafts with hay. 6. By means of these (i.e., rafts) he kept crossing (parte.) (and) taking corn and wine. 7. The king's force was strong in the (fact that) his territory was very large. 7. TOPICS FOB STUDY. 1. Adverbial accusative. 2. Supplementary participles. 3. oa-m . . . Toa-ovTto. 4. Comparison of adjectives and adverbs. 5. Con- struction after verbs of fighting, filling, touching. 6. The infinitive as substantive. 7. Negative result. 8. Negative in protasis; in apodosis. 9. Uses of the dative in this lesson. 10. Comparison of crxoXaios, (rxoA.ati\e^dvT(Dv : gen. abs. with tov (^=tiv6^) after MeVtovos and Tov supplied after twv KXedpxov : when or because (some) one of. the soldiers of Menon and {one) of those of Clearchus had some dispute. Se Ti : explain the accent of 8e; n cognate ace. Note that tov (=rtvos) LESSON LXXXII. 247 is an enclitic. dSiKctv: was in the wrong or had done wrong ; dSixEo) often has a perfect meaning in the present. iXt^tv : what would i\e$ev mean ? why imperfect ? E\cdpxev7, Jlee for refuge, 2. d)ii|>i-X^7(i> (talk on both sides), wrangle, quarrel. 3. t) clgivT), ax. 4. d(|>-iim'cv(a,^ ride away. 5. TO 7,^ strike out; (of one's senses) dumfound ; amaze. 9. l|i-pd\Xa>,^ throw on; irXTcyos l|j,pdWci>, throw on blows, chastise by beating. 6. EXBEGISBS. I. For Oral Translation : 1. Here the soldiers were disputing (about) something. 2. The soldiers came to their own generals, 3. Cyrus judged that Clearchus had done wrong (pres.). 4. On this very day (= this day itself), Cyrus rides to his own army with few attendants (= those about him). 5. The soldiers of Clearchus were very few. 6. As Clearchus rides through (the army), he sees 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. Kptvo), decide, judge. o XC6os,^ stone. TO liXoV, piece of wood. 0XC705, -11, -ov,' small; ^la.few. dp-yC^oiiai,^ be angry. ov'irio, not yet. it\i\'^i\, plaga, blow. irpoo-eXavvu, ride forward, up. ayj.t,a^ scindo, split. * Derivation ? ^ Thenoe n-Aay, ttAtjy, cf. 7rX>jyi|. « Cf. (TKeTTTiov Chap. III. § 11. ' Cf. Eng. olig-a,rcby. ' Cf . Eng. schism. 2 Same in origin as genu and the Eng. lenee. « Cf. i/jL^iKKei Chap. II. § 8. ' Cf. Eng. JtWio-graphy, moao-lith. 8 Cf. opyij § 8. LESSON LXXXIII. 249 a certain man splitting wood. 7. Clearchus placed his shield upon his knee. 8. Clearchus had more horsemen than Menon. 9. Menon's men (= the men of Menon) and Menon too became terrified (from liiirXAyiijv) . II. For Written Translation : 1. Cyrus was exceedingly angry at Clearchus because he (=that one) had inflicted (parte.) blows upon a certain soldier (dat. governed by ev in composition). 2. For he judged that Clearchus had done wrong. 3. And the soldiers also were angry. 4. For on this very day some soldiers threw their axes (at Clearchus). 5. But all missed him. 6. Accordingly Clearchus immediately summoned his own soldiers to arms, and ordered more than forty cavalrymen to march against Menon, so that both Menon and his soldiers were terrified at the affair. 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Genitive absolute. 2. Cognate accusative. 3. Time denoted by the present parte. ; the aorist. 4. Position and accent of the indefinite pronoun. 5. Formation and comparison of Itr^pSi^. 6. Different ways of expressing time. 7. Uses of the genitive and dative in this lesson. 8. Position of the genitive of the reflexive pronouns ; position of avro^. 9. Meanings of airos. 10. Case after comparative with 17 ; without'^. 11. Result. 12. Meaning of dSt/ccoj, riKtii, in the present. 13. Meaning of Ivrtnu in the perf. and plup. LESSON LXXXIII. 1. TEXT. Anab. I. V. 14-17, 'O . . otAo. 2. NOTES. § 14. vo-Tcpos : pred. adj. with the force of an adv., behind, irpoo-iiiv : , aCvETo : kept appearing, agrees with the subject nearest to it. d o-rCpos: personal construction, us 8iv : that of (i.e., the track of), about, etc. ; what other word with numerals means about? ovtoi: i.e., horsemen, understood from tn-TTtov. Kttl tl Ti aXKo : and whatever else there was : lit. if there was any other thing, etc. n^po-ris Av^p : translate Persian, ^mi : by birth, dat. of manner. pao-iXct: construction? to iroXcVta: ace. of specifi- cation. \£76|xcvos: said (to be) among. Kvpcp: construction? Kat: even or also. iroXcfji^irds : concessive, although he had, etc. § 2. SoCt) : conditional sentence with less probability in the indir. disc. oTi : translate as if it came before d . . . Soirj. KaraKdvoi av : a part of the conclusion (apodosis) of the preceding condition. EvcSpEilo-ds : manner, by lying in ambush, dv eXoi : this and the follow- ing optatives are in the same construction as KaraKdvoi av preceding. ToB KMiv eiruSvTas: would hinder them from attacking {and) burning; gen. of separation; note the substantive use of the infinitive. iroffio-sMv (lio-TE npd(rai . . . ^Kdicvev : so. jSatriXea ; indir. disc. for pa.(rov Tots aeavTov iinrtvcnv w <^iA,tov fxe mo8i^(e(r6aj,. i|>i\Cas, irCo-reus : i.e., to the king, us iflcro : (faithful), as he supposed. Xa^iiv : took (and). 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. In the genitive absolute construction a substantive must some- times be supplied from the context. 2. Circumstantial participles are often best translated as subor- dinate clauses; the kind of clause must be determined by the connection. 3. The subject of an infinitive is not expressed when it is the same as the subject of the principal verb ; a predicate word with the infinitive is then in the nominative. 4. Conditional relative clauses with more probability are ex- pressed by a rel. + av and the subjunctive. 5. Conditional sentences with less probability take el with the optative in the condition and the optative with av in the conclusion. 6. us with numerals = about; with superlatives, as possible. 7. A verb with two or more subjects may agree with the subject nearest to it. 8. ov is not used in indirect discourse unless it was also used in the direct. 9. The future optative is used only in indirect discourse. 10. The infinitive with the neuter article may be used as a noun. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Conditional relative clauses, H. 912-918 ; G. 1428-1437. 2. Comparison of adjectives and adverbs, H. 248, 249, 250 (o-xoXaios), 251, a, 253, 254, 255, 257, 258, 259, 260; G. 350, 351, 354, 357, 361, 362 (o-xoXaros), 363, 365, 367. 368, 369, 370. 3. Principal parts of ayw, apxo, ypa^m, ex"; H. 508, 6, 7, 11, 16 ; G. pp. 372, 376, 378, 384. 254 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 5. VOCABULARY. , 1. TO yivo%,^ genus, race, family. 11. irpo-Kara-KOM, or -KaCu,* burn in 2. -ypdcj}!!!,^ write. advance. 3. hi-ayyiWa, carry word through, 12. •itpo, lie in ambush. 14. viro-S£xo|'^<>'<'> receive, welcome. 6. 1] ^irio-ToX^, epistola, letter. 15. to iiir6|i,vT)|j,a, reminder. 7. eToi|j.os, -r\, -ov, or -os, -ov, 16. ^p6JC,a, tell, declare. ready. 17. xp'fjo-i|j,os, -t), -ov, or -os. -ov, use- 8. TO txvos, trace, track, footprint. ful. 9. Kwra-Kalva,^ kill, put to death. 18. a^i\\.y.o^, -ov, adoantageous, bene- 10. o K6irpos, dung. ficial. 6. BXBRCISBS. I. For Oral Translation : 1. Orontas was most excellent in mili- tary affairs. 2. He kept burning whatever ( = if there was any- thing) was useful to Cyrus. 3. If Cyrus gives me men, I shall either capture ( = take) or kill (from KaraKavSt) the horsemen. 4. If Orontas should plot against me, I would slay him. 5. We shall come with as large an army as we can. 6. Tell your soldiers to receive Orontas as a friend. 7. I shall write many letters to my friends. 8. Cyrus said that he would write a letter to me. 9. The horsemen are ready for the king. 10. Cyrus, keep (= hinder) the soldiers from seizing the king. II. For Written Translation : 1. Orontas wrote the following letter to the king. 2. "I shall come to {^^p6^i) you with as many soldiers as I can. 3. Cyrus will give me a thousand horsemen. 4. For I told him that I would keep ( = hinder) you from burning the forage in this country. 5. But I shall not do this. 6. Bid your army to receive me as a friend." 7. But this letter was given to Cyrus. 7. TOPICS FOB STUDY. 1. ISTeuter plural subject. 2. Translation of circumstantial par- ticiples. 3. Construction of y'vei, to, TroXi/ua, Kvfja in § 1. 4. Opta- 1 Of. yiyvoixai., theme yev ; Lat. gigno, genus. ^ Cf . Eng. geo-graphy, graphite. 3 Kaivbi, same as KTelvaj; cf. cLTTO-KTeviav Chap. I. § 3. * Cf. KaTexavaev Chap. IV. § 10. fi From rtitui, come. Associated with what verb? LESSON LXXXV. 255 tives and subjunctives in this lesson. 5. Case after verbs of fighting. 6. Genitive of separation. 7. Infinitive as substantive. 8. Ex- pression of negative result in Greek. 9. Potential opt. ; opt. in indir. disc. 10. outos with substantives. 11. Uses of S.v. 12. Uses of rjfji.i. toO \6yov: Ms speech; why gen.? Ilap-EKaXco-a : aor. used where English expects the perfect, oirws: with the subjunctive irpa^ia, that I may do. Pou\cv6)jLcvos : object ? irpds : in the sight of. toiIto : referring to the clause o Ti hiKaiov i(TTi. 'OpovTci : Doric gen. to«tod£ : here, i added to show that the word refers to one near by, this one here, tovtov : note the position for emphasis, etvai : infin. of purpose. IfioC : em- phatic, avrds : Other meanings for aire's ? €(i,o£ : cf. ip-oL preceding ; construction ? avr6v : with lirovrjira ; why not with TrpocnroXepav ? Sdjoi: the subject is Travo-aa-Oai. iroXcVv : cf. Tov Kaeiv § 2. Sefidv : sc. x^^P"') ^^^- <* 't^Jit hand; a pledge. 256 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. 'Yi7vu(rK(i) = / know, ava-yiyvuxTKti) = / read. 2. By prolepsis or anticipation the subject of a subordinate clause is made the object of the principal verb. 3. Substantives, even when modified by attributives, may be omitted when they can be readily supplied from the context. 4. Relative clauses may denote cause. 5. A predicate adjective is neuter when it refers to a clause as subject. 6. I added to a demonstrative pronoun makes it refer to what is near; such a demonstrative may be used with a substantive without the article. 7. |jid\a is compared fidXa, fuiXXov, fi.d\i(rTa. 8. The infinitive may be used as subject, also as indirect objectt to express purpose. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Declension of the indef. rel. pro., H. 280 ; G. 425. 2. Declension of the reciprocal pro., H. 268 ; G. 404. 3. Principal parts of yLyvuxTKW, SoKeco, dyycWo), iroiidi, Trparrta, H. 531 (4), 509 (3), cf. 342, 339, 614 (6) ; G. pp. 378, 380, 372, cf. 115, 398. 4. Complete synopsis of irodw, H. 339 ; G. cf . <^t\£0), 494. 5. Enclitics, H. 113, 115, 116 ; G. 140, 141, 142, 143. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. avor^viviia-Ka, recognize, read. 5. ij Kpims,^ judgment, trial. 2. airo-p-piiTos, -ov,^ not to be told, 6. ira.pa-Ka\4a,calltoone',iside,invite. secret. 7. irpa(r-iroX{|i.^(i>, wage war against. 3. 1] Bejid,^ pledge. 8. o o-v|i.pouXos, counsellor. 4. cl-a-yYEWo), bring out word, make 9. vit'^koos, -ov,* subject to, obedient. known. » aiTo, frovi, not (like a-priv.), and the theme pe, speak; cf. elpyjKa Chap. II. § 5. 2 Strictly right ha-nd, sc, xeip. 3 Same derivation as Kp^vut; cf. Kpfvas Chap. V. § 11. * uffd and dKovw ; cf . Lat. obedio = ob + audio. LESSON LXXXVI. ^7 e. BXEBCISES. I. Decline Kpicm, dvayvovs. II. For Oral Translation : 1. Cyrus orders his own generals to bring (= to lead) their own hoplites into the tents. 2. About three thousand hoplites were brought into the tents. 3. My friends say that the trial of Orontas took place as follows. 4. Cyrus began the trial after saying this. 5. " I shall deliberate with you what is right for us (ace.) to do about this (man) here." 6. In order that he may not wage war against us, it seems best to take pledges from him. 7. Orontas was honored most of the Persians. ■ III. For Written Translation : 1. When this letter had been read (aor.), Orontas was arrested (from rnXSaix^avu)) . 2. The noblest of the Persians were called together, and the hoplites stood under arms about Cyrus. 3. Clearchus also was within as a counsellor. 4. And the trial of Orontas was reported by him to me as follows. 6. Cyrus began his speech by saying (parte): 6. "Orontas here was first given to me by my father. 7. But he says that my brother ordered him to make war against me. 8. However, I caused him to cease from waging war against me." 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Prolepsis. 2. ovToaC 3. Comparison of /xoAa. 4. Meaning of synopsis. 5. Gen. of separation. 6. iroXe/xcIv aircp, jroXe/ieiv avv airw. 7. Adjectives in agreement with clauses. 8. The infinitive of pur- pose. 9. Purpose is how expressed ? result ? 10. Uses of relative clauses. 11. Enclitics. 12. Meanings of airos, outos. 13. Liquid futures and aorists. LESSON LXXXVI. 1. TEXT. Anab. I. VI. 7, 8, fiera . . . So^ai/u. 2. NOTES. § 7. a: used with the voc. of address, ta-rw. for eo-rtv because it stands at the beginning of the clause. 6' n n liSCKrio-a : {is there) any IVD. GK. PE. — 17 268' INDUCTIVE. GREEK PRLMKIl. wrong wliicli I did to you ; o tl, a cogxiate aoc. ; o-e is the otlier object. oTv ov : " No." on when it introduces direct discourse is, equivalent to our quotation marks ; ov, a proclitic, standing at the end of a sen- tence takes an accent. •npAroi : from ipiordai ; where found ? ovSiv : cog. 2icc., no (wrong) . a8iKov|i.cvos : concessive, airoirras: revolt (and), on ISvvu: as far as you could; lit. wliat (harm) you were able to do,^sc. KaKuis TToidy ; o ti, cog. acc. ; eSuvco, imperf. 2d sing, of 8vvafjuu. 6<|>i] : said " Ye.s." t-yviDs: came to know, recognized. Svva)ii.v: perhaps ironical for weakness. (leraiUXciv o-oi E<)>r|avcpos 7^7ovas: have you been plainly plotting, etc., adj. where Eng. expects adv. oTi ovScv d8iKT|9eCs : SC. iTri^ovXevtov c^avepos yeyova. aSiKos : why nom.? 'H 7ap dvoYKT): assuredly (I admit it) for (it is) necessary. UToirov: thereupon. "En : hereafter. S.v ^^voio : what kind of optative ? on : cf. on ov. 0*8" li 7€vo£p.Tiv : not even if I should become (friendly and faithful). o-oC 7' av iron' 4'n 86|ai.|ii : would I ever again seem so to you at least; note the conditional sentence, fut. with less probability. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. Io-tC becomes ean when it stands first in the sentence or when it expresses possibility. 2. o« at the end of a sentence takes the acute accent. 3. dSiK^u and KaK&i xoteto take a cognate accusative of the wrong done and an accusative of the person or thing injured. 4. A predicate adjective is often used where an adverb might" be expected. 5. on introducing direct quotations is equivalent to the English quotation marks and is not to be translated. 6. After an infinitive whose subject is not expressed because it is the same as the subject of the principal verb, a predicate word is in the nominative. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Accent of o^, H. 112, a; G. 138. 2. 4Vn(v), H. 480, 1, 2, 3 ; G. 144, 6. LESSON LXXXVI. 259 3. Conjugation of 8wa/xat, H. 487, 1, 2, 3 ; G. 729, 742, 632. 4. Principal parts of yiyvo/juu, -qiu, dvov, rda-a-m, H. 606, 1, 535, 1, 539, 8, 514, 9 ; G-. pp. 378, 404, 381, 401. 5. Classes of verbs (1-4), H. 392-401; G. 667, 568, 669, 572, 576, 579, 580, 1., II., in., IV. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. aSiKos, -ov,^ unjust. 6. |i,ETar|i,^\ei (impersonal), poenitet, 2. 6 Pufids, altar. it repents. 3. 7^ (enclitic), at /east (emphasiz- 7. oiioXoy^u, acknowledge, confess, ing the preceding ■word). admit. 4. if, verily, assuredly. 8. ovkovv, therefore, then; in ques- 5. KaKus iroi^ai, do evil or harm tions, so then f to, injure. 9. ir(&iroT£, ever yet. 10. TpCros, -T], -ov, tertius, third. 6. BXEBCISBS. I. Select and classify the verbs of the tjrst four classes in this lesson. II. For Oral Translation : 1. They kept asking Orontas. 2. "Did you not then revolt to the king ? " 3. " Will you do harm to our country after this ? " 4. " Did you not come to me and take a pledge from me ? " 5. Orontas injured Cyrus's land as far as he could (= whatever he was able). 6. Why was Orontas injured by Cyrus ? 7. They have plainly been plotting against us. 8. Orontas replied: "I will never again become hostile to you." 9. Orontas replied that he would never again become hostile to Cyrus. 10. If we should become friends to Cyrus, he would never again injure us. III. For Written Translation : 1. " After that I wronged him in nothing (ace. ; why ?), as he (= this one) always says. 2. Orontas admits that he wronged me (in) whatever he could.^ 3. But when he knew my power, he repented and gave me pledges. 4. Orontas, in what were you injured by me after that ? 5. ' In nothing,' said Orontas. 6. If then lie should again become a friend to me, he would never again seem (so) at least to me." " > Cf. Sixr), SiKaio;, aSiKeu. ^ Cf. 5 of the Oral Sxercises. 260 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Proclitics. 2. itrnv, iariv. 3. OTL in direct quotations. 4. A peculiar use of predicate adjectives. 5. Cases after dStKeu, KaKm TToUio. 6. Comparison of va-Tcpov. 7. eSwVo). 8. //.eTa/xeXai/ o-oi § 7. 9. etjiria-Oa. 10. wap' e/ioS ; why not irapd /iou ? why not e| or aTTO ? 11. Conditional sentences in § 8. 12. Potential optative. 13. Syn- opsis of rjiJi,L in the act. voice. 14. Location of the verbs in § 8. LESSON LXXXVII. 1. TEXT. Anab. I. VI. 9-11, XI/oos . . . idvri. 2. NOTES. §9. viiuv: partitive gen. iivai, : why not d7ro<^^mi ? where found ? on os, grave, tomb. 8. ev^o-Ku, die ; 2d aor. Idavov. 6. EXERCISES. I. Por Oral Translation : 1. Those who were present said that Orontas had done wrong (pres. opt. of ihiKim). 2. Generals, be the 1 Of. iSiKiD. 2 Cf . Eiig. " Thanatofsia " (n view of death) . '^ From (rKrjirTpov and Ix"* * ^^' trvy-ylyvoiJ^ai, ycVoy* ^ Cf. o-xoAaiw? Chap, V. § 8, 262 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. first to show forth your opinions.: 3. We advise you to do good to those who are (parte.) your friends. 4. Let lis have (imv.) leisure to guard against Orontas. 5. We agree with the generals' opinions. 6. They took (parte.) Orontas by the belt and led him forth. 7. Do ye all arise and seize Orontas. 8. Orontas knew that the soldiers were leading him forth to execution. 9. Artapktes, a faithful scepter-bearer, led Orontas into his tent. 10. No one knows how Orontas died, but we all conjecture. II. For Written Translation : 1. In regard to Orontas, Cyrus said that the man had done this (plu.). 2. "Let Clearchus be the first to speak ( = speak first) what he thinks." 3. " Put Orontas out of the way, that we may no longer be guarding against him ! " 4. After this Cyrus ordered the relatives of Orontas to, take him by the belt (and) to lead him away to execution. 5. And then when he was led forth it was enjoined upon all (case ? why ?) to do homage to him. 6. Accordingly they led him into a tent, and after this Orontas was never seen alive. 7. All supposed thab he (= avrov) wag' put to death, but nobody ever saw his tomb. 7. TOPICS FOB STUDY. 1. TrpStTos ; irpStTov. 2. aTTocjyijvaj. ; aTrocji^vca. 3. Indefinite relative pronouns. 4. Meanings of ottms. 5. raSe, (SSe; raijTa, outo)(s). 6. Derivation of ovKin, ii-qKiTi. 7. Dative of possessor. 8. Partitive genitive. 9. Case after verbs of taking hold of. 10. etti Oavdrtg; inl Odvarov. 11. oiTrep, ot. 12. oAAoi, oWus. 13. Classification of verbs in this lesson. 14. Principal parts of the verbs in this lesson. LESSON LXXXVIII. - REVIEW. 1. TEXT. Anab. I. V.-VI. 2. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Enclitics. Transfer of aspiration. Accent of oil. 2. Declension. — (a) Contract substantives of the 2d decl. ; (&) v&up ;• LESSON LXXXVm. 263 (c) x«p j i^) yepas ; (e) ywu ; (/) reciprocal pronoun ; (g) indef * rel. pro. ; (h) ■qBvs. 3. Comparison. — (a) Adjectives ; (&) adverbs. 4. Verbs. — (a) Classes; (6) fut. perfect; (c) 2d pass, system; (d) ttjiu; (e) Swa/xat; (/) synopses: ttoUw, <^atVo); (g) principal parts : oyto, dyyeAAo), okovw, djUapTavoj, app^o), yiyvofmi, yiyviiictKW, ypatjiw, 8eVf^') (^0 ^""ti-v- 5. Syntax. — (a) ttos, oAos; (b) cognate accusative; (c) partitive gen. with verbs ; (d) genitive with Sew ; (e) genitive of price ; (/) uses of the dative ; (g) predicate adjective for adv. ; (h) con- ditional sentences ; (i) conditional rel. clauses. 3. VOCABULARY. NOUNS. 1. TO aXivpw. 23. 6 KoXa/ios. 45. 6 TTiyXos. 0. TO aA.<^iroi'. 24. 6 KavSvi. 46. TO TtA^^OS. 3. ai amivpiSs^. 25. ^ KwirCdri. 47. 6 irpoa-qKiov. 4. ■q d^tiTj. 26. ^ Kdp-q. 48. 6 o-tyXos. 5. TO aposfM. 27. rj KOTrpas. 49. (TKryiTTOvxoi 6. TO mj/tvOiov. 28. TO (cpeos. 50. 17 (TTiVOXIOpid. 7. 17 j8aAavo$. 29. ^7 Kpto-is- 51. O-Tl/JoS. 8. 6 fiolflOi. 30. 6 kvkXos. 52. fj 0i. 13. ri SiajSacrts. 35. 17 V1K1/. 57. 6 TOTTOS. 14. ij h^Oipa. 36. voBs. 58. Tpaxt^Oi. 15. ri hopKos. 37. TO ^VXOV. 59. TO vSlOp. 16. 6 e^tAovTijs. 38. 6 ofiokoi. 60. ■q v\r]. 17. 6 iTTl&lTUTfWS. 39. 6 ovos. 61. TO xnroiXvTjfui. 18. 17 iin(7To\ij. 40. 6 ovos oXeTijs. 62. V X"P; 19. 17 iVTd^ia. 41. V oprn- 63. xiAds. 20. TO ■^fiim^oklov. 42. TO irdOoi. 64. 6 xo'W^- 21. OdvOLTO^. 43. TO ttoXtov- 65. 6 xopTos. 22. TO 'XVOS. 44. 17 wepSi^. 66. 17 (OTt's. 264 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 1 . cupto. 2. a/juxpTavto. 3. dp,0). 14. Si-ayye'AAft). 15. Swr&ixQpjai. 16. 8ia-K07rro). 17. 8ta-(rira. 36. y-iyjai. 37. Kad-e^opai. 38. KaKus l;)^£«'. 39. kokSs TTOteii'. 40. Kara-Kaivta. 41. Kara-KaiD. 42. KaTa-Xuo). 43. KaTa-7ri^8d(i>. 44. KaTa-tTKiTrTOfxai, or -(TKOTrettf. 45. KaTa-cvyoD. 46. Kpivia. 47. pAxo/jLai. 48. /xeTa-//.eA.£i. 49. ojuoXoyEO). £0 OpVTTU). 51. irapa-KoXco). 52. iravo). 53. tripi-ppiw. AD.IECTIVE8. 12. ££(11817;. 13. iJ8us. 14. KOVfjJO?- 15. .KpaTKTTOS. 16. fJUXKpOi. 17. ixerewpoi- 18. 6\tyos. 19. o/xaXi;;. 20. iravToros. 21. ir\£dpiaio;. 22. TTOlKlKoS' 54. ireropM,. 55. mp.irX.riiu. 56. TrXijo-tafe). 57. irpo-SiSpacTKO). 58. Trpo-Kara-Kam. 59. Trpocr-ci/ju. 60. TrpO(T-eXavv. 78. (^uXaTTO). 79. x.mpia>. 80. (oveo/iai. 23. 7roA.uTeA.17s. 24. iropffyvpmi'S. 25. Trpav^s. 26. (TiTayoiyds- 27. o-xoAaios. 28. TpiTOS. 29. VTTT^KOOi. 30. -ucrTEpos. 31. xpricniJuK- 32. i/'ZAds. 33. eKLiws- LESSON LXXXIX. 265 ADVERBS. 1. 2. 3. 5. 6. 7. juoXa. OVTTO). 9. 10. 11. vepav. Trp^m- irunrore. 4. €i(9vs. 8. OVKoSf. LESSON LXXXIX. 1. TEXT. Anab. I. VII. 1-3, 'EvrevOev . TTokXaTrXxurianf. a. NOTES. § 1. «rTo8|io«s : construction ? iroieiToi : why mid. ? ircpV (i^o-as viiKTas : ai)out midnight, plu. used with reference to the watches into which the night was divided. IS6kci: sc. avnS; he thought, ds Ti\v firiov has no ace. ending -v. poo-iX^a : why no article? T ; attraction of a to the case of its antecedent and incorporation of the antece- dent into the rel. clause. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. Some nouns of the 2d declension end in -ms (masc. and fern.) ill the nom. sing., and have o) retained in all the cases ; Ims omits the aec. ending -v. 2. The future participle is iised to express purpose. 3. Nouns whose stem ends in atr- drop a between two vowels and contract. 4. Verbs expressing emotion take the gen. of cause. 5. ov is not always written next to the verb with which it belongs ; it is often attached to adverbs and interrogative words. 6. After verbs of effort, clauses of purpose take ottcos with the fut. indicative ; the principal verb is often omitted. 7. ojios takes the gen. of value after it. 8. A relative pronoun may be attracted into the case of its ante- cedent, and the antecedent may be incorporated into the relative clause. 4. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Attic 2d' declension, vems and tws, H. 159, 161, 162, a, b; G. 196, 198, 199. 2. . Declension of xepas, H. 181, 183 ; G. 237, 1. 3. Genitive of cause, H. 744 ; G. 1126. 4. Purpose with verbs of effort, H. 886, 886 ; G. 1352-1354. 5. Position of Av, H. 862 ; G. 1299, 2. 6. Attraction and incorporation, H. 994, 995 ; G. 1031, 1037. LESSON LXXXIX. 267 7. Principal parts of /Mixofuw, alveio, H. 510, 11, 604, 4 ; Gr. pp. 391, 372. 8. Review of. the synopsis and the conjugation of the active voice of \vm. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. &f.ti, together, together with. 8. KT&oti.ai, acquire ; 'pert, possess. 2. o ainSpioXos,^ deserter. 9. al fUcrai vvktcs, mid-watches (of 3. Sia-rdTTO), dispose in order, the night), midnight. arrange. 10. irap-aivc'u,' advise, exhort. 4. ij Qixo9ipl,a,, freedom. 11. iroX\air\iS,iri.os, -o, -ov, or -os, -ov, 5. ciiSai|iov(J(i>,^ deem happy, con- many times as much. gratulate. 12. irpo, take in addition. 6. ij 4'«s, dawn. 13. ir»s, how f 7 . TO K^pas,° horn ; wing (of an army) . 6. EXERCISES. I. Classification of the verbs in § 1. II. For Oral Translation: 1. The king will come to fight with (i.e., against) Cyrus. 2. Menon's soldiers will come in company with Cyrus. 3. Cyrus will come with (= having) soldiers. 4. The deserters came at daybreak. 5. The king came on the following day. 6. The king will come by night (gen.; why?). 7. The king was marching during the night. 8. If the king should consult with his soldiers, they would fight. 9. You are braver and stronger than others. 10. Be men worthy of your generals. 11. Cyrus chose freedom instead of all things which he had (imp.). III. For Written Translation : 1. Since ( = en-et) all thought (it seemed to all) that the king would fight on the following day (dat.), a review was made about midnight. 2. Clearchus led the right wing, but Menon the left. 3. The soldiers of Cyrus were arranged by himself. 4. After this the generals deliberated how they Tvould join battle (=make the battle), if the great king should fight. 5. For it was reported that (us or on) he was calling together (pres. opt.; why?) his soldiers to come (fut. parte.) at daybreak. 6. And Cyrus said: "I am not in want of allies (case ?). 7. See to it- that ^ From avTo;, setf, and the theme moA, to go. ^ Cf. eit&aittiav. 5 Cf. Eng. rhmO'Ceros, having a horn on the noee. * Cf. ew-an'cw Chap. III. § 7. 268 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. you enter (=go into) the battle as brave men. 8 If you should. choose freedom you would have all things." 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Attic 2d declension. 2. Neuters in no--. 3. Declension of ems. 4. Construction of ij/xep^ § 2. 5. Comparison of ap-dvovi. 6. ottms with the fut. indie. 7. Optatives in this lesson. 8. Ways of ex- pressing purpose. 9. Genitives in the lesson. 10. Time: ace, gen., dat. 11. Position of av. 12. Incorporation and attraction. 13. Infinitives in indirect discourse. 14. yap explanatory. 15. Locate the verbs in § 1. LESSON XC. 1. TEXT. Anab. I. vir. 4-6, 'Ottcos . . . <^iA.ot. 2. NOTES. § 4. 6l8*iTe : mode ? why ? &y&va -. distinguish between ayutv- and aywv. €l8(Ss: sc. what? -ydp: explanatory of the preceding state- ment ; omit in translation. irXii6os : sc. ia-n. KpavYti = dat. of man- ner. lirCdo-iv : plu. referring to the collective noun ttX^Oos. dv : = iav. Tofira: the multitude and their shouting. avd; if you endure this, to oXXo : ace. of specification. koC : even. ol'ovs . . . Avflp(4irovs : the sort of men that, ijiiiiv : translate with wtos as dat. of poss., we have; for another construction for -^/uv ct. H. 770; G. 1171. dvepv : if my affairs ( = expedition) turn out well, iym vnSv : emphatic by juxtaposition. dirUvai: depends on P(yv\6fi.tvov. rots otKoi : masc. ; ' for construction cf. H. 771 ; G. 1172. direXBrtv : depends on ttoi^o-o); its subj. is tov . . . ^ovXoixevov. iroXXoVis: sepa- rated from cXeo-dai for emphasis, iroi^o-civ : subj. is the same as that of the principal verb, rd : the {things) ; substantive omitted. tSv otKoi : neut. ; construction ? § 5. irap(&v: translate as a rel. clause. xaX ftiiv: lit. ctnd in truth; translate, " Fes, biit." ijirio-^vei; in what person is the verb? Sid t<5 LES80IJ XC. 269 . . . etvai : lit. On account of the being, i.e., because you are. kv roiovTip : at such a (crisis). kivSvvov: partitive gen. n: refers indefinitely to the expedition of Cyrus; cf. "matters," in the Eng. if matters tvm out well, ou iiEiiv^o-co-eai : indir. disc. ; f ut. perf . with fut. meaning ; IxifLvqiuu., the perf. of lufivija-ko}, = I remember ; ov, also ov8' following, with inlin. because the infin. takes the same neg. in the indir. disc, as in the direct, H. 1024 ; G. 1611. Kote that ao-t takes the infin. construction in indirect disc. ; Xeyouo-t usually takes on or r)|i.c takes the infinitive construction after it ; Xeyco usually a clause with on or ojs, except when passive. 3. |i^|tvii|iai, from fUfivrja-KO), = I remember. 4. The infinitive takes av when it represents a finite mode with av. 5. The article is often used with adverbs and phrases without a substantive. 6. T£e infinitive with a neuter article is a substantive. 7. The dative may denote one in whose view, or in relation to whom, something is true. 8. -ydp explanatory = Eng. viz., i.e. 4. GBAMMAB LESSON. 1. |U|iv»|K.ai, H. 365, b, 465, a, 466, b; G. 525, 704, 734. 2. Principal parts of alpia, ^ovXofmi, fuix.vqtTKm, H. 539, 1, 610, 4, 530, 6; G. pp. 372, 377, 392. 3. Synopsis and conjugation of the middle and passive of \vu>. 270 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. a.v-i\a, hold up, endure. 8. ■r\fx is the subjunctive in a question as to what may be done with propriety or advantage, called the deliberative or interrogative subjunctive; as a rule only the first person of the subjunctive is thus used, cf. Gram. . Lesson. av tv •yivTiToi : cf. § 5. iKavovs : SC. <^L\ov%. t«v 'EXX^vuv : appositive. Ko£: also; in addition to other gifts. § 8. 01 8^: hvt they, i.e., generals and captains. icoKi: = ttoAAcS. elo-flo-ov: note the force of the imperf., kept going into, etc. nvfe: why does the enclitic have an accent? H. 116; G. 143, 2. t£: why not Ti ? C(ri.v : dat. of poss. : what they should have : the direct discourse was rt ij/xtv lo-Tai, eav KpaTrjcrm/iev. 7V(4|i.ijv : eaypectation, mind. § 9. aircp : Construction ? |jidx« : why 272 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. not Tm TovTi^ Ktttpcj? oJti: fr. diofmi-, 2d sing. . y&p: why; expresses surprise. s dStX+ds : a brother of mips, predicate. Tovra : of. TOVTUiV § 7. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. The subjunctive of the 1st person is used in questions of deliberation as to what may be done with propriety or advantage. Such questions, in indirect discourse after a principal (primary) tense, retain the subjunctive, but an interrogative pronoun becomes indefinite relative. 2. Mv ; Eng. (those) of the enemy (who deserted), etc.; note the difference between ex and Trapd with the. gen. tSv ira\c|i,(uv : part. gen. TOuTa : = rot avTo, ; ravra means what ? 3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Conjugation of the perf. mid. and aor. pass, of dAXao-tru, H. 328 ; G. 487, 2. 2. Conjugation and synopses of the present system of TlpAia, 3. Principal parts of alcrOdvopai., Svvapxu, iKviop^i, H. 522, 1; 535, 5; 524,2; G. pp. 372, 380,386. 4. Formation of the perfect stem, H. 446-452; G. 682-684, 687, 688; 692. 4. VOCABULARY. 1. avTO|xoX^(a,^ desert. 4. claKurx^Xioi, six thousand. 2. 8pEiravii-<|>epbi, s Cf. Kpiniia. ' Derivation ? LESSON XCIII. 275 had marshaled in front of the king himself. 3. Each general led thirty myriads. 4. A hundred chariots were present in battle. 5. The hoplites of Abrocomas arrived three days afterwards. 6. And some (note the Greek order) of the soldiers of Tissaphernes, who had been taken after the battle, reported these same (things). 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Declension of numerals. 2. Cases after fieTa. 3. Construc- tion of ■^ixipaii. 4. oiA.A.01 in § 11. 5. Construction after va-repiia. 6. Comparison of vcrrepos. 7. Ik, airo, irapa, with the gen. 8. reray- fiivot ^a-av. 9. mv in § 11. 10. do-Tris in § 10 : meaning, stem, declen- sion ? 11. Principal parts of the verbs in this lesson. 12. Locate the verbs in this lesson. LESSON XCIII. 1. TEXT. AnAB. I. VII. 14-17, 'EvT€v0tv . . . iroAAo. 2. NOTES. § 14. v^ 2. NOTES. § 18. KaX^o-ds : translate as if indicative, t^ .• . . i]Vp^^ : ten days before. iKtlvxfs : why fem. ? e«a|ievos : note the mid. force, for himself, i.e., with a view to taking the omens. ttwev : = Eng. pluperfect. oTi : = Eng. quotation marks with the direct discourse. iJiJifpuv : gen. of time within which, in -. at all. jioxtiTai : H. 899 ; G. 1406. ov: H. 1021, 1028; G. 1383. iropiiXeov: had passed by, were up. at S^Ka ijii^pai : restrictive art., those mentioned above. § 19. 8ioPotv«iv: from crossing. eSogt . . . Kvpio: Cyrus thought. &.ir-iyvaK4va\. : sc. avrov : had decided not, had given up the thought 278 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. of; 6x6 with a neg. force, cf. airmjirj^itflixai. Ghap. IV. § 16. to« iidx«is,^ carelessly. 2. 6 'A}iirpaKid)n\9, A mbraciot.^ 8. d \i&vt\,9, seer, soothsayer. 3. dva-rapdrTu, stir up, confuse. 9. i] iropetd,* Journey. 4. diro-7i7V(5(rKl dYopav irX'^Oovo-av : about full market {time), cf. Eng. early-candle-light, from 10 to 12 a.m. ir\T|irCav: adv. o-Ta6|ji6s : Station, halting -place. tvBa: where, i.e., (the place) where. 'iv.HO^i : sc. KSpos. KaroXveiv : halt, dv^p : omit in translation. t»v . . . wio-tov: {one) of the faithful, etc., part. gen. 'rrpoaCvETai : appears forth, comes in sight, dvd Kpdros : at full speed, lit. up to {the full measure of) strength. l!irir

to the 10. ijyfKU, when; like the Lat. cum full measure of strength, e.g., (jnuersitm) with the indie. at full speed. 11. ihp6a, sweat, perspire. 2. araKTos, -ov,* o«/ of order, 12. d 6i&pa|, -okos,' breastplate^ disorderly. 13. KaTa-irrjSdu,^ leap down. 3. airCxa, immediately. 14. to Kpdros, -ovs, power, strength. 4. PappapiKus, barbarously ; in the See dva above. Persian tongue. 15. (ieWu, 6e about, intend. 5. Poda, sAoui or ccy ou<. 16. irX'^Su, ie/uZ2; dYopa ir\^6ovo-a, 6. cWt|vikus, in the Greek fashion full market, i.e., 10-12 a.m. or tongue. 17. ir\r)(rCov, near. 7. 4v-8««i, enier into; jDMi on. 18. irpo-it>aCva>, show forth ; mid. a/)- 8. 4iri-irfirT(«,yaZi upon. pear insight. 9. l£-oir\(||(a,' arm completely. 19. d rdpaxos,^ con/uston. 5. EXERCISES I. Complete synopsis of ayyiXXm. II. For Oral Translation : 1. A certain one (position ?) of the followers (= the ones with, or about) of Cyrus fell in with (= hap- pened upon) the king. 2. He kept shouting: "The enemy will come prepared for battle. 3. The king will attack (= fall upon) us in disorder, and the confusion will be great." 4. The soldiers leaped down from the chariots and put on their breastplates. 5. Each general armed himself completely. 6. The right wing was near the river. 7. Menon and his army were next to this (wing). 8. The horsemen were riding at full speed with their horses sweating. 9. We shall mount (aor. parte.) our horses (and) take our javelins in our hands. III. Tor Written Translation: 1. When they were near where they intended to halt, a man came running at full speed. 2. And 1 Derivation 1 = Of. ef oirXurii Chap. VII. § 10. s Hence Eng. thorax. * Cf. Chap. V. § 8. ^ Cf. ai/a-TapaTTw. 282 IXDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. he shouted to every one that the king was coming up as if, to fight (fut. parte.). 3. All the generals mounted (parte.) their horses and took their javelins in their hands, and afterwards (uortpov) each one took his place in his own line. 4. Clearchus, Proxenus, and' Menon occupied the right wing, but the others were next ( = were holding on to). 5. If we meet (subj.) the king, he will fall upon us in disorder. 6. The men said that the king would fall upon them in disorder. 6. TOPICS FOE STUDY. 1. Declension- of Kparos. 2. Eeduplication of verbs beginning with two consonants. 3. Declension of xepas. 4. lurd with ace. ; with the genitive. 5. Verbs of taking hold of take what case ? 6. Prin- cipa,l parts of all the verbs in this lesson. 7. 2d aorists. 8. The direct middle. 9. Construction of ta\ais : construction ? § 7. oi ]ur6, : why ot ? 1 The G-reek Bays, Clearchue find Proxenus and Menon, or else omits all connectives. LESSON XOVI. 283 § 8. |U(rov i]|i^pds: midday, noon; what is the Greek for midnight ? itl\r\: afternoon, here early in the afternoon, from 12 to 2 p.m. xp*** '■ why dat. ? (wXavtd ns: a sort of blackness, i.e., a kind of blaok cloud; of. H. 702. M iro\i: for a great distance, far and wide. xaXKiis Tis : bronze here and there; referring to the flashing of armor and weapons. 7{a-Tpa.irrt : note the force of the imperfect, repeated action, rdjeis : divisions, corps. 3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Conjugation of the present systems of TiOr/fu, SiSmfu, io-tj^jhi, SilKVVfU. 2. Principal parts of Krava, rdvut, rpix, -lira or -lu, put on heavy armor; arm. 5. EXERCISES. I. Decline /idxaipa, /leXavid, 0(apa$, Sd\.ri, KaracjiavTJi. II. For Oral Translation : 1. The soldiers were taking their places in battle. 2. All the Persians used to have their heads ' Kara has the sense of. thoroughness, as in nvrajriiiieie^ii) Chap. II. § 2. ' Cf. Eng. me2an-choly. = From vp6 and arepvov, sternum, the breast bone. * Hence x<^i">us Chap. II. § 16. 284 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. unprotected in battle. 3. Every cavalry-man with. Cyrus had. a swoxd. 4. About midday, about midnight, about afternoon. 5. The soldiers were seen for a great distance. 6. And considerably later white clouds were distinctly visible. 7. When the army was much nearer, the rest of the barbarians appeared. III. For Written Translation : 1. Cyrus armed his. horsemen with breastplates and helmets. 2. But he himself used to incur danger (imperfect) with unprotected head. -3. And it was also said that the Greek horses had frontlets. 4. Not long after midday (later than midday by not much time) the great king appeared on the plain. 5. But he was not yet distinctly visible. 6. However, in the evening (gen. of time within which), when he came nearer, the line of battle was visible. 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. fiev and 8c. 2. About with numerals. 3. to SXXo, SXXo. 4. Com- parison of adverbs. 5. Final a in the first declension. 6. Compari- son of Karaijsavijs. 7. Peculiar meanings for Tts. 8. rdxa, raxeois. 9. vir in wapxos. 10. 1st decl. nouns in the lesson. LESSON XCVII. 1. TEXT. AnAB. I. VIII. 9-12, KOI . TZiirovifTax. 2. NOTES. § 9. ■^a-a.v: there were. Ti(rira<|>^pvi)s . . . apxciv: no connective; parenthetical and explanatory, toiituv: why gen.? £x<'|ievoi: next, cf. § 4. At-yviimoi: pred. after etvai; why nom. ? Kara eflvri: nation by nation, to t'Bvos: partitive apposition to ovtoi. iitopiitro: at- tracted to the sing, to agree with tOvos because nearest the verb. § 10. apiiara: sc. ^v or ^mv? o-uxv6v: acc. of extent of space. ctxov: the singular number would be regular. ets irXdviov: side- wise. airoTCTa|x{va : fr. airoTcivm. us : = (ucttc, H. 1054, f . ; G. 1456 ; purpose is expressed here, cf . H. 963, a ; G. 1462. oViji : fr. oo-ns ; construction? kvruy\&voi,tv: cf. eix""! °P*- ^^ ^ general conditional LESSON XCVII. 285 rel. clause of p3.st time. yvi\ir\ -. expectation, intention. as i\avra Kal SiaK6i|/ovTa : SC. ra 8peTravr)6pa apfwra, acc. abs., that they would drive into, etc., H. 973, 974 ; G. 1569, 1570. § 11., o: antecedent is tovto following; Eng. order: K5/jos iil/evtrOt) TOVTO o elirev. toOto : construction ? us avucTTdv : = (ik SwaTov. § 12. rovrif-. SC. xpovio. i^a : note the force of the imperfect. ttt) : opt. in indirect disc. toSt" : i.e., t6 /xotov. lav viKMnc : form of cond. ? i]|itv : dat. of agent. irtiro£t|Toi : perf. to express the fact as already accomplished ; more vivid than the future ; H. 848 ; G-. 1264. 3. GEAMMAE LESSON. 1. Declension of o(ttk, H. 280 and a ; G. 426. 2. Conjugation of trj/u, pres. and 2d aor. systems. 3. Principal parts of ySXtVoj, (TTrao), H. 508, 8, 503, 4; G. pp. 377, 400. 4. VOCABULAEY. 1. avvirT69,-6v, praeiicable, possible. 9. to Spbravov, scythe. 2. 6 a£(i)v, -ovos, axle. 10. to e'flvos,^ tribe, nation. 3. i,v:o-rtlvpo$, chariot (seat). 18. ij a-v^i\, silence. 5. BXBBCISES. I. For Oral Translation : 1. The entire army was proceeding nation by nation. 2. Each square was full of bowmen (case ? why?). 3. In front of the army the soldiers were driving the chariots into the enemy. 4. Cyrus had urged the soldiers not to be deceived by the enemy. 5. For he said that they would advance (indir. disc, for " will advance ") silently and slowly. 6. All things have been done by the king, — for the king. 7. All things 1 Of. Eag, e/Ano-logy. ^ Cf. Eng. iso-sceles, iso-thernaic, 3 Derivation ? 28G INDUCTIVE GREEK PRUVlEll. will be done by {vn-6) the king. 8. If we lead the army against (cTTi; ease?) the king, we shall conquer. II. For Written Translation: 1. Tissaphernes was leading the horsemen who wore white breastplates (attrib. adj.). 2. The Egyptians were next to him (gen. ; why ?) . 3. Each general was said to have his hoplites in a square. 4. And in front of the army there were scythe-bearing chariots. 5. For the thought was that the scythes would cut to pieces whomsoever they met. 6. The Greeks, how- ever, were deceived in respect to this. 7. For Cyrus had said that the barbarians would advance with a shout. 8. Cyrus shouted to the generals as follows: 9. "Lead the army against (cirt) the king himself. 10. For if he is (= be) conquered, all things wiUbe done for us." 6. TOPICS POE STUDY. 1. Uses of SXXo °^- H- 885, b ; G. 1374. § 14. d|i,a\a$ : = iv lam § 11. rd7io: omens from the movements of the animals slain; xaXa . . . xaXo, emphatic repeti- tion; sc. etij, opt. of indir. disc. 3. OBSERVATIONS. 1. dKo, Kptva, tpofuu H. 510, 10, 519, 2, 508, 14; G. pp. 381, 383, 389. 3. First declension. 288 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 5. VOCABULARY. 1. &iro-^\iira, look off ov away. 7. KVK\6a,^ encircle, surround. 2. diro-o-irdo), -&d7iov, sacrificial victim ; 6. ^ KaTa-6cdo|iai, view, look down ^\vi. omens from sacrifice. upon or watch intently. 6. EXERCISES. I. For Oral Translation: 1. Clearchus feared that the Greeks would he surrounded, if he should draw off the rfght wing from the river. 2. Take care, Clearchus, that all shall be well. 3. The enemy beheld Cyrus riding by near to his own army — near to the same army. 4. When Xenophon met (parte.) Cyrus (dat. ; why?) he asked him as follows: 5. "Shall I carry (subj.) any message to the army ? " II. For Written Translation : 1. But Clearchus had heard from the interpreter that the king's army was so much superior in num- ber that his own men (= the men of himself) were beyond the left wing of the Greeks. 2. But nevertheless he replied to Cyrus : 3. " I wiU take care that all shall be well." 4. Although the bar- barians were advancing (gen. abs.), the Greeks still remained in the same place. 5. When Cyrus saw Xenophon riding by, he stopped his horse and told him to report to the army that every- thing was favorable. 7. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Translation of circumstantial participles. 2. The adverbial endings -o-t, -8e, -Osv. 3. cos with the infinitive. 4. i^i after tjio^oi- /itvos. 5. Cases after oKoiut. 6. Optatives in the lesson. 7. o-rds, (TTijO'di. 8. /ie\c( avTiS. * Derivation? =* irept- as in irepi-yiyvofiat. LESSON XCIX. 289 LESSON XCIX. 1. TEXT. AnAB. 1. A'lII. 16-18, Tavra . . . iTnrot?. a. NOTES. § 16. kiyav : why not Xc^as or eiirciv ? BopvPov : why gen. ? cf . § 13. ttij : why opt. ? oTi = " ". SeviTepov : adverbial: koL OS : = and he, H. 275, b; G. 1023, 2. rfe ■iropo^-y^XXa : direct form of thought; se. TO (TvvOrjim. o ti : for tC of the direct question, H. 700 ; G. 1013. § 17. "AXXA : of. Chap. VII. § 6 ; Well (" though I did not give this watchword"), I accept it, H. 1046, 2, b. toOto 4', run. 3. SExojiai, receive, accept. 12. o OdpvPos, noise, uproar. 4. Si-^x^i Jtave between; be apart, 13. otov, adv., as, Just as. separated or distant. 14. iraiavC^ai, sing a paean or war- 5. to 8dpu, spear-shaft, spear. song. 6. Sovir^u, make a.din, clash. 15. to o-vv6iip.a, compact; watch- 7. £K-Kv)iaCv(<>, bend out (or forth) word, password. like a wave. 16. o o-wT^jp, savior. 8. l\cX($u, raise a war-cry. 17. (|>64770|i.ai, shout, cry out. ISO. GE. PR. — 19 290 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 5. BXEBCISBS. I. For Oral Translation : 1. What is the noise ? 2. What is the watchword? 3. Cyrus heard the watchword from Xenophon (cf. § 13). 4. When Cyrus was no longer a stadion distant from the army, the Greeks went against the enemy. 5. Cyrus's army will begin to go against the king. 6. The phalanx ran, and at the same time every one shouted. II. For Written Translation: 1. When Cyrus heard (parte.) the noise, the soldiers said to him: 2. "The watchword is victory." 3. And Cyrus, on hearing it, rode back to meet his own (iavTov) generals. 4. But the army was beginning to go to meet ( = against) the barbarian force. 5. As^ some of the men wavered out (of line), the rest began to run. 6. It is also said that they frightened (cf. § 18) the horses by making a noise with their spears. 6. TOPICS FOB STUDY. 1. Meaning of the aor. parte; of the present. 2. koI os, 6 Si. 3. The ending -rrjv. 4. aXka, and yap in answers. 5. Optatives. 6. Principal parts of verbs in the lesson. 7. 5 n and tC in questions. 8. Adjectives which take the dative. 9. Construction of 8po/j,a>, do-irto-t. 10; oTi introducing direct discourse. 11. Classification of the verbs in tbe lesson. LESSON O. 1. TEXT. AilAB. I. VIII. 19-21, irpCv (TTparfvitartK. 2. NOTES. § !19. irptv . . . IJiKveto-Oai : cf. Chap. IV. § 13 trpiv S^Xov eivai. kcwoI KpeiTos : cf. dm KpaTos Chap. VIII. § 1. f 20. k^ipovro : sing, number would be regular, to |Uv . . . rd 8^ : some . . . otJiers, partly . . . partly, partitive apposition, xcvd ijviixav : 1 In connected discourse G-reek sentences usually begin with a conjunction, while English sentences (e.g.* this one) do not. LESSON C. 291 cf. v/xSiv epijtio's Chap. III. § 6. 01 8' : i.e., the Greeks. irpotSouv : sc. TO. apfiara; H. 914, B ; G. 1431. la-n oVtis : SOme One, cf. rji' . . . v ovi . . . ■^Xavvcv Chap. V. § 7. ^KirXaYcCs : cf . crraXek from icrTaXrjV. oiiiv . . . ou8^ : not even this one suffered anything. o68' oiXXos oiSels ou8^v: and nobody else . . . suffered anything ; accumulation of nega- tives to strengthen the negation, H. 1030 ; G. 1619. irX^iv : some- times governs what case ? §21. dpflv: temporal, w/iew, etc. viKuvras: suppl. parte, that . . . had conquered. t6 : so. /xc/sos. Ka9' avrous : opposite themselves. i)S6|i,€vos Kal irpo(rKuvov)ji€vos : concessive, aZi/(oitgi/j 7ie was, etc. «s: note the accent ; thus, cf . tog. iroi'^irci. : direct form. Kal ^op : and (and this was reasonable) for. airov: prolepsis or anticipation; we should expect avrov to be the subject of e^ot; cf. Matthew xxv. 24, " I knew thee that thou art a hard man." 4'xoi : why opt. ? 3. GBAMMAR LESSON. 1. ?(7w or, H. 998 ; G. 1029. 2. Principal parts of hroimi, olSa, H. 608, 13, 491 ; G. pp. 383, 183. 3. The third declension. 4. VOOABULAEY. 1. cK-KXtvu, bend out of line ; give 6. d lir7rdSpo|ios, race-course. way. 7. K€vd$, -<), -6v, empty. 2. iK-irX'/iTTa), strike out of one's 8. irpo-opdu, see in front. senses, dismay. 9. (rv-o-ireipAu, coil together, gather 3. Il-dyci), lead out, carry away. together. 4. 4|-iKK^o|iai, arrive at, reach. 10. to Ta- Xta-T&Tta: in (the) safest (place), i.e. most safe, dvax: subj. why omitted? indir. for ecr/AeV. riv ^: gen. cond. for present time, H. 894, 1; G. 1393, 1. airfiv: with ia-)^i. (i: why accented? XPtiVev: why opt.? H. 900; G. 1408. av: -with aia-ddvea-Oat; indirect disc, for the opt. with av, H. 964, a ; G. 1418. \p6via : construction ? § 23. «xv : concessive, as o/aws shows, tju : with xepaTos ; xepcos means what ? aiT

9Tiirov : except that .... were left behind. o-xcS6v : adv. 3. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Principal parts of Tpiirw, H. 608, 28 ; G. p. 403. 2. Declension of adjectives of the vowel- and consonant-declen- sions. 4. VOCABULARY. 1. do-(|>aX^s, -^s, safe; Iv aar()>a\ct, 6. ij lirxis, might, strength. in a safe place. 7. Kara-XeCiru, leave behind. 2. Sia-o-ircCpu, scatter seed broad- 8. ij kukXaktis, surrounding; cts Kii- cast ; pass, (of an army), icKaa-iv, in order to swround. become separated. 9. d ditorpdire^os, table-companion. 3. tjiirpoa-Siv, in front. 10. a-\iS6v, almost, chiefly. 4. liri-Kii|i,irT(i>, bend upon; bend 11. to^cvu, shoot with a bow, strike the wings of an army upon, loiih an arrow. or towards, the center, i.e., 12. rpe'irw, turn. together. 13. ij rpoir^i, a turning, rout. 5. T||u, half. 14. ij <)>u'y^, flight. 5. EXERCISES. I. For Oral Translation : 1. If the commanders occupy (subj.) the center of their own armies, they are most secure. 2. For if they should give any commands, the soldiers would learn (it). 3. The soldiers are in front of their commanders. 4. No one will fight against the king. 5. But many men will fight in company with him. 6. The soldiers feared tliat the enemy would cut them to pieces. 7. Therefore they attacked (parte.) and killed three hundred (men). 8. The three hundred had been drawn up before the king. 9. Those who were left behind about Cyrus were called table-companions. II. For Written Translation : 1. If the commanders should occupy the center, thus they would be safe. 2. If (ever) they desire to give any word of command, the soldiers (always) learn (it). 294 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 3. At that time, certainly (=81;), the king's army extended beyond the Greeks' left wing, so that no one fought with him. 4. Here now Cyrus feared that the king would wheel about (parte.) and attack him. 6. Cyrus, therefore, attacked and put the king to flight. 6. It is also said that Artagerses himself was killed (fr. aTrodv^a-Kco) by Cyrus. 7. Accordingly the six hundred set out in (= into) pur- suit and left very few about Cyrus himself. 6. TOPICS FOR STUDY. 1. Conditional sentences. 2. Other ways of expressing conditions. 3. Indirect discourse. 4. The optative and infinitive in indirect discourse. 5. Modes after words of fearing. 6. Uses of i/.i^. 7. Infinitive as substantive. 8. Uses of ttXt^v. 9. Principal parts of the verbs in the lesson. LESSON Oil. 1. TEXT. AnAB. I. VIII. 26-29, arSv . . . mtTTOTrjTa. 2. NOTES. § 26. av : what kind of parte. ? expresses what ? ekcivov : stronger than aiTov, but translate as if avrov. i)v-^o-x«to: from av-exto; note the two augments in this compound verb ; av augmented to r/v, and e after the preposition, H. 361, a; G. 544; lit. he did not hold (him- self) back, could not control himself. Tdv avSpo: whom? why' the article ? itn -. rushed, lit. threw himself. eV avrov : differs how from irpos avTov, Trap aiiTov ? ois : why accented ? as. avTo's : agrees with the subj. of loidOai. ; why nom. ? § 27. iroCovTo I striking whom ? Jir6 : with the ace. because after implied motion, otherwise the dat. would be used. |i.ax6|ji6voi : trans- late as if in the gen. abs. with ySao-iXevs, Kvpos, 01 d/u.<^' awrous, while . . . were fighting ; there is a break in the sentence so that the nom- inatives have no verb, diroo-oi . . . pao-iXed : contrasted with KBpos M. oKTio 01 apio-Toi : eight (of) , etc. ; apia-Toi. refers to rank, ckcivto : lay (sc. dead). LESSON cn. 295 § 28. oirif : with the adj. irtirrwKbTo : what kind of parte. ? cf . Chap. II. § 21, exovTa. ircpiirEo-civ : embraced, avnp : government ? § 29. 01 |i^v . . . 01 8e : Some . . . others. Evp

6(iX|i,ds, eye. 2. piaios, -a, -ov, powerful; adv. 12. iraCu, strike. -o)S, powerfully, violently. 13. irepi-irtirru, fall around, embrace. 3. Exdrcpos, -a, -ov, eacA (of two). 14. iftirra, fall. 4. 4iri-o-4>dTTii>, slay upon or over. 15. ij irio-TdxTis, faithfulness. 5. ij evvoia, ^ooc{ wi22, devotion. 16. irirdu, draw. 6. d Ocpdiruv, attendant, servant. 17. to trripvov, breast. 7. tdoftai, dress or Aea/ (a wound). 18. Tirpi&o-Ku, wound. 8. d tdrpds, physician. 19. to Tpavjia, a wound. 9. Ka6-opd«, 2oo& op^<'i wear. 6. EXERCISES. I. For Oral Translation: 1. Cyrus said that he saw the king, H. 946, b ; G. 1523. 2. I am rushing against the king. 3. Ctesias healed the wound. 4. While Cyrus was striking (parte.) the king, he was hit violently under the eye. 5. The attendants of the king fight for ( = in behalf of) him. 6. Cyrus was lying dead upon his bravest men. 7. The attendants are said to have leaped down from their horses. 8. A certain one is ordered to kill Artapates, a 296 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. faithful attendant of Cyrus, on account of his fidelity. 9. But he (=0 Se) drew (parte.) his dagger and killed himself. II. For Written Translation : 1. When Cyrus in company with his table-companions saw the king, he immediately (eiflu's) rushed against him. 2. And the king's, physician declares that Cyrus wounded the king through the breastplate. 3. And here both Cyrus and the king fought with each other. 4. Cyrus was slain together with the noblest Persians. 5. The scepter-bearers of Cyrus embraced him after he had fallen. 6. But it is said that the king ordered them to be killed. 7. For Cyrus had honored them because of their good will. 7. TOPICS FOB STUDY. 1. Circumstantial and supplementary participles. 2. Declension of oTic^os, avSpa, Tpavfi,aL, Tna-TOTrji. 3. Comparison of the adjectives and adverbs in this lesson. 4. Meanings and position of awos. 5. TaXXa., (US (^lytrt, avTos te. 6. Construction of. the genitives and datives in the lesson. 7. The most common way of expressing agency in Greek. 8. Enclitics and proclitics in the lesson. 9. Posi- tion of Si, yap, o5i/. 10. Synopsis of tiy/xt in the act. and mid. present system. 11. First aorists in k. 12. Uses of /x,eV and Se. LESSON cm. -REVIEW. 1. TEXT. Anab. I. VII.-VIII. 2. GRAMMAR LESSON. 1. Declension. — (a) Short a in the 1st decl. ; (6) Attic 2d decl., V£(OS, eWS ; (c) Kipal ; (d) OUTLi. 2. Verbs. — (a) Formation of the perfect ; (6) Attic reduplication; (c) augment of the plup. ; (d) formation of the perf. and plup. mid. (pass.); (e) perf. mid. and aor. pass, systems: TeriXi&iMxi, icrraXixaL, 7re'<^(io'/u.at, ■TrtVcicr/u.at, epplju/uai (Gr. Terp'iiXfiai), ■^Way/uii, eX^- kcyfjmi; (/) tuT-qv, thvv', {g) _fie/x,vj;/Aat ; (h) rjiiai; (i) 2d aor. of the px- form ; {j) Kelpai. 3. Syntax. — (a) Gen. of cause; (6) gen. with comp. verbs; (c) subjunctive of deliberation ; (d) clauses after verbs of fearing ; LESSON om. 297 (e) purpose with verbs of effort; (/) position of ov; (g) attrac- tion and incorporation ; (h) ia-nv oL 4. Principal parts. — 1> / . aivEO). 2. alp€(o. 3. aiaOavo/juu. 4. ^aCvia. 5. ^dWm. 6. ySXcTTO). 7. /3ov\.ofi,ai. 8. Sixo/juxi. 9. Bwa/ua. 10. ieiXu. 11. eXawo). 12. tirofuu. 1. o a^a)v. 2. ■^ apKTOi. 3. o aiTO/xoA.os. 4. TO l3a.6oi. 5. 6 yeppo^opiK. 6. ij SetA.?;. 7. ij Simpvi. 8. TO Sopu. 9. TO SptTTavov. 10. TO tOvoi. 11. '^ i\ev6ipia. 12. o 'EviiaXios. 13. ij i^oirXuria. 14. TO cpvpa. 15. ^ evvoia. 16. 1} lo>s. 17. o Zeus. 18. 6 ijvioxos. 19. 6 Oepdiriav- 20. o Oopvfioi. 21. 6 Oiapa.^. 22. JaT/odj. 13. fpo/juu. 14. Seo). 16. iKveopai. 16. Kpivo. 17. KTeivta. 18. fiaxopju. 19. jiteWb). 20. jae\o). 21. fUnvrj(TKm. 22. o?8a. 23. iraMi). 24. 5ra(7)(ci). 3. VOCABULARY. NOUNS. 23. o (TTTrdSpo/uos. 24. i; icrxi5s. 25. o Kaipos. 26. TO Kavpa. 27. TO Kepai. 28. 6 Kii/Sufo;. 29. 6 KOVtOpTOS. 30. TO KpWTOi. 31. ■^ Ki5icX(i)a'ts. 32. ij Adyxij. 33. o joavTts. 34. ij juaxatpa. 35. 1^ p,f.\avLO- 36. ai p.io'iu vvKTei. 37. •^ p.€a.yiov. 55. o (Turrrip. 56. TO ToAaVTOI/. 57. 6 Tiipa)(Oi. 58. IJ Td^p(K. 59. TO To^svpa. 60. TO Tpavpa. 61. ij Tpoin^. 62. ij (j>vyTJ. 63. 6 x^t^KOs. 64. 6 '}{e.ifi.mv. 298 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 1. aKOvri^w. 2. aX-qOevd). 3. ava-TapoTTOi. 4. dv-e'xo). 5. oKO-fiXeTrw. 6. anro-yiyvtiXTKU). 7. ano-cnrdui. 8. airo-Tiivm. 9. dorpaTTTO). 10. a{TOju.oA,ea). 11. |8Xeir. hia-crireipo) ■ SoTJTreo). £i. 40. Kara-dedo/jsu. 41. KaTa-Xewro). 42. K^lpoL. 43. Kpario). 44. KTdopai. 45. kdkXow. 46. jucXXo). 47. /jiA.p,vrj(TK. 55. ireXd^cii. 56. irepL-ap.L. 57. ■Kepi-TrlvTo). 58. Trtirra) . 59. irXto). 60. TrXrjOui. 61 . Trpo-Ovo/juu. 62. irpo-opdo). 63. irpotr-XaynySavo). 64. 7rpo-aivOTep(a irap-etvai. (6) 6 (lev ovv vpecr^vTepo'; Trap-mv irvy- Xavc • (7) Kvpov Se |jL£Ta- ir^liireTai diro Trj<; dpx^lS ■^S a.v- t6v (TaTpdiTTiv eiroiT](ri, (8) koX a-Tpanyy/bv Se avrov dir-eSeile irdvTtov (9) 8(roi els KaoTcuXoC -ireSCov ddpoC^ovrai. dva-pdCvei ovu 6 Ku/30s \apd>v TLcra-a€pvT]v 6v ws eiri-pouXe'uoi avra. (13) 6 8e iretGexai /cai (ruX-Xa)JLpdvei Kvpov ws diro-Krevav * ij Se |JiilT>ip 6|-ai-n](ra|ievT) avrov diro-Tr€|iir€i irdXiv -eirl r^v 301 6ir\tTT]S. 302 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 4 ap^tju. (14) 6 8' &)s dTr-TJXOe KivSuv£ti(rds koI dTi|ia- (tOcCs, (15) pouXeveTtti (hrcos [i.TJiroT€ cxi eVrai inl tw dSeX^w, dXXd, t]v SvvriTai, pacriXeiio'ei, dvr. ckcivou. (16) IIapv(raTi<; jxkv hr\ r) fJ'ijTrjp ■inr-TJpX€ tm Kvpo), <|>i\oi)(ra avTov |idX\ov r\ tov /SacnXevovTa ' ApTa^ip^rjv. 5 (17) "Oo-Tis S' d(|>-iKvoTTo riav irapd pao-iXecos wpos avTov voivTaDXaKas ev rats i rdXeo-i ^rap^l7■y€lX€ Toi? ({>povpdpxois eKdo-Tois Xafifidpeiv tlvSpas IleXoTrovj'T^crious on irXeto-xousj Ktti PcXtCittous, ws iin-jSovkevovto^ Ticrcrac^eyavous rais TToXccri. (21) Kai •ydp rjaav ai 'IwvtKai ttoXcis Ttcrcra- (f)€pvov<; TO dpxcilov ck fiaa-LKeco^ S£8op,£vai, xoxe 8e d(|>- €icrTiiK£(rav Trpos Kvyooi' iraaai, irXiiv MiXr/Tou. 7 'Ei' MiXt^tw 8e Ttcrcra^epi'TjS irpo-ai(r96|JL€vos to, auTo, xatiTa /SovXevofievov;, dTTO-crrijvai irpos Kuyaoi', rous fiev air-iKTeive tova(ris ^v avTco TOV adpoit,€Lv (TTpdTevjjLa. 8 (23) Il/jos 8e /SacriXed irfijjLirwv f||iov d8eX(^os wv avTOv hodrjuai. 61 raurds Tas irdXeis pdXXoi' ■^ 'Tt(Taal TOL CTTparevfiaTa Sairav&v ' cStrre oiSkv TJxfleTO avTuiv TTokefiovvTCiv. Kai yap 6 Ku/aos aTT-iirefiTre tou5 yiyvofievov^ SacriJioiis ySacriXet Ik tuv troK^oiv wv Ticraa- ^ipvovt; irvy^avev e^av. AWo 8e (TTpd,T€.vjJi,a avTW crvv-eKeyero iv lieppovrjaa) 9 TT] Kar dvTiir^pds 'A/SvSov rdvSe tov rpdirov. KXeap^bs AaKeSai/xwtos <|)U7ds ^v • (25) tovtco awY-7€v6|jL€vos 6 Kupos Tj-ydaOTi re avTov Kol 8t8ft)crtv avrw |jivpCous SdpeiKovs- o Se Xa^cav to xpi(Tiov a-Tpdrevfia (rvv-i\e^€v am tovtcjv gold daric (actual size). Twv xPIH^Ttov Kot iiToXefieL Ik Keppovqaov dp|Ji(o|iEVOS Tois @pa^l TQis virep 'EWyjcnrovTov olKovai Kal it^ekn Tous EXXr^vas ■ caore Kal -^pyjfjiaTa (ruv-epdWavro avrca eld|j.Evov eXdvSavev auTft) TO (TTpaTevfia. ' ApioTiiTTro^ Se o ©eTraXos |evo9 wi' irvy^avev aura), 10 /cal irieldiLCvos 'Otto twv oIkoi dvTio-TatricoTwv €px«Tai tt/jos rov Kupov Ktti alret avroy eis SktxIXCous ^ivovs koX Tpicov ^r\v&v |ii(r9(5v, ais ourtus TKfi-^ev6^vo% av TOiv avTicna- CTLCJTwu. J^(27) 6 Se Ku/oos SiStacrii' avrw ets TerpaKicrxi- Xlovs /fat «| p.ii)vS)v fitcrdov, /cal Seirai aurou jj%-sm)d(r6ev KaTa-X\)s eis Ilio-tSas jSovXoyotefos (TTpaTevetrGai, «ws irpaYiuiTa irap- eX<5vTcov TcSt' nitriSwi^ t^ eaurou X<^P9'- ^o(^aCveTov Se tov %Tvp6Xiov /cal ^cjKpdjrjv tov 304 INDUCTIVE GREEK PKIMER. 'A^i^aidi', ^evovs ovTauXdTT6iv. cKdXccrc Se /cat Toirs MiXtjtoi' TroXto/o/coui'Tas, /cat tous vydSa? iKeXevo'e avv aurw crTparevecrdaL, •(nro-i)pa Se cir-iiv eirrd cJ^evyiiEVT] irXoCois. (34) Tovtov 8ia-pas ef-eXawet SioL ^pvyioL^ a-raOfiov 6 6va rrapacrayyas 6kt«1> ets KoXop-crcts, ttoXij' olKoviievrjv, evSatixova koI p,eyai\T)v. iv- Tavda e|icivev i^iJLepds ctttci • Kal T]Ke Mivov 6 QerraXos oTrXirds e^wi* ^iXious /cat TreXracrra? irevraKoaiovs, AdXoTras fat Atvtai^as /cat ><-v\ /T ire\TOCrT/is WITH AMAZONIAN SHIELD, kjKwulov<;. 'EvTciiScv.e^eXawet (TTa6p,ov/Ji;yids iroXtv OLKovfiemjv, p.eydXiqv KQX evSaCfiova. evravOa ^Vpq> pacrlXeia ■^v /cat irapdSci- (TOS ju,eyas d^picov dr^pCuv irXripiis, a e/ceivos cGrjpeuev aTTO linroi), oirdTC Yuiivdcai /SouXotro eauroi' re /cat tovs ittttou?. Std pLEcrou Se tov irapaZeiaov pet 6 MaiavS/aos Trora/AO? • at Se in^Y*^ avrou etcrtv e/c twj' ySacrtXetoii' • yDCt Se /cat Sta T175 KeXaivali' TrdXew?. (35) EoTt Se /cat /xeyaXou /SaortXeius ySao-tXeta ei/ 8 KeXati/ais ^pu|i,vd ctti rat? Tnjyai? rou Mapcruou TroTa/ioi) UTTO T^ d/cpowdXet • /5et Se /cat outos Std T17? irdXeo)? /cat e^-pdXXei et? tov MaCavSpov • tov Se Mapavov to eu/ods i(TTLV et/cocri /cat irevre -iroScav- IND. GR. PR. — 20 soe mDlJCTlVE GUEEK PRIMER. 'Evravffa Xc-yerai 'AttoXXwv CK-Setpai Mapcrvdv viKTiCds, koI to 5ep|ia Kpeiidcrai iv tm dvTpcp o6€v at TrqyaL • Sta 8e tovto 6 Trora/iios icaXeirat Mayo- cruois. (36) ivravda Bepifjs, ot€ e/c t'^9 'EWaSos JyTTXY- Bcls T17 lidxil dir-exwpei, Xiyerai olKo6o|Jif)(rai ravToi re TCI ySatriXeta /cal ttji' KeXatvwj/ dK/JOTToXtv. 9 'EvTavda efx,€ive Kvpo? rjiJi.epd<; xpiaKOVxa • Kal -. rJKe KXea/3;^os o AdKeSaijiioi'ios ^vyds ex^** oTXtrds ^iXious /cal 77eXTacfTas ©/aa/cas oKTaKotrCous /cat Toldxds KpfJTa<; SiaKOcrCovs- d)i.a Se Kal Swcris irapiju 6 Svpd- Kovcrios ej^ftJi' orrXiTds TpiaKocriov^, KOL So^aiveTos 6 'ApKtts ej^wv OTrXtTas x^^'ows- fat euravda Kv- ~ pol tov(|>EiX€TO 'Xe77(8es. ANABASIS, BOOK I. CHAP. U. 307- [juLcr6o<; ir\iov rj Tpuaiv firjvwv, kol iroWdKis l(5vT€S iiTL Tois Biiipds dir-']jToi)v. 6 Se IXiriSas Xeycov 81-1176 /cai Si^Xos ^v dvl(D|iEV0S • ov yap rjv Trpos tov Kvpov rpoTTOV i^ovra jxr) diro-SLSdvai. (39) 'Evrau^a dcji-LKveLTai 'Enva^a tj '^ve.wiaio'; "yuvi] 12 TOV KiKiKOiv /SatrtXecDS irapa Kvpov • kol eXeyero Kvpco 8ovuai ^(pijfJiaTa TroWd. rrj 8' ovv (TTparia Tore dire- SftiKC K.vpov\aKrjv Trepl avTrju KiXtxas Kai 'AcTTrej/Sious • i^eyeTO 8e Kai cruy-yei'ea'^at Ku/jov ry Yiikiacrrj. '^vrevdev e^-ekavvei trra^/ious Suo napacrdyyd,^ Se/fa eis 13 ®vp.^pLov, troKiv oiKovp,€V7}v. (41) ivTavffa '^v irapd rrfv 686v KpVjvii 17 M180U KaXovfjLevT] tov ^pvySiv ySatrtXetas, e<^' ^ Xeyerai MiSas 701' ^dTvpov OrjpevcraL o'ivco Kcpdiras avTj]v. 'FiUT€v6ev ef-eXawet crra^/ious 8uo irapaadyya^ Sckcl 14 eis Tv^taeiov, ttoXii' oiKoviiivrjv. evravda ip,€ivev rjixe- pas TpeloiviKOTis Kav KVT]|itSas Kal ras d(nrC8as 17 eK-K€KaXvfi|j,£vas- (43) eireiSTi Se iraz^ras Trap^Xaae, CTTijcras TO apjLia irpb t'^? (|)d\aY'yos fJiiarji;, vefi^as PERSIAN WAR CHARIOT. GREEK WAR CHARIOT. UiyprjTa tov lp|ii]v^a irapa tous a-rpaTrjyoix; twv 'EXXtj- v(ov e/ceXeuo-e irpo-paXecrOai to, oTrXa fcai eiri-xcopTio'ai oXnv Tr]v (fxiX-ayya. ol Se Taura irpo-elirov Tots (TT paTidtTai'i • Kai iirel etrdXuiYle, irpo-^aXoiievoi ra oTrXa £-n-^(rav. ck Se TouTou Oa-TTOv irpo-LovTwv (Tvv Kpau^fj diro tov a-Oro- (idrov 8pd|Jios iyevero rois crTpaTKOTai.^ iirl ras crKT^vas- 18 (44) Twi' Se fiap^dpbiv (|>6pos ttoXus, Kat ')7 Te KiXio-o-a ANABASIS, BOOK I. CHAP. H. 309 i;) €vyev im Tr]<; apfiafid^r^^ koX ol e/c rij? ayopas Kaxa- Xiirdw-es to. oSvia e(f)vyov. ol 8e "RXXrjves avu ■ycXmti CTTt Tas (ricrjua<; ^\9ov. rj Se KiA,tcro-a ISoaicra ttjv \a|jnrp6TiiTa Kol TTfv TOL^iv Tov aTpaTevfiaTO avTW. 21 (46) '¥iVTevdei> iireipcivTo clcr-pdWeiv ets t'^v KiXi/ctav • 7} 8e €l(rpoXT] '^f 68bs d|ia|iT6s opGia Icrxupws kol d|iTixo^vos €lr} Xvivvecrvi to. aKpa, ivel ycrOeTO on to M€v(ovo-Ck€TO. 'Ev Se Tj5 iirepPoX'g Tcav opecDV ry eis to TreSioi' Svo 25 Xdxoi Tov Mevcovo<; (TTparevfiaTO'; dir-acrav dpirdl^ovrds tl KaTa-Koinjvai vtto tov KiXikwi', 01 Se, •inro-Xei<|>9^VTas koX ov hvvap.ivovacrav. irpStTO'i Se KA.eap^os Tovs avrov oTpariwras ipid^exo te^at ■ oi Se ainov re ePaXXov /cat to, ^irol^'u'Yia to, iKcivov, cTrei ap^aiuTO irpo- 2 i'ei'ai,. (53) KXeapxo'S Se Tore )u,ei' |ji,iKp6v i^-i^vy^ firj KaTa-TTCTpwOiivai, i5v elvai. el pev hj) SlKaia iroirjcyta ovk otSa, al- pi]a-o|jLai S' ovv vpas Kal avv vpZv otl av So; ireicropai. Kai oviroTC epei ovSeis ftis eyw "EXXi^vas d'ya'Y*)V et? rows fiap^dpov;, TrpoSou? rous "EXXrjvai; ttjv tcov fiapfidpcov 6 (fiiXlav eiXop-rjiv. (56) dXX' eTrel UjU,ets e/xol ou/c IdiXere /neideaOai, eyw crw v/aiz' e\(/o|Aai koI o ti av Sir] Treicrojuai. ANABASIS, BOOK I. CHAP. III. 313 vo[iit,o) yap vfias ifiol etvai kol TrarpCSa Koi (f>LXovs Kai (rv|i.|JLdxovs, KOL (Tvv v[ilv fiev civ oI|iai elvat ti/aios ottov av w, vfjiwv Se €pT]|ios wv ovk av t/cavos oilfiaL elvai ovf av aCr] napa ^acri- Xea TTopeveadaL ^ir-TJV€trt' (iKrOoSdTtfS- on |i€VTOi dSiKetcrOai vop.it,ei ixf)' ■fjp.av oTSa • (59) wcrre Kal 10 fj-eTa-irefiTTopevov auroG ouk idikta iXdetv, to pev piyi- (TTOv al(rxvv6|i£V0S on o-ilv-oi8a 6|iaDT(j navra h^evapivo^ avTov, eireiTa kol 8e8i«I)S prj Xaj3(ov pe BIki\v eiriOfj wv vopilfiL vtt' ipov rjSLKrjcrdai. ipol ovv So/fet ov^ upa 11 elvai, ripiv Ka0-£v8eiv ou8' diieXeXv -qpcov avTuv, aXXa ^ovXevccrOai. o n XP'H ^oielv iK tovtodv. (60) /cat ews re pevopev avToO (TKeirTeov ju,ot So/cei eLi'at ottoj? d£\os ovBev. 6 o' dvrjp ttoX- \ov jxev d|i,os s opSniei/ re /cat £-iri(rTd|X£6a • /cat yap ouSe noppct) BoKovfjiCv p,oi avTov Ka6-fj(r9ai. axTTe wpa XeyeLv 6 tl Tts yiyvaxTKei apio-Tov eii'at. 13 (61) Taura eiirajv iiravcraTo. e/c Se tovtov dv-C(rTavTO ot jitei' e/c row avrofidrov, ke^ovTe<; d iyiyvcoaKov, ol Se /cat utt' €KeCvov c-yKeXeucrTOi, eirt-Set/cfwre? ota etTj 7} diropCa aveu rrj^ Kvpov yi/w/ATjs /cat jxeveiv /cat ai7tevat. 14 ets Se S17 etire, irpotr-TTOtoiilixevos (nrt'OSeiv ws Ta^iaTo. TTopevecrdai, ets T'^v 'EXXaSa, aTparqyov'i p-ev eXecr^ai aXXous &)S Td)(icrTa, el prj ySouXerat KXeap;^os dir-dYciv • TO, S' eTTiTifSet' dYopdi^eo'Oai — 17 8' dyo/Do. ^i^ ev rw fio-p- ySapt/cw (TTpaTevpaTi — /cat iXCas tt}^ ^ojpas aTT-afet. eai' Se |iti8e ■fjyep.ova StSw, avv-raTTe- adai TTjv Ta-)(i(TT7]v, mpxjiaL Se /cat Trpo-KaTa-XTiv|fO|ji€vous Tct a/cpa, oVws /if^ (|)edopoC|iiiv ai^ TO) r]yep,ovL at oolt] en^cruai, pi] 17/1x09 ayayrj ouev ovK etrrat e|-e\6etv • ^ovXoCprjv 8' av cLkovtos aTTicov Kvpov \a6elv avTov dn-eXdcov • o ov Swarov icmv. dXX' eytu <^i7/At TavTa pev (|>\\]apCas eli^at • (65) So/cei 8e )U,oi avSpas 18 eX^di'Tas tt/oos Kvpoi', oirwes eirtTTjSeiot; criu' K\eap^w epordv iKetvou tC /SovXerat rjplv xprjcrdaL • /cai iav ju.ez' 17 TTjOafis ^ TrapairXTiaCa otairep /cat Trpoadev i^ijTo rots ^euoL<;, ineadai kol rjpa^ /cat jixt) KaKCovs eivai rwt' Trpd- cr^ei' TovTw aCunTai /cat eiriirovcoTepa /cat EiriKivSvvoT^pa, d^toCi' r/ TTeicravTa rjpa^ ayeuv ^ ireKrOiuTa irpo^ ^ikiav d(|>-i,£vai • (66) ovToi yap /cat iiropevoi. av cf>iXoL avTW /cat irp66i)p.oi knoipeda /cat dir-tdi'Tes dcr^aXws oLv aTT- Loip^ev o Tt 8' aj/ TT/aos ravra Xeyij dir-a'YYeXXai Sevpo ■ ■jJ/Acts 8' d/coucrai'Tas 7r/3os raCra ^ovXevecrdat. "ESo^c raSra, /cat avSpa<; eXopevoL avv KXed/j^o) Treju,- 20 TTOvcnv 0% ■^pwTwv Kvpov TO. 86^avTa rfj arpaTia. 6 8' dir-£KpCvaTO ort d/couot ' A/SpoKopav i^dpov dvSpa eVt Tw Kv^pdrr] iroTap^ eivau, air-ixovra 8wSe/ca (TTa6pov<;' (67) Trpos TouToi' oSt- e^ij ySovXecr^at iXdeiv • Kav pkv rj €K€l, T'^^i' SiKTjv i(j)Tj Xpfll^^'-V iirL-deluat avTW, rjv 8e epov, dvrl SapeiKov rpua T|fiiSap£iKd tov p.y]voavep(u. 1 IV. (69) ''EiVTfvdev i^ekavpei (TTadjjuov<; Suo vapa- crdyya'i Se/ca eiri roi' '^dpov TTorajjiov, ov rjv to evpojs Tpia irkidpa. '^vTevdev efeXawei aradfiov iva irapacrdyya^ irevre ivl TOV Ilvpafjiov noTafjLov, ov rjv to evpo's crTdSiov. '^vTevdev i^ekavvei aTadp.oiis Swo Trapacrdyya^ irevxe- KaCSeKa ets 'Icrcrows, Trj iraprjaav ai ck IleX.o'Troi'- VYjaov vfj€s TpidKovTa kol nevT€ Kal hr aurais vaiiapxos nu^aydyoas Aa/ceSai/u.di'ios. y^yevro S' aurai? Ta^ois AiyuTTTtos ef 'E(f)e(rov, €)(Oiv vav<; erepas Kupou trivTe. Kai cLKocTLv, ats iiToXtopKeL 'M.iX.TjTov ore' Ticrcra(j>epveL 3 ^tXi; ■^i', fcai 6poi "EWiji/es diTocrTdvTe<; tjXOov irapd Kvpov rexpaKdo-ioi oTrXtTat Kal auveo-TpaTevovTo iirl fiacrckea. i (70) 'EvTcvdev i^eXavvet crTa6po'j eva Trapacrdyya? TrevTe eVi irvXas rij? KiXi/cias Kal tijs Su/otas. rja-av Se rctSra Suo TeCxt], /cai ro p.kv to-wOev ro Trpo 7175 KiXtKias 'Zvevuepp.ovv a'OxdOi 6XKd8£s TroXXai. ivravd' efieuvav rjp,ipa^ CTTTct • fcat Sei'tas 6 'ApKci? crTpaTy)yo<; Kol Hacricov 6 Meyapev^ ip/3dvTe'; eis irXoiov Kal ra TrXeicrTov d^ia ivQi\i£voi direvXevcrav, &)5 jU.ei' tois TrX€iaToi<; iSoKovv <|)iXoTi[JLTi9evTes on tous o-TyoartwTas avraiv tous napa KXea^^^ov dTreX^ovra? w? dn-idi'Tas ets t-^i* 'EXXdSa Trd- Xii' /cai ou irpo<; ySao-iXea eia Kupos rov ¥X4ap')(ov e-)(eiv. iirel S' Rjcrav dav£ts, SiTJXSe XoYos on SiwKoi avroix; Kvpo? rpvrjpeo'f Kai ol fieu TjiixovTO tu; SciXoiis ovras avTovs Xr]at ^ovXrjTav, crvX- Xafiwv Kol avTovpo\)pov|ieva • d\X' ouSe TovTotv o-TepTJcrovTai, dXX' airoXiq^ovTai ti^s irpoadev eveKa irepl » > » rt j» Cjne aperies- 9 Kai 6 pev Tttura eiTrei' ■ 01 Se 'EXXiyt'es, ei Tts fat dOviioTcpos ^v TT/Dos T^i' dvdpacTiv, aKouovres ti^i' Ku/jou dpeTTju TJSiov /cai irpodvpofepov crweiropevovTo. (73) Merd raura Ku/aos i^ekavvei cTTadpoii? Terrapa^ irapacrdyyas eiKocriv eirt rot' XdXov Trorapov, ovto. to evpo^ Tr\49pov, irXi/jpy] 8' IxGiiwv peydkoiv koX -irpaecov, ous ot %vpoi deov<; evopitpv Kai dSiKelv ovk elav, ovok rd? irepKTTepds. at Se Ka(Tav ieuaL, iav fit] Tt5 avrois xpyjfJLaTa SiSo), cjo-irep tois Trporepois jLierct Kvpov d.vaj3a •^ ou, crvveXe^e to auTou (TTpaTevfia \(ap\<5 tcov dXkcjv /cat eXefe TciSe. " Ai'S/aes, edv jitot TreLcrdrJTe, ovre KLvSvvevcravTc; ovre 14 irovTJo-avTcs twv aXXov vXeou TrpoTi|XTi(r€(r9€ crTpaTLcoTcov VTTO Kvpov. tC ovv /ceXeuo) iroirjcrai ; vvv SetTat Kupos €TrecrdaL roix; "EXXiyvas eTTt ^acrikea • iyo) ovu (ftrjfii, v/xas ■^prjvaL SiayS^vat toi' ^vC(ra)VTai CTrecr^at, u/iet9 SofeTe aYrioi e«/at dp^av- Tes TOU Sta/Sati'eti', /cat o)? TrpodvfjLofdToi? ovcriv vpXv Xdpiv etcrcTat Kupos /cat aTroSwcret • eTrtcrraTat 8' et Tts /cat dWo^- ■riv'hk diro\|ni(|)C oTSa on a>s ^CKoi rev^ecrae Kvpov." 16 'AKov(os i&Trox«)pfij/3e? • el Se ri /cat aXXo 4vtiv vXt^s ^ KaXd- 2 (lot), anavra rjaav eicbSi^ axxTrep dpc&iiara ' SevSpov S' ovSev ivrjv, Orjpia Se iravToia, TrXeicTToi 8voi ayptoi, ANABASIS, BOOK I. CHAP. V. 321 TToX-Xai oe (TTpovOol at fieydXaL ■ iprjaav 8e Kal d)TCS£S /cat SopKdScs • Tavra Se to, dyjpCa oi l-mrel? evCot£ iSucoKov. Kat ol jjikv ovoL, iireC tis Siwkot, irpoSpa|ji,dv. T€S icrracrav, ttoKv yap tcov Ittttcdv 'erpex_ov daTTov ' Kal TToKiv, eirei Tc\'t\£Cois, diraXcoT€pa Se. cnpovOov Se ouSets eXajSev ol Se Stw^avres tZv linrecov 3 ra^v irravovTO • ttoXv yap dTreaira (pevyovcra, rois fiev TTocrl Spo/xft), rais Se irxepuliv a'(!pov(ra, acnrep ItrxCcj xpcofievT]. Ta<; Se airtSas ai/ Tt? Ta^u avuTTrj etrrt Xafx^dveLv • ireTovxai yap PpaX'u oio-'nep -ir^pSiKes /cat ra^u diraYopETJOVtri. ra Se Kpea avrSiv rj^io'Ta ijv. (79) Ii.opev6p.evoi Se Sta TavTy)<; r^s ^^P"? d(f)LKvowTaL 4 eiri Tov Mao-zcav norapop, to evpo [jlcv OoLTTov iXdoL, TO(rovT(p dTTapa(TKevoTepa) /SacnXei l^aX*^" (r9ai, ocro) Se cr^oXairepof, too-ovtw nXeov (rvvayeipio-Qai /SacriXel crTpoLTevfia. kol (ruviSeXv S' ^v tw irpo(r^x°VTi Tov vovv 7) ^aa-iXecos apxrj irXiijeei fiev x^P'^'^ '^'^^ avdpay TTcov Icrxvpd oucra, toi? 8e itflKeai tcov oScou kol t(o 8ie- (TirdcrOai ras Swa/ieis daOevTis, et Tts Sia Ta^^cov tov ir6Xe|iov irotoiTo. Ilepav Se tou ^vippaTov 7TOTap,ov Kara tovs e/arj- 10 fJLOvs (XTadp.ov6Epas as eT^of o-Tfi'ydo'iuiTa eir(|i,-TrXa(rav ^PP'''^^ Koii«|)ou, elra cruv- •^yoi' Kai o-wlo-irwv, ws )u^ dirxetrOai tijs KdpTis to uStu^ • iirl TovTcav hiifiaivov koX iXdp.^av.ov to, imTrj- Seia, (nvov re Ik t^s paXdvou weiroLTjfievov rrj? drro tov (|>o(viKOS Ktti (TLTOV p-eXCvT)? ' TOVTo ydp rjv iv Trj X'"/'?' irXelaTov. (82) ' A|i(|>i\£|dvir(OV 8e rt ivTavda twv re toC Mo'wvos 11 (TTpaTUxiTbtv KoX Toiv TOV KXedp^ov, 6 KXeap-^o? KpCvas dBiKelu TOV TOV Mev^ tco KX€dpx(p- Trj Se auTg "^jfJiepa KXeap^o? eX^wv em ttjv 12 Sidpaaiv toC noTafiov koX iKei KaTa(rKe\{rd|ievos tt/v dyo- pdv dnnr€'66i eiri tt^v eauTou crKTjvrjv Sta tov Mevcovos a-TpaTevfiaToei)Y£i' C'S '''o eauTOu cTTpaTevfia, Kat €vdvjXots p.ai)(rjv v 7]p€Tepci)v i)(ovTO)v TrdvTev ySacrtXei Kai TO, TToikefiLa Xeyofji.evo'S iv toI(|>£Xi|Jia etvai, /cat eKeXevcrev avrbv Xajx/SdveLV fx.4pos irap' kKatnov tS>v ■fiyefiovwv. 'O 8' 'OpovTai; vofi[a-a<; £to(|jious eti'at avr^' tovEi ciriaToXTiv irapd fiacriXea otc tj^oi €)((iiv tTTTTca? tus av Sui^T^Tat 7rXei(rT0us • dXXa (|>pd(rai tois eauToC iTTTreSo'ii/ eKeXevev ft»s ^iXiov avTov ■{nro8ex*<''6ai. ei'iji' Se ei' r^ iTncTToXfj kol rrj<; Trpoadev ^tXtas •(nro|Jivii- jiara /cai rrtcrTecos. ravTrjv ttjv iirtcrToXrju SiSwo-i TruTTa dv8pl, o)? ojCTo • 6 Se Xa^wv Kupw SiStucrti'. (85) ' Ava^yvoiis Se avTr)v 6 Kupos a-vXXafi/3dvei 'Opov- 4 rav, Kat (TuyKaXeZ eis T'^i' eaurou (TKTjvrjv Hdpcra^ tovv irepl avrou eTrrct, Kal rous Twy 'EXXt^i/oji' (rTpaTTjyoi)? eKeXevcrev oTrXtras dyayetv, toutous Se 6ecr6ai to. oirXa irepX Ty]v avTov (TKrjvrjv. ol Se ravra iwoLrfcrav, dyayoures w? rpiaxi-XCous OTrXiras. KXeapxov 5 Se Kai elao) ■irapEKdXeo'e (TvixpouXov, os ye /cat aurw fcal Tois aXXoi? eSo/cei TrpoTiixrjd'rjvai fidXiCTTa tS)v 'EiXXrjvoiv, CTTel 8' i^rjXdev, £|T\'Y'Y£iXe rots ^iXots ttji' KpCcriv tou 'Opoura COS iyivero • ov yap d'ir6ppTiTov ^v. "Eifjr) Se Ku^oi' dp-)(€w tou Xdyou wSe. " nape/cdXccra 6 u/iSs, dvSpe? (fiiXoL, ottws o^w uju.tt' ^ovXevofxevo^ 6 rt 81/caiw ecTTt Kal TTpos ^ewj/ /cat tt^oos dvdpcoTnov, tovto 326 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. Trpd|(a nepl 'Opovra xouTout. tovtov yap TrpatTov fiiv o €|i6s Trarfjp ehcoKev •uttIikoov eu/av ip,oi eTrel. oe ra^^eis, (US 6(^17 au7-09, VTTO Tov ifjiov dSe\)v eju.TJi' ^(opav o tl eovvco ; efptj o Vpovras. vjv- Kovv," €(f>r) 6 KvpoT^vdi yva>p7]v 6 tl crot So/cei." KXeap^os 8e eTire rdSe. " Xvfi^ovXevo) iya> tov dvSpa TOVTOV eKiro8d>v TToiacrdcLi ais Td^icrra, ois p.rjKiTi herj tovtov (fivXaTTecrOai, dXXd o-xoXii y yjp^v, to /card tovtov eli'tti, Tous ^GeXovrds cf)CXovri, Ke\evovTo<; Kvpov iXa^ov Trj<; ^covtjs Tov 'OpovTav inl Savdrca diTavTev Kvpov o-KT^irTovxtDV, jtACTa TavTa ovTe ^<3vTa 'OpovTov ovre TtQvry Kdra ouSeis elSe ircoiroTe ouSe oirws aireuavev ovoei9 eioojs eAeyej/ • eiKatfiv Se a\Xot cLXXcos • Td(|>os Se ouSeis iranroTe avTou i 8id ro ei* rotouTw elvai tow kivSvvod npocnovToi;, av 8e eS yevrjTai tl, ov |i£|JiVTi(re(r6a£ ere (ftaa-Lv ■ evioi Be, oiih' el fjiefjivrjo re koX ySouXoio 8wa- 6 cr^at av diToBovvai ocra v'ma")(yeZ." (XKoucras Taura eXe^ev 6 Kv/)os, " 'AXX' ecrrt jnei' T7/Arv, a) dvSpes, "q dp)(ri rj iraxpcja Trpos fiev |jie(rT])i.pp£av P-^XP'' °^ "'^ Kaviia ou 8i;t'ai'7"a(, oiKeu' dvOpconoL, irpos 8e S.pKTOV jLiej^pi ou 8td \6i|J.(ova • rd 8' ei' /-lefw rovrwi' iravra 7 (raTpaireijov(riv ot tow e/xoO dBeXv 8e twv 'EXXtjj'wi' ical (rT6<|)avov eKacTTQ} xpvcrovv Smcro)." ANABASIS, BOOK I. CHAP. VII. 329 Ot 8e Tttura dKovaavTe6v ; " " Nt] Ai'," ei^iy o Kupos, " e'lJirep ye AapeCov kol Ila/JucrdTiSds ecrrt Trais, e/AOS Se dSeX^os, ovk &,\La\A ravT iyw Xtjxpop.aL." (92) 'EfTttv^a S17 ei* t^ eloirXicrCq, dpLOfios iyeveTO tcov 10 ju,ei/ 'EXXi^i/ftJv dcrms p-vpia Koi TerpaKoaLa, ireXraoTai Se Sitrj^iXiot KoX irevTaKoaiOL, tmv Se jLterd Kvpov /3ap/3dpcDv SeKa fiV' /otdSe? Kol dpfiara 6pe-iravT](|>dpa d[Ji.(f)l TO. eLKocrt. Tcov Se -noXefjiioiv iXeyovro ^^R|| f \^l , n eu/at e/caroi' /cai et/cotrt //.u^idSes fat dpfiara hpenavq^opa BiaKocna. dX- Xoi Se ^(xai/ 4|aKi(rxCXioi iTnTets, Sv peirovT]!)! pos. ' ApTayep(rrj<; rfpx^^ ' ovtol S' av npo avTov /SatrtXetus Terayp.€uoi rjcrav. ToO Se ;8a(rtXea)s aTpaTevfiaTos ^cav ap^ovres /cai 12 (TTpaTrjyol /cat rjyefi6ve<; TerTapedr}(rau Twv voXefJiCcov TavTo. ■tjyyeXXov. 14 (93) 'EvTevdev Se Ku/oos efeXawei (TTadfiov iva irapai- (rdyyas T/acTs crvvTeTayfi€i>co tw (TTparevfiaTi, iravTi koI TW '"EiWtjvlkw /cat tg3 /SapfiapiKW • ftjero ya/3 ravTrj rrj rjp.4pq, fjia)(elpos yjv 6pvKTi] paSeta, to fieu evpos dp^uial ireWe, 15 TO Se pdOos opyviaX Tpeivpai 8' eireicnv. 'Hv Se irapd tov Eixfypdri/jv wdpoSos crTevr] iiexalv Tou TTOTapov /cat T7JS Td Ty rjpepa ovk ejota^e- craro fiatriXev^, dXX vnoX'OipovvTcov ^avepa rjcrav /cat iTTircav /cat dvdpwTToav t-xy^ iroXXd. 18 (94) 'ElraS^a KS/>os ^tXavov /caXetras TOi' 'Apirpa- KLcarrjv |idvTiv eSco/cef auTw Sa/aet/cous T/attr^tXtous, OTt T17 €v8eKdTT| aTr' iKeCvr)^ rjpepa irpodvopevo? enrev avTw ort " ^ao"tXeus ov /na^etrat Se/ca rjpepwv," Kvpos 8' elwev, "Ovk (Ipa Irt jiia^etrat, et ei' TauTats ou /xa^j^etTat Tats ■flpepais • idv S' dXi^Oevo-xiS, vina-xvovpai croi Se'/ca rd- Xavxa. ToSro to ^pucrtoi' totc direSw/cei', CTret vapyjXOov 19 at Se/Cft rjpepai, iir^l §' Itti t^ Tct^pw ov/c e/cwXve ySao-f ANABASIS, BOOK. I. CHAP. Vni. 331 X.eiis TO Kvpov OT/oaTCVjua hiafiaiveLv, ISo^e /cat Kvp(o Kal Tois aXXots direTvcoKevai tov fid^etrdai • wcrre r^ varepaCq. Kvpos iiropeveTo f||ie\T]|i£V(as p.a\\ov. r-^ 8e 20 TpCrr) iiTi T€ TOV apfiaro^ /ca^rj/iei'os t'^v iropeCav eTroieiro Kal oXCyovs ev ra^ei e;^&)i' tt/so avTov, to Se ■n'oXu aurw dvaTerapa^iJievov iiropevero koX tS)v ottXwv tois (TTpaTica- Tttis TToXXa eTTt ap,a^S)v rjyeTO koX virol^vyioiv. VIII. (95) Kal 17817 Te rjv aju,^l ayopav Tr\(\9ovaCv£Tai iXavvcfiv dvd KpdTOS ISpoOvxi tw Ivttw, koI eiiOi)^ iraaiv ot? iveTvyxavev e^da /cal pappapiKSs Kal ^XXt]VIK(os on ")SaoriXeus criiv crTpaTCVfiaTt iroXXaJ irpoa-ep^eraL ws eis fJid^Tjv irapE(rK£vao-|icvos." 'Evda 8^ iroXixs rdpaxos eyivero • (lvtIko. yap iSoKovu 2 01 'EXXr^vcs Kal TTwre? 8e draKTois a'(j)L(rLv eirnretreWGai • Kupos T€ KaTa-m^STJcras aTro tov apjuaros TOV OcopaKa iviSv Kat dva^air\i(r|j.4voi dcopa^t fiev avrol koX iropa- |jii]piSCois Kol Kpdvecru irctires ttXtjv Kvpov Kvpo<; 8e ^iKrjv e^ftjj' rrjv K£(|>a\T]v eis tt/v fidy^rjv KaducrTaTo \eye- PEKSIAN FOOT SOLDIERS. Ttti Se /cai Tous aXXous Heparan \pi,\aLS rais Kea\ai^ iv 7 Tw iToXefico 8iaKiv8w£{leiv. oi 8' ittttoi Travres oi /u,era Kvpov €i)(ov Koi -irpoiicTcoirCSia /cai irpoirTEpvlSia ■ et^ov Sc Kat [laxO'Cpas oi iTTTreis 'EKXrjviKoi';. ANABASIS, BOOK I. CHAP. VIII. 333 Kai "^Sr; re ^v fiiaov 17/xepa; koX ovirta KaTa(t)av£ts 8 TjO-av ol TToXefitoL • rjVLKa Se SelXt] iytyvero, idur) Koviopxis cjcnrep V€<|>6\'q Xevici], XP°^V ^^ ffvxv^ vcrrepov wa-TTcp |i£XavCa Tt5 iv raJ ireSiw irrl noXv, ore Se iyyi- Tcpov iyiyvovTO, Ta.\a, 8^ /cat xo-^i^^S ''■''5 IjorTpaTrTe fcai at Xd'Yxai koX at ra^'ets /fara<^avet5 iyiyvovro. (97) fat 9 Tjcrav tTTTrets //.ev XeuKoBcopaKcs ewt toO evcovvfiov tcov iroXefiicav • TL(rcra6poi, i)(6p.evoi Se oirXtrat trvi' Tro8TJp6v eis irXdyiov diroT€Ta|i€va /cat viro Tot? 8(<|>pois ets yyjv pXeirovra, d)S SioKdirreiv otm ii/Tvy)(avoL€v. rj Se yucofirj ■^v tt»? ets rds Ta^ei^ twv 'EXkyjVaV iXavra /cat Sta- ^' Paph'sgonian cavalry. 2, G-reek pelUBtB. ■KO^hovra.. O fieVTOl KvpoS 3, Greek boplites under : (1) Clearchui, 11 T « . / (2) ProienuB, (3) MeDon. etTTCJ/ ore /CaXecra? ira/ae/Ce- 4, Piobable position of Cyrus and hia sU Xev'erO roZs 'EXX^Crt r^V ,. HrrUnaTnt^Haeus. Kpavyr]V rWV ^ap^dpaV "• Artaxerxea with the six thousand dv4)(e(r6ai, ixjteva-drj tovto • ov yap Kpavyy dXXd s irpod^aav. Kat ev TovTco Kupos irapeXavvcov avToos Kcd OLKovMU Kvpov i^o) ovTa tov '^Wtjvikov evoy vvfjiov )8ao"tXea — too'ovtov yap nXtjOeL irepiiiv /SacriXeus wore p.4(Tov to)v eavrou e)((DU tov Kvpov evcavvfiov e^co ifjv — dXX' OjLtw? 6 KXeap^os ovk ■rjdeKev dirocnTda-ai aTTO TOV TTOTafiov TO Be^iou Kepas, (f)0^ovfievo<; firj kukXco- GcCt] iKaTepcoScv, tw Se Kvpa) dneKpivaTO oTi aurw /xeXot o;rws KttXws e^^ot. 14 Kat a/ Tourw tgJ /cai/Dw to /xei' jSapfiapiKov crTpdrevfJua 6|j.aX(os irpoTjei,, to Se 'EXXt^vikoi' Iti et* toI auroS jxei/ov (TvveTaTTeTO €k tZv ert vpocriovrcov. Kot 6 Ku/oos irape- Xavvcov ov rrdw tt/jos aurw t&> aTpaTevfiaTi, KareBiaTo ^KaTcpoxrc diropX^ircov eis re rows iroXe/iious Kai rows 15 ^tXous. iSoiv Se avToi' aTro tov 'EXXyjvi-Kov '^evo^cov 'AOtjuoIo?, ireXdo-as ws (ruvavT'i]d'Yia KoXd. (99) raura Se Xeytui' Oopiipov rjKovcre Sto, twv Ta^ecav tovTos, koI TJpeTo Tts 6 dopv^os eiij. 6 Se KXeap^^os eiTrei' oti ^ivi TL TTJ? dXayyo<;, to viroXenrop.evov rjp^uTo $p6p,w 9«lv ■ Kat dfia l6^7|avTO TrdvTes otoi' tw 'Ei'uaXi^ ANABASIS, BOOK I. CHAP. VIII. 3S5 9 Sdpv. 20 21 eXeX(1^ov(ri, /cat Traires 8e. ideov. Xeyovtri, 84 ru/es cus Kol Talev'yovcrL. koI iv Tavda St) iSicoK^p fiev Kara. KpdTov 'FiXXyjvcjv iv Tavry T'y P-dxO eiraQev owSeis ov8iv, irXriv inl tw evcovvfiq) TO^&jQi]- val Tts eXeyero. Ku/oos 8' opmv Tous 'EXXiyi/as VLKcavra^ to Kad' auTous Kal StfUKoira?, ■fjSop.evo'S Kal irpocrKvvov- VO e\ /^ SIS s/ sOS« s^ / /I p,ivo koI iv da(|>aXe- trrdTco eTi'at, Tjv rf rj lo'X'Os avTwv eKarepcodev, koI ei Tl TrapayyelXai, ^prjt^oiev, i[^i iybd^ero iK tov dvTiov ovhe. rots avrov TeTayfi€voLt)'Yiiv ETpe\|/£ tous e^a/ctcr;^iXiovs, /cat aTTOKTeivaL Xeyerai avTO<; rrj iavTov X^'P' 'Afna- yipcrrjv tou dp^ovra aurwi/. 26 'I2s S' 17 TpoTTT] iyei/ero, 8iao-ireCpovTai /cat ot Kvpov e^aKocTLOi eis to Siw/ceiv op/xT^craire?, ttX'^i' Trai/w oXiyot djLi^ avTou KaTe\et(j)0r)crai^, axeSbv ot 6)j.oTpdir€^oi, kuXov- 26 fievoL. (102) crui' rourots 8e wi/ KaOop^ ySatriXea /cat to dju.^' iKelvov (rTL^o<; • /cat ev^us ou/c ■fjv4a")(€T0, dXX' elircov "Tov dvBpa opo)" UTO iir avTov /cat iraUi Kara, to trrcpvov /cat TiTpcotTKci Std TOU OcopaKo<;, a><; y)(TL KTi7(rtas 6 27 laxpds, /fat Ldo-Oai auros to Tpaii|id y]cri. iraiovTa 8' auTOf dKovTll^ei Tts ttoXtw vtto tov 6(j>0a\|j.6v pia(o>s • /cat ivravda p,a-^6p,e.voi /cat ySacriXeus /cat Kw^o? /cat ot dju,^' auTous u7re/3 cKaT^pou, — ottoctol p-ev rav dp(f)l fiacnkea dvedi^rjaKov KTYjcrCa? Xeyet ■ Trap' iKeCvcii yap rjv • Kuyoos oe auTos t€ direOave /cat 6/ct&> ot dpicnoL tZv nepl avTov 28 ^KGiVTO eTr' auTW. 'ApTairaTrj? S' 6 irtcTTOTaTos auTw rav crKy]'iTTov)(0}v Gcpdirtov XeyeTai, e7r£tSi7 ircTTTWKdTa etSe Ku/Doi', /caTttinySr/o-as aTrb tou i-rnrov ircpiirco'ctv avTW. 29 /cat ot jLto/ ^ao^t ^acriKia /ceXeucrat Ttva lirio'(t>d|ai auToi' JUvpo), ot 8e auTOV iin,(r(f>d^aa-0ai, (rira(rd)i£VOV toi' d/ctvct- /o^v • et^e yap '^(pvarovv • /cat crTpeiTTou S" e(j>dp£i /cat \/>eXta /cat TaXXa waTrep ol dpiaToi HepcrMu • ireTiiJiTjTO ydp VTTO Kvpov 8t' ei/voidv te Kat iriaTdTiiTa. WORD FOR WORD PARALLEL OF ANABASIS. Book I., Chapters I.-II. N'OTB. — The figures between parentheses indicate the Lessons of this book In which the text, corresponding to this parallel, is treated. CHAPTER I. 1. (1) Of-Darius and of-Parysatis are-born boys two, (2) elder Artaxerxes, younger but Cyrus. (3) When but was-sick Darius (4) and was-suspecting an-end of-the (of-)life, (5) he-was-wishing the-two two-boys botb to-be-present. 2. (6) The now eWer being-present happened ; (7) Cj^j-ms but he-sends-after from the province of-which him satrap he-made, (8) also general and him he- appointed of-all (9) as-many-as into Castolus's plain collect-themselves (= as- semble). Goes-up, therefore, (the) Cyrus taking Tissaphernes as a-friend, (10) also of-the Greeks, having heavy-armed-men he-went-up three-hundred, com- mander and of-them Xenias, a-Parrhasian. 3. (12) When but ended Darius and became-established into the kingdom Artaxerxes, Tissaphernes slanders (the) Cyrus to the (= his) brother, that he-is-plotting-against him. (13) The (= he) and is-persuaded and arrests Cyrus as-if about-to-kill ; the (= his) but mother having-begged-off him sends-back again to the (= his) province. 4. (14) The (= he) but when went-back, after-incurring-danger and after- being-dishonored, (15) deliberates how never again he-shall-be in-the-power- of his brother, but, if he-be-able, [how] he-shall-be-king instead-of that-one. (16) Parysatis now, his mother, supported (the) Cyrus, loving him more than the reigning Artaxerxes. 5. (17) Whoever and arrived of-the from-beside king to him, all so dis- posing he-kept-sending-away, so-as to-him rather friends to-be than to-king. (19) Also of-the by-the-side-of himself and barbarians he-was-taking-care, that to-wage-war both able they-might-be and in-a-friendly-way they-might-have- [themselves] to-him, i.e., be friendly to him. 6. The but Greek force he-was-coUeoting, as-much- as he-could, hiding-for- himself, in-order-that as-unprepared-as-possible he-might-take (=flnd) king. (20) As-foUows, therefore, he-was-making-for-himself the levy. As-many- soever-as he-had garrisons in the cities he-sent-orders to-the garrison-com- manders each to-take men Peloponnesian as-many-as-possible and as-good-as- possible, saying-that plotting-against Tissaphernes the cities. (21) And (this was plausible) for were the Ionian cities of -Tissaphernes the-ancient (=for- IND. GR. PK. — 22 337 338 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. merly) from king having-lDeen-given, then but they-had-revolted to Cyrus all except Miletus. 7. In Miletus but Tissaphernes observing-beforehand the same those [things] [them] planning, to-revolt to Cyrus, the (= some) he-killed-off, the (= others) but he-oast-out, i.e., banished. (22) (The) but Cyrus, taking-under-(his protec- tion) the fleeing [ones^, after-collecting an-anny, was-besieging Miletus both by land and by sea and was-endeavoring to lead-down [= back] the having-f alien- out [ones] (=the exiles). And this again another pretext was to-him of-the to-collect an-army. 8. (23) To and king sending, he-kept-demanding, brother being of-him, to- be-given to-himself those the cities rather than Tissaphernes to-rule (of-)them, and his mother cooperated with-him these [things] ; so-that king the against him- self conspiracy not was-perceiving, (24) with- mssaphernes but he-was-thinking warring him about (= on) the armies to-be-spending-money ; so-that in-no-wise was-he-angry, (because of) them warring. (And) for (the) Cyrus kept-forward- ing the becoming (i.e., accruing) revenues to-king from the cities, (of-)which of- Tissaphernes he-happened having. 9. Another but army for-him was-being-coUected in Chersonesus the oppo- site Abydus, (in) this (the) way. Clearchus a-Lacedsemonlan exile was ; (25) with-this (one) (= him) after-associating, (the) Cyrus admired both him and gives to-him ten-thousand darics. The (= he) but, after-taking the money, an- army collected from those the means, and was-warring, from Chersonesus set- ting-out, with-the Thracians the above (= on) [the] Hellespont living, and he- was-aiding the Greeks ; so-that also means they-were-contributing for-him into the support of-the soldiers, the Hellespontine cities, willing. (26) This and again thus being-supported was-escaping-notice for-him (the) army. 10. Aristippus and, the Thessalian, a-guest-friend being happened to-him, and being-hard-pressed under (=by) his at-home opponents he-comes to (the) Cyrus and asks him (for) into ( = about) two-thousand mercenaries and three months' pay, on-the-ground-that thus becoming-superior would (= would be superior) of-(=to)-his opponents. (27) (The) but Cyrus gives to-him about four-thousand and six months' pay, and requests (of-)him not sooner to-become- reconciled to his opponents before with-him he-may-confer. Thus and again the in Thessaly was-escaping-notice for-him being-supported army. 11. (28) Proxenus and, the Boeotian, a-guest-friend being, he ordered taking men as-many-as-possible, to-become-at-[his]-side, saying-that, into (= against) (the) Fisidians, wishing (= he wished) to-make-an-expedition, on-the-ground- that troubles, were furnishing the Pisidians, to-the of-himself country (=to his own country). Sophsenetus and, the Stymphalian, and Socrates, the Achaean, guest-friends being also these, he ordered, men liaving-taken, to-come, as many-as-possible, on-the-ground-that being-( = he was)-about-to-war-with ( = against) Tissaphernes together-with the exiles (the) of-[the]-Milesians. And were-doing thus those. • WORD FOR WORD PARALLEL OF ANABASIS. 339 CHAPTER II. 1. (30) When but it-was-seeming-best to-him now to-prooeed upward, the pretext he-was-making as (the) Pisidians wishing (i.e., that he wished) to-drive- out wholly from the country ; and he-ooUects as-if against these the both barba- rian and the Greek [army]. There also he-sends-orders to-the both Clearehus having-taken (=with) to-oome how-great was to-him army, and to (-the) Aristippus, reconciled to his [opponents] at-home, to-send-away to himself what he-had army ; (31) and to-Xenias, the Arcadian, who for-him was com- manding the in the cities mercenary [army], to-oome he-sends-orders, having- taken the others except how-many sufficient were the citadels to-guard. 2. He-called and also the Miletus besieging [ones], and the exiles he-ordered with him to-join-the-expedition, having-promised to-them, if well he-should- accomplish [those things] for which he-was-making-the-expedition, not sooner (about-) to -cease until them he - should - lead - down (= back) homeward. (32) The (=they) and gladly were-obeying ; they-trusted for (to-) him; and taking the arms they were-present into Sardis. 3. Xenias accordingly the from the cities taking became-present into Sardis, heavy-armed-men to ( = about) four-thousand, Proxenus and was-present hav- ing heavy-ai'med-men about flve-hundred and one-thousand, light-armed-men but five-hundred, Sophsenetus and, the Stymphalian, heavy-armed-men having one-thousand, Socrates and, the Achsean, heavy-armed-men having about flve- hundred, Pasion and, the Megarean, three-hundred, heavy-armed-men, three- hundred and targeteers having, arrived ; was but both that [one] and (the) Socrates of-the about Miletus campaigning [ones]. 4. (33) Those into Sardis for him arrived. Tissaphernes but, having-per- ceived these things (= this), and greater thinking to-be than as-if against (the) Pisidians the preparation, proceeds to king, by-what [way] he was-able most- quickly, horsemen having about five-hundred. 5. And king accordingly, when he-heard of-Tissaphernes the Cyrus's mili- tary-preparation, prepared-in-turn. Cyrus but, having whom I-have-mentioned, set-forth from Sardis ; and he- marches through (the) Lydia day's-journeys three, parasangs twenty and two, to the Mseander river. Of-this the width two plethra ; a-bridge and was-upon seven having-been-joined by-means-of-boats. 6. (34) This after-crossing, he-marches through Phrygia day's-joumey one, parasangs eight, into Colossse, a^city (well-) inhabited, prosperous and large. There he-waited days seven ; and came Menon, the Thessalian, hoplites having one-thousand and peltasts five-hundred, Dolopians and ^nianians and Oly nthians. 7. Thence he-marehes day's-journeys three, parasangs twenty, into Celsense, of-(the) Phrygia city inhabited, large and prosperous. There to-Cyrus royal- (apartments) was and a-park large, of-wild animals full, which that-one used- to-hunt from a^horse, whenever to-exercise he-wished (opt.) himself both and 340 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. his horses. Through middle and of-the park flows the Mseander river ; the and sources of-it are out-of the royal-apartments ( = palace) ; it-flows and also through the Celaenae city. 8. (35) There-is and also of-great king royal-palace in Celaens? fortified upon the sources of-the Marsyas river beneath the acropolis ; flows and also this through the city and empties into the Mseander ; of-the and Marsyas the width is of-twenty and five feet. There is-said ApoUo to-have-flayed [it is said that Apollo flayed] Marsyas after-conquering [him] contending with-himself concerning [musical-] wisdom, and the skin to-have-hung-ap [and that he hung up, etc.] in the cave whence the sources ; on-account-of and this [fact] the river is-called Marsyas. (36) There Xerxes, when from (the) Greece after-helng-defeated in-the battle he-was-retreating, is-said to-have-built [it is said that he built] these both (the) royal-apartments (= palace) and the of-Celsenae citadel. 9. There waited Cyrus days thirty ; and came Clearohus, the Spartan exile, having hoplites one-thousand and peltasts Thracians eight-hundred and bowmen Cretan two-hundred. At-the-same-time and also Sosis was-present, the Syracusan, having hoplites three-hundred, and Sophsenetus, the Arcadian, having hoplites one-thousand. And there Cyrus review and enumeration of-the Greeks made in the park, and became (= amounted-to) the all-together hoplites ten-thousand and one-thousand, peltasts but about (the) two-thousand. 10. (37) Thence he-marches day's-journeys two, parasangs ten, into Peltse, a-city inhabited. There he-remained days three ; in which Xenias, the Arca- dian, the Lycsean sacrificed and a-contest appointed ; the and prizes were flesh- combs golden ; viewed ( = witnessed) and the contest also Cyrus. Thence he-marches day's-journeys two, parasangs twelve, to of-(the)-Cerar mians market, city inhabited, remotest near (= frontier or border city of) the Mysian country. 11. (38) Thence he-marches day's-journeys three, parasangs thirty, i^to Cayster's plain, city inhabited. There he-remained days five ; and to-the sol- diers was-due pay more than of-three months, and frequently going to his gates they-kept-demanding [it] from [him]. The (= he) but, hopes speaking, kept- putting-(them)-ofE and evident was being-troubled ; not for was-it according- to the of-Cyrus manner (= custom, or character), having, not to-give-back (= pay-over). 12. (39) There arrives Epyaxa, the of-Syennesis wife, the Cilicians' king to-the-side-of Cyrus ; and ^he-was-said to-Cyrus to-have-given [it was said that she gave, etc.] means (= money) much. To-the but at-any-rate army then paid Cyrus pay of-ionr months. Had and the Cilioian-(womaji) .a-guard around her- self, Cilicians and Aspendians ; it-was-said and also to-have-had-interoOurse Cyrus [that C. had, etc.J with-the Cilician-(woman). 13. Thence lie-marches day's-journeys two, parasangs ten, into Thymbrium, city inhabited. (41) There was beside the road spring, the of-Midas called, WORD FOR WORD PARALLEL OF ANABASIS. 341 the Phrygians' king, at which is- said Midas the Satyr to-have-caught [it is said that M. caught, etc] with-wine by-mixing it. 14. Thence he-marches day's-journeys two, parasangs ten, into Tyiiaeum, city inhabited. There he-remained days three. And is-said to-have-requested the-Cilician- (woman) of -Cyrus [it is said that . . . requested Cyrus] to-show the army to-herself ; wishing accordingly to-show, a-review he-makes in (= on) the plain of -the Greeks and of-the barbarians. 15. (42) He-ordered and the Greeks, as custom to-them Into battle [was], so to-be-drawn-up and to-stand, to-marshal and each-one the of-himself [men]. They-were-drawn-up accordingly in fours (=four deep); had and the right Menon and the (= those) with him, the but left Clearohus and the of -that-one [men], the but middle the other generals. 16. Viewed (= reviewed) accordingly (the) Cyrus first the barbarians; the (= they) and marched-by having-been-drawn-up according-to squadrons and according-to companies ; afterwards but, the Greeks, riding-past upon a-chariot and the Cilioian-(woman) upon (=ln) a-carriage. They-had and all helmets brazen and tunics purple and greaves and their shields having-been-uncovered. 17. (43) When but all he-rode-past (= he-had-ridden-past), after-stationing his chariot before the phalanx middle, sending Pigres the interpreter to (-the- side-of ) the generals of-the Greeks, he-ordered to-present the arms and to-advance entire the phalanx. They but these (orders) said-in-front to-the soldiers ; and when the-trumpet-(had)-sounded, after-presenting the arms, they-advanced. From but this, more-quickly advancing with a-shout, from the spontaneous a- running became to-the soldiers to the -tents. 18. (44) Of-the and barbarians fear much, and the both Cilician- (woman) fled upon her carriage and the (= those) from (i.e., in) the market leaving- behind their wares fled. The but Greeks with laughter to their tents went. The and Ciliclan-(woman), seeing the splendor and the order of-the army, wondered. Cyrus but was-pleased the from the Greeks into the barbarians fear beholding. 19. Thence he-marches day's-journeys three, parasangs twenty, into Iconium, of (the) Phrygia city remote. There he-remained three days. Thence he marches through (the) Lycaonia day's-journeys five, parasangs thirty. This (the) country he-turned-over to-plunder to-the Greeks, as hostile being. 20. (45) Thence Cyrus the Cilician-(woman) into (the) Cilicia sends-away (by) the quickest way ; and he-«ent-with her the soldiers whom Menon had and (Menon) himself. Cyrus but with the others marches through Cappadocia day's-journeys four, parasangs twenty and live, into Thoana, city inhabited, large and prosperous. There they-remained days three ; in which (time) Cyrus slew man Persian, Megaphernes, a-wearer-of-the-purple royal, and another cer- tain of-the subordinates chief-ofBoer, accusing to-be-plotting-against him. 21. (46) Thence they-were-atterapting to-throw-into (i.e., make an entrance) into (the) Cilicia ; the but entrance was road wagon, steep exceedingly and im- 342 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. possible to-enter for-an-army, if any-one was-preventing. Was-said and also Syennesis to-be upon the heights guarding the entrance ; wherefore they-waited a-day in the plajn. On-the but following [day] came a-messenger saying that having-lef t was Syennesis the heights, when he-perceived that the of-Menon army already in Cilioia was within the mountains, and because triremes he-heard sailiug-around from Ionia into Cilicia Tamos having, the of-Lacedsemonians and of himself Cyrus. 22. (47) Cyrus and accordingly went-up upon the mountains, nobody pre- venting, and saw the tents where the Cilicians were-guarding. Thence and he-went-down into a-plain large and beautiful, flowed-upon (= well- watered), and of -trees of -all-kinds quite-full and of-vines; much and also sesame and millet and panic and wheat and barley it-bears. A-mountain and it surrounds, steep and high on-every-side from sea to sea. 23. After-descending and through this (the) plain he marched day's-journeys four, parasangs five and twenty, to Tarsi, of (-the) Cilicia city large and pros- perous ; where was the of-Syennesis royal-palace, the Cilicians' king ; through midst and of-the city flows a-river Cydnus by-name, width of-two plethra. 24. (48) This (the) city they-abandoned, the inhabiting [ones], with Syen- nesis into a-fortress strong upon the mountains, except the (= those) the shops having [ones] ; they-remained and also the along-the-side-of the sea living [ones] in Soli and in Issi. Epyaxa but, the of-Syennesis wife, earlier than-Cyrus by- five days into Tarsi arrived. 25. In but the crossing of-the mountains, the into the plain, two companies of-the Menon's army were-destroyed (= perished); the (= some) were-saying while-plundering something to-have-been-cut-down (= cut-to-pieces) [that they while . . . were cut down] by the Cilicians, the (= others) but after-being-left- behind and not being-able to-find the other (= the rest of the) army nor the roads, then, wandering-about, to-have-perished [that they were left behind and . . . that they perished] ; they-were but at^any-rate these one-hundred hoplites. 26. (49) The but others when they-oame, the both city, (the) Tarsi, they- plundered, on-account-of the loss of-the fellow-soldiers being-angered, and the royal-palace the in it. Cyrus but when marched-into into the city, kept-sending-after (the) Syen- nesis to himself ; he but neither before to-no-one yet stronger than-himself into hands to-go said [i.e., that he had gone, etc.] nor then to-Cyrus to-go was-he- willing, before [= until] his wife him persuaded and pledges he-received. 27. (50) After but these [things] (=this), when they-became-with one- another, Syennesis gave to-Cyrus means much into (=for) the army, Cyrus and to-that-one (= him) gifts which is-[= are]-thought alongside-of (the) king (i.e., at the court) valuable, a-horse golden-bridled and necklace golden and bracelets and dagger golden and gown Persian and the country no-longer to-be-ravaged ; the and having-been-plundered slaves, if anywhere they-happen-on [them] (=: find), to-take-[them]-back. A FREE TRANSLATION OF CHAPTER I. Note. — The figures between parentbeses indicate tbe Leesona in tbis book in wbicb tbe text, correaponding to tbia tranalatlon, ia treated. 1. (1) Of Darius and Parysatis two sons are born ; (2) the elder, Artaxerxes ; the younger, Cyrus. (3) Now when Darius was sick (4) and suspected the end of his life to be near, (5) he wished both of his sons to be present. 2. (6) Now the elder happened to be present ; (7) but he sent for Cyrus from the province of which he had made him satrap ; (8) and he had also appointed him general of all (9) who are wont to assemble in the plain of Castolus. So Cyrus goes up, taking Tissaphemes as a friend, (10) having also three hun- dred hoplltes of the Greeks and Xenias, the Parrhasian, as their commander. 3. (12) When Darius died and Artaxerxes became establislied in the king- dom, Tissaphemes slandered Cyrus to his brother, charging that he was plotting against him. (13) The king believes him and arrests Cyrus, saying that he is gaing to put him to death ; but the mother of Cyrus begs him off and sends him back again to his province. 4. (14) But when he went back, after incurring danger and disgrace, (15) he planned that he might never again be in the power of his brother, but be king in his stead, if he could. (16) Now Parysatis, the mother of Cyrus, supported him, since she loved him more than the reigning Artaxerxes. 5. (17) If any one came to him from the king, Cyrus used to send them all back, disposing them so as to be more friendly to him than to the king. (19) And he also cared for the barbarians about him, that they might both be able to flght and be friendly to him. 6. But his Greek force he collected as secretly as possible, in order that he might take tbe king as unprepared as possible. (20) Accordingly he made his levy as follows. He ordered the captains of all the garrisons wliich he had in the cities to procure men of Peloponnesus, as many and as good as possible, declaring that Tissaphemes ■was plotting against his cities. (21) For the Ionian cities belonged to Tissaphemes, having been given to him formerly by the king ; but at this time all had revolted to Cyrus, except Miletus. 7. Tissaphemes perceiving that in Miletus people were deliberating upon these same measures, namely, to revolt to Cyrus, slew some and banished others. (22) But Cyrus, taking the exiles under his protection and collecting an army, 343 344 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. besieged Miletus both by land and sea and endeavored to restore them. This again was another pretext he had for collecting an army. 8. (23) And sending to the king, he kept urging that, because he was a brother of his, those cities should be given to himself rather than that Tissa- phernes should rule them, and his mother was cooperating with him in this ; so that the king did not perceive the plot against himself, (24) but he thought that by warring with Tissaphemes, he was expending his means upon his armies ; so that he felt no anger at their being at war. For Cyrus continu- ally sent to the king the incoming revenues from the cities which belonged to Tissaphernes, but which he happened to have. 9. But another army was collected for him in the Chersonesus which lies directly opposite Abydus, in the following manner. Clearchus was an exile from Sparta. (25) After associating with him, Cyrus both came to know him and admired him, and gave him ten thousand darics. He took the money and raised an army with these means, and sallying forth from the Chersonesus, carried on war with those Thracians who lived beyond the Hellespont, and con- tinually aided the Greeks ; so that the cities of the Hellespont voluntarily con- tributed means for him for the support of his soldiers. (26) This army also was thus secretly supported for him. 10. And Aristippus, the Thessalian, happened to be a guest-friend of his, and, hard pressed by his adversaries at home, he came to Cyrus and asked him for two thousand darics and three months' pay, saying that thus he would get the better of his adversaries. (27) But Cyrus gives him about four thousand darics and six months' pay, and begs him not to come to an agreement with his adversaries before he shall have consulted him. Thus again the army in Thessaly was secretly supported for him. 11. (28) But ProxenuSjthe Bceotian, a guest-friend of his, he bade take as many men as possibje and come to him, stating that he desired to make an expedition against the Pisidians, on the ground that the Pisidians were giving his country trouble. And Sophaenetus, the Stymphalian, and Socrates, the Achsean — these too being friends — he bade take as many men as possible and come to him, saying that he was about to fight Tissaphernes with the aid of the exiles from Miletus. And they did so. APPENDIX. Note. — In this Appendix many of the facts and principles of Latin atid Greek etymology are presented as a basis for a comparative study Of the elements of the two languages. The Appendix is designed to be used in con- nection with the "Lessons." Its purpose is primarily to aid the student in understanding the principles of the Greek language by comparing them with principles of the Latin language already known by him. As the facts here presented are intended for the use of beginners of the language and chiefly for. the purpose of illustration, the treatment of the subject matter is simple and incomplete. Numerous references to the Appendix will be found in the pre- ceding "Lessons," which, it is thought, will render it useful to teacherfe and students. It is hoped that the teacher will enlarge this comparative study of Latin and Greek whenever it can be done with advantage to the pupil. (See Suggestions to Teachers, pp. 7-9.) A secondary purpose of the Appendix is to furnish for convenient reference all the paradigms needed for the first half of the "Lessons " in the " Primer." ORTHOGEAPHY AKD SOUND. Alphabet. 1. The folio-wing table will show many similarities in the letters of the Latin and Greek languages ; the teacher will do well to explain them more fully as the letters occur in the text studied. The standard grammars will give additional information to the teacher. ITIN.l Gbexe. Namk a A a SXi>a alpha b B P ^rfra. beta g r y ydnfm gamma d A s SeXra delta e E £ 1 \lii\6v epsllon 1 Only those letters are given which correepond with the G-reeb alphabet, and they arc arraoged in the order of the G-reek alphabet. 345 346 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. Latin. Gbbek. Nami s. z Z ^ ^^ra zeta e H V ^Ta eta th © (9."/ OrJTa iheta i I L ISyra iota c, k K K Kdinra kappa 1 A A \dixl3Sa lambda m M /^ flV mu n N V vv nu X B f f xi 6 O O fUKpOV omlcron P n TT ttI pi r p P pZ rho s 2 o- s (Tiyfrn sigma t T T Tav tau yOO Y V V \j/iX.6v upsilon ph $ "^ 1 phi ch X X X' chi ps * "A f , psi n (1) (3 /iteya omega 2. Quantity of Vowels. — In Latin the vowels may be long or short in quantity; when long, they are marked thus, (a); when short, thus, (a). In Greek <•, o, are always short, ■q, ft), are always long, a, i, V, are long in some words, short in others, hence called doubtful vowels. The quantity of the doubtful vowels may be marked like that of Latin vowels. In this volume, however, a, t, v, have been marked when long, except when a circumflex accent stands over the vowel ; when unmarked these vowels are short. 3. Sounds of Vowels. — The Greek vowels are sounded like the corresponding Latin vowels as pronounced by the Eoman method of pronunciation, except v, v: v has the sound of the French u or German ii. Remark. — Every initial vowel or diphthong has a breathing, either roMj/ft (') or smooth ('). The rough breathing shows that h is sounded before the vowel or diphthong, thus, 6 = ho ; the smooth breathing simply indicates the ab.senoe of the ^sound. A diphthong takes the breathing over the second vowel, except an improper diphthong (6). APPENDIX. 347 4. Open and Close Vowels. — Latin. The open vowels are \ "' "' ( e, e, 0, 0. The close vowels are i, 1, u, ffl. Greek. a, a, (most open). £, r], o, 9> ? i ^^> "'"> ^'■• The diphthongs with the first vowel long and with iota subscript are sometimes called improper diph- thongs. 6. Pronunciation of Diphthongs. — By the Eoman method of pro- nouncing Latin, the following diphthongs are pronounced alike : — Latin. Greek. Latin. G REE ae = ai ei = £1 = au = au eu = ev oe = 01 ui ^ VI 7. Correspondence in Letters. — The Greek diphthongs were rep- resented in Eoman letters as follows : — ai, II, 01, av, €v, oil, vi, a, y, m. by ae, e or i, oe, au, eu, u, yi, a, e, o. 8. Mutes. — Those consonants which are called mutes are classi- fied as follows : — Latin. Greek. Labial mutes p b ph ^ P , or Ti^mutes Lingual mutes t d th r 8 d, or T-mutes Palatal mutes c,kg ch K y X, or K-mutes 1 See Notes on Lesson I. for another sound for «. 348 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. Mutes produced by the same organ of speech (lips, tongue, palate) are cognat6. By another classification mutes are divided into three orders : — smooth IT r K middle j8 8 y rough ^ ^ x Mutfes of the same order are said to be coSrdinate. 9. Liquids. — I, m, n, r, and the corresponding Greek letters X, /x, V, p, are called liquids. 10. Nasals. — m, n, n before a palatal (as in ink), and the cor- responding fjL, I/, y-nasal (y before a palatal or ^), are called nasals. 11. Double Consonants. — Latin x, z, and Greek i, f, i/^, are called double consonants ; x (cs) — i (kkt) ; z {ds) = ^ (So-) ; ^ = tto-. 12. Sounds of Consonants. — The Greek consonants are sounded like the Roman letters used to represent them. Note in particular that K and y are hard like c and g in can and go; a- s has the hissing sound of s, as in so, never the sound of 2 ; t has the sound of t in tin ; ^ has the sound of Eng. dz ; 6 has the sound of tJi in thin. 13. Vowel and Consonant Changes. — These changes are so numer- ous in both Latin and Greek that they can be best illustrated in the paradigms where they are found and also by the teacher from time to time in connection with the Greek text of the Lessons. See paradigms following. 14. Syllables. — The last syllable of a word is called the ultima; the next to the last, penult; the one before the penult, antepenult. 16. Quantity. — A syllable is long by nature when it contains a long vowel or diphthong : Belgae, tres; tui, rrj, toTs. 16. Accent. — Accent is practically a stress of voice upon the accented syllable. In Greek there are three marks of accent, also themselves called accents : — the acute, written ' ; the circumflex, written " ; the grave, written ^. These accent marks stand over the vowel of the accented syllable ; if the accented syllable contains a diphthong, the accent mark stands APPENDIX. 349 over the second vowel, except, of course, in case of an improper diphthong. There are no special marks of accent for Latin words. When it is desired to indicate the accented syllable of a Latin word, the acute accent is generally used. 17. Place of the Greek Accents. — The acute can stand on only one of the last three syllables of a word, the circumflex on one of the last two. A word with the acute on the ultima is called oxytone, on the penult " " paroxytone, on the antepenult " " proparoxytone. A word with the circumflex on the ultima is called perispomenon, on the penult " " properispomenon. A word with no accent on the ultima is called barytone. 18. Accent determined by Quantity, — In Latin, words of two syllables are accented on the penult; words of more than two syllables are accented on the penult, if the penult is long, otherwise on the antepenult. In Greek, (a) the acute can stand on either long or short syllables, (6) the circumflex only on syllables long by nature, cf. 15 ; (c) when the ultima is long by nature the acute cannot stand on the antepe- nult, nor the circumflex on the penult. Hence we have the foEawing General Rules for Greek Accent. Note that the length of the ultima as determining Greek accent is the basis of these rules. 19. A word with a short ultima, i£ acaiented (a) on the antepenult, has the acute, (6) on a short penult, has the acute, (c) on a long penutt, has the circumflex, (d) on the ultima, has the actite. 850 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. A word, with a long ultima, if accented (e) on the penult, has the acute, (/) on the ultima, has either the acute or circumflex; i>f. 35, Eemakk, 43, and the paradigms of the following paggs. 20. Important Exception in Quantity. — Final -at and -oi, except in the optative mode and the adverb oikoi, at home, have the effect of short vowels on the accent of penult and antepenult. 21. Change of Acute to Grave. — The acute on an ultima is changed to the grave when words follow in close connection. 22. Proclitics. — In Latin, prepositions standing before their cases are attached so closely to a following word as not to have an accent of their own ; cf . in partes. In Greek, a few words attach themselves so closely to a following word as not to have a separate accent. Such words are called pro- clitics (leaning forward). They are : — (a) 6, ij, oi, al, of the article ; (6) The prepositions iv in, eU into, c| (Ik) from; (c) The conjunctions el if, ^ °'PXV> V OdXaa-tra., land. government, sea. (Xopa-) (dpxa-) SINGULAR. N. \iip5. dpxTro-) (58o-) (S(opo-) N. Gallus helium N. avSpuiros o86$ Supov G. Gain helli G. av6piSirov dSoS 8(Spov D. Gallo hello D. dvSpiiirip dSip 8<6p i&pa G.D. av0pc&iroiv o'Soiv Sc&poiv N. Gain hella N. avSpuiroi dSoC Supa G. Gallorum hellorum G. dv6p(ixuv dSuv 8i&pv D. Gallis helUs D. avSpi&irois dSois 8(&pois A. Gallos hella A. dv6pc&irovs dSovs Swpa V. Gain hella V. avSpuiroi dSoC Supa Ab. Gallis hellls 356 IXDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. Attic Second Declension. Bemark. — The o-deolension includes a few stems in a. This u appears in all of the cases and takes i-suhscript where the common endings have i : thus, 6 vE^s temple, G. ve(&, D. vttf, A. vt&v; Dual ve(&, VEii>v ; Flu. vEia, ve<&v, veiji's, vEiis. The long ultima here does not exclude the accent from the antepenult (cf. irHkem'), and the gen. and dat. when accented on the ultima are oxytone. Third (Consonant) Declension. 40. Stems: In Latin this declension includes stems ending in a consonant and i ; stems in u constitute the fourth declension ; cf. 31. In Greelt this declension includes stems ending in consonants or close vowels (t, u); cf. 31. 41. Stems Ending in a Palatal : — lex, pax. (^oAayf, 6 vXa^, law. peace. phalanx. watchman. Ueg-) ipac-). (^oAayy-) (<}>vXa.K-) N. lex (for legs) pax (for pac-s) N. ^&Kayi (for <^aAayy-s) c|)vXo| (for vXaK-i) G. leg-is pac-is G. <|)d\o77-os <|>vXaK-os D. leg-l pac-i D. <)>dXa77-i (|ivXaK-i A. leg-em pac-em A. (t>dXa77-a iiXaK-a V. lex (see Nom.) pax (see Nom.) V. <]>dXa7| (see it>vXa| (see Ab leg-e pac-e . N.A.V G.D. Nom.) . <|>dXa77-E <)>aXd77-oiv Nom.) vXaK-E <|>iiXdK-oiv K. leg-es pac-es N. (|>dXa77-ES <|>vXaK-ES G. leg-um G. aXd77-vXdK-uv D. leg-ibus pac-ibus D. <|>dXa7$i (for ipdXayy-a-i) •j>ViXagi (for vXciK-(Tl) A. leg-es pac-es A. (|>dXa77-as <)> N. plebs N. ^\i^ (for <^X£>s) G. pleb-is G. <)>\e|3-6s D. pleb-i D. \(P-( A. pleb-em A. ^UP-a V. plebs V. ^\i^ Ab. /)Ze6-e N.A.\' . <|>Wp-6 .G.D. XEP-OlV N. pleb-es N. X4p.es G. pleb-ium G. (|>\cp-uv D. pleb-ibus D. «|i\€i|»C (for <^\£^-o-0 A. j)leb-es A. (|>\ip.as V. pZe6-es V. 4>\^P-E$ 357 Ab, pleb-ibus Note. — (a) Latin 6s is pronounced exactly like Greek f. (6) In Greek a labial (w, /3, 0) with v and -oiv take the circumflex. 44. Stems Ending in a Lingual : — I. Masculine and Feminine. pars, part. 6 vyd.'s, fugitive, r/ cXttis, hope, (part-) ((jivyaS-) (i\iri8-) N. pars [ior par (t)sY N. ^vy&s IXirts [for eX7ri(8)-s] [for vyd(S)-i] G. part-is G. ^vyiS-os l\ir(S-o5 D. part-i D. <|>u7dS-i c\ir(8-i A. part-em A. (|>vYdS-a i\ir(8-a V. pars (see Nom.) V. (^vYds(see Nom.) 4\wt (see Nom.) Ab. parl-e ^ N.A.V. ^vy&i-t IXirCS-e G.D. <|>vyd8-oiv 4\irCS-oiv N. part-es N. <|>v7dS-cs «\ir£8-es G. part-ium G. <|«i7d8-v7d(ri IXirCo-i [for £Airt(8)-v7dS-Es «Xir£8-£s Ab. part-ibus ' Cf. clvita(,t)- 358 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. nox, night. ri vvi, night. 6 \iu>v, lion. (noct-) (v«KT-) (A,£OVT-) N. nox [for noc ■(0-s] N. v{i5[foi-vvK(T)-s] keav [for Xeoi/(T)-s] G. noct-is G. V«KT-6S X^OVT-OS D. noct-l D. V«KT-C \fovT-i A. noct-em A. VlPKT-a \covr-a V. nox (see Nom.) V. v«| (see Nom.) \iov [for \e'ov('T-)] Ab. noct-e N.A.V. V«KT-£ \^0VT-6 G.D. VVKT-OiV XcdvT-oiv N. noct-es N. VVKT-6S X«OVT-tS G. noct-ium G. VUKT-WV Xe<5vT-«v D. noct-ibus D. [tor vuK(T)-a'i] Xc'ovo-i [for X.eo(vT)-(Ti] A. noct-es (is) A. vvKT-as \«0VT-OS V. noct-es V. viKT-«S X^0VT-6S Ab. noct-ibus Note. — (a) In Latin before s and in Greek before s a lingual mute is dropped. (6) In vul, after r is dropped, k with o- forms ?, i.e., a palatal mute with o- forms I (Lat. x). (c) Stems in om-- reject the case-ending s in the nom. sing., and lengthen o to u ; the Yoc. sing, of barytone stems is like the stem, except that the final r is dropped. (d) V and a lingual mute (t, S, 6) are dropped before s, and the preceding vowel is lengthened in compensation ; o becomes ou. II. Neutebs. caput, head. cor, heart. to Trpay/jui, deed, (capit-) (cord-) (irfidyfmT-) N.A.V. caput cor [for cor-(d)-'] N.A.V. irpd7|i.a G. capit-is cord-is G. 'irpd7|iaT-as D. capit-l cord-i D. irpaviiar-i Ab. capit-e cord-e N.A.V. irpa7|i,aT-E G.D. irpd'y|i.dT-oiv N.A.V. capit-a N.A.V. irpa7|j,aT-a G. capit-um G. irpaYindr-uv D.Ab. capit-ihus D. irpoyfiao-i [for 7rpay/«i(T)-o-t] APPENDIX. 359 Note. — (e) The nom., ace, and voc. of neuters are alike, and.in the plu. they end in o in Greek, a in Latin ; cf . 37. (/) Stems in ar- in Greek, and in two consonants in Latin, drop the final lingual in the nominative. 45. Stems Ending in a Liquid : — 1. In Latin the nom. sing, is the same as the stem, except : — (a) Stems in on- drop n ; led, for leo^ri), leon-is, etc. (6) Stems in gin- and din- have o in the nom. : alliludo, altitudin-is, etc. Other stems in in-, especially neuter nouns, have e instead of i in the nom. ; flumen, flumin-is, etc. (c) Stems in tr- retain an original e in the nom. : frater, frair-is, etc. (d) Many neuter stems in er- and or- have us in the nom. : opus, oper-is, etc. ; corpus, corpor-is, etc. 2. The nom., ace, and voc. plu. of neuters take the case-ending a; cf. 37, 44, N. e. leo, lion. (leon-) N. leo G. leon-is D. leon-l A. leon-em V. leo Ab. leon-e N. leon-es G. leon-um D. leOn-ibus A. leon-es V. leon-es kh. leon-ibus TTOlfiriV, firiv. shepherd. month. (TTOL/ieV-) (Mv) iroifi'^v V-^v iroi|Uv-os \ir\v-6s iroiii^v-i (itlv-C ' iroi,|i^v-a (iflv-a iroiji'^v V-iiV iroi|i.^v-E |iiiv-e iroin^v-oiv lirjvoiv iroi|iiv-es |I.T)V-CS iromiv-av (JLTIV-SV iroi|i.^ari (itio-C [for irotj«.e'(v)- 0-t] [for ixr](v)-(TC\ iroi|i^v-as |JlTiv-OS 6 ■qycfimv, leader. 6 8aijuv dv8p-uv (for avep-tov) D. patr-ibus D. iraTpd-o-i |j.T|Tpdv, i-oiv = oiv. (jr) Masculines in eo--, in the nom. sing., reject the case-ending -s and lengthen e to i; (cf. masc. and fem. stems in v-, p-, ovt-). (fe) Words like SuKpArris have recessive accent in the voc. sing. (cf. iror^p, dSeX^is) and form an irregular accusative in -riv as if they belonged to the first declension. 48. Stems in i- and v- (Lat. i- N. G. D. A. V. Ab. turris, tower, (lurri-^ turns turr\s turn turnm, -em turns, turri, -e manus, hand. (manu-) manus manvis (for m-is) manui manum marms nmtra and U-) . — 71 TToAis, city. (ttoXi-) N. ir6\i-s G. iri\£-a>s D. tr6\a (for 7roX£-i) A. ir<5\i-v V. iriiXi o lxOv^,fish. (ixOv-) (xSO-os ixei-i 'X9v 362 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. N.A.V. ir4\€-£ 1X6*-. G.D. iroX^-oiv tx9tp-oiv N. turrea manas sr.v. (for 7roA,£-es) ixev-6s G. turrxam manwxm G. ir6X€-o>v l\9i-av D. turrihxxs manihus D. irdXe-o-i lx9«-cri A. turres, -is manvLS A. iroXcis ixeos V. turres manvLS (for ix6v-a's) Ab. turrihus manibus Note. — (a) Final i or u of the stem always appears in the nom., ace, and voc. sing. (6) In 7r6\is, in the other eases, e is inserted before i, and then i is dropped, thus : 7roXe(i)-<»is, iroXe(i)-es, etc. The ace. plur. is irregularly like the nom. Con- traction takes place in the dat. sing, and nom. plur. after i is dropped, c-e regularly forming « (cf. 47, n. iJ). (c) The gen. sing, of ir6Xis and of some u-stems has the ending -ws for -os, which does not, however, affect the accent ; the gen. plu. follows the gen. sing. in accent. 49. Adjectives of the Vowel Declension. — In both Latin and Greek the masculine and neuter ~ follow the second declension, and the feminine the first declension. - ' bonus, good. dyaflos, good N. bonus bona bonum N. aYaOds d-yaefj d7a6iiv G. born bonae boni G. a-yaOoC d.'yaOiis d7a6DC D. bono bonae bono D. d7a6(u a7o6'n d7a6ia A. bonum bonam bonum A. d7aedv d7a9^v d7a6dv V. bone bona bonum V. 6.-idii d7a6^ d7a6av Ab. bono bona bono N.A.V. d7a6(i d7a6a d7a8i& G.D. d7a8otv d7a6atv d7a6otv N. boni bonae bona N. G. bonorum bonarum bonorum G. D. bonis bonis bonis D. A. bonds bonas bona A. V. boni bonae bona V. Ab. bonis bonis bonis d7a8oi d7a6aC d7a6d d7a6tov d7a9uv d7a6uv d7a6ois d7a6ai:s d7a6ois d7a9ovs d7a8ds d7a6d d7a8aC d7a6a( d7a6d APPENDIX. 36: amicjis, friendly. i^iOmk, friendly. N. amicus arnica amicum N. 4>CXias 4>i\(d (|>(Xiov G. amid amlcae amlcl G. (|>i,X(ov (|>i\(d5 <|>iXCou D. amico amlcae amlco V. +tX£» <|>iXC(!> A. amicum amicum amicum A. <|)(\lOV <|>i,XCav c|>CXi.ov V. amice arnica amicum V. <)>au ijuXCd i|>CXiov Ab. amlco arnica amlco. N.A.V. (t>iXC(i> 4>iXCd (|>iX( N. amlci amlcae amica G.D. (|>iXCoiv c|iiX(aiv i|)iXCoiv G. amicorum amlcdrum amlcdrum N. <|>C\ioi ijiCXiai <|>CXi.a D. amlcls amlcls amlcls G. <|>iXCwv •^iXCuv (|>i,Xluv A. amlcos arnicas amlca D- (|>iX(oi,s (jtiXCais <|>lXCoi5 V. amici amlcae arnica A. (|>i\Covs <|>i,X(as <|>(Xia Ab. amlcis amlcls amlcls V. ()>C\ioi, i)>(Xtai <)>CXia NoTE.-^ (a) The feminine in Greek, in tUe nom. and gen. plu., follows the masculine : ^IXiai, not ^iXfai ; (j>CKlav, not ipCKiGiv. (6) Many adjectives of this declension have the masc. and feiu. alike ; cf. tnstis, triste (3d decl. in Latin). (c) Adjectives in -eos and -oos suffer contraction, cf. stems in oa- and ed- of the first declension, thus : — 50. Contract Adjectives. — N. (X(oi5o-eos) Xpiiarois (xpy<^^o-) Xpio-i] (Xpweov) Xpvo-ovv G. (XpiJo-eou) Xpviv D. cv8a(|iov-i. ciSaC|ioi/i sweeter. N. tnstior tristius N. T)St(l)V il'Siov G. tnstior-is Irlstior-is G. ijStov-os D. tnstior-l tnstior-i D. ijStov-i A. tflstior-em tnstius A. ij8tov-a or TJSta iKSiov V. tristior tristius V. iqSlov Ab. tmtidr-e(i) trlstior-e(i) N.A.V. G.D. ijStovc ijSUvoiv N. tristior-es tristidr-a N.V. riStov-es or ijStovs TJStov-a or TJStu G. trlstior-um trlstior-um G. TJSidv-uv D. tristior-ibus tristior-ibus D. ijStoo-i A. tnstior-es(is) tristidr-a A. i|8tov-as or TJStovs i|8iov-a or ijStu V. trlstiSr-es tnstior-a Ab. , tristior-ibm tristior-ibus Note. — nelj^tov (for /ieytuv), greater, is declined in the same way. 55. Participle-Stems in vt- (Latin nt-) . — amans, loving. kwds, ha ving loosed. N. amans amans N. Xvo-os Xvo-aira XCo-ov G. amant-is amant-is G. Xiio-avT-os Xiiira(ri)$ XviravT-os D. amant-l amant-i D. Xvo-avT-i Xvo-do-i] Xvo-avT-i A. amant-em amans A. \vo-avT-a Xvo-atrav Xvo-av V. amans amans V. \v(ra$ Xvo-oo-a Xvo-av Ab. amant-e(i) amani-e(i) N.A.V. \viravr-t Xvrao-d Xvv Xvo-oo-uv Xvo-dvT-uv D. amant-ibus amant-ibus D. Xvo-acri Xvo-curais Xvo-do-i A. amant-es(is) amant-ia A. Xvv cxouo-a 4'xov \v6ei9 Xv6cio-a XuB^v G. e'xovT-os Ixovo-Tis e'xovT-os X«B4vT-os \v6e(irT|s XuBc'vT-os D. 4'xovT-i 4xo«iX(€6)v N. contr . Ti|lUV Tl\L&tra, Tl\l&V i^tXuv ^iXovo-a f|>iXovv G. TI|1UVT0S Tl|i<4o-1)S Tl|l,WVTOS <)>lXo€VTOS i.Xovo-T|S ifllXoVVTOS D. TIJIMVTI Tin(4o-[| TljlUVTl (t>lXoOVTl ()>iXavo-t| (jllXovVTl A. TijiUVTa Tip.uo'av Tl(l,fflv i|>iXovvTa i|>i,Xov(rav (^iXovv V. TLp.UV TLfJLtOO'a Ti|itOV <|>iXuv <)>iXova-a (|>iXoSv N.A.V. Tin«iv« Tlftiara, Tl(lfflVT£ <|>iXoSvTc c))iXovo-a ()llX0VVTE G.D. Tl(J,lSvT0lV Tip.f^o'aiv TlJlcivTOlV ()>lX0VVT0lV (|>iXovo-aiv <|)lX0VVT0lV N.V. TinfivTts Tl|jiuo-ai. TlfiUVTa cfiiXovvTes i(>iXova-ai ()>iXovvTa G. Tl]L&VTtaV ' TLfJLCOO'COV TLfJLI&VTUV 4»lX01IVT6>V (|>iXov(ruv <|>iXo{ivTa>v D. tX|i.uo-i Ti)i(Sirai.s TljlUO-l <|>i.XoSiri <|>iXova-ais (f>iXovo'i A. Tinfivras Tl|iiio-as Ti.|imvTa 4>iXovvTas <|>i.Xo{la-ds <^i,XovvTa Eemakk. — {SrjXi lui') dtiXtov, showing, is 1 contracted exactly like ^i\uv. APPENDIX. 367 Note. — (a) An o-sound absorbs an a- or an e-sound and becomes w, but e-o (also o-e) and o-o give ov. (6) e is absorbed in ou. (c) Accented contract penults and antepenults follow the general laws for accent ; for a contract ultima, see 36, n. 6. 58. Comparison of Adjectives. — In Latin, adjectives are regularly compared by adding to the stem of the positive the following endings : — COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE. Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. Fern. Neut. ior ior ius issimus issima issimum In Greek, one method of comparing adjectives is by adding to the root of the word the following endings : — COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE. Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. Fern. Neut. iCHV IWV lOV IITTOS tCTTT) KTTOV Remark. — For the declension of adjectives of this sort, cf . 54 ; superlatives are declined like adjectives of the vowel-declension. But the most common method of comparison in Greek consists in adding to the masculine stem of the positive the following endings : — COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE. Masc. Fern. Neut. Masc. Fern. Neut. TCpOS Tcpa Tcpov TOTOS Tarr) TttTOV Remark. — Comparatives and superlatives of this kind are declined accord- ing to the vowel-declension. Note. — Some very common adjectives in both Latin and Greek are irregu- larly compared. 59. Cardinal Numbers. — 1. umis, una, unum ets, |ita, €V 2. duo, duae, duo Sio 3. tres, tria Tpets, TpJo 4. quattuor Wo-o-apcs, Wo-o-apa 5. qulnque trivTt 6. sex n 7. septem iwT& 8. octo OKTti 9. novem Evv^a 368 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. S^Ka cvScKa Si&ScKa TpfKTKaCSeKa ctKO(ri(v) TpiaKOvra Tctro-apdKOVTa ITJVT^KOVTa CKardv SidKi\i.o%. 10. decern II. undecim 12. duodecim 13. tredecim 20. vlginti 30. trlginta 40. quadraginta 50. qinnqnagintd 100. centum 200. ducentl, -ae, ■ 300. trecentl 400. quadringenti 1000. mille 2000. duo mllia Specially declined are the following : — N. unus una G. unius unius D. uni um etc. (like bonus) N. duo ^ duae G. duorum duarum D. duobus duabus A. duos, duo duos Ab. duobus duabus N. tres M. & F. tria n. G. trium trium D. tribus tribus A. tres, tris tria v. tres tria Ab. tribus tribus Remark. — Instead of V l iroC ot A. me te se A. Ih^,,u ri i V. tu. Ab. me te se N.A.V. G.D. Vlfv N. nos vos N. ijHtts «(«tS a-i|»ts S nostrum ' ^" 1 noitrl ( vestrum \ vestrl sul G. TJlifiv v|ifiv a-(|)wv D. noils vobls sibi D. liHitv VfltV (r4>Ciri A. nos vos se A. TJHOS v|id$ ds V. vos Ab. nofeis vobls se Note. — (a) s«i and oS are most often used as reflexives, of himself, herself, itself; the nominative is wanting. (6) The stems of the ^ng. (except the nominatives, which are differently formed) are: it^- (Lat. me), ae (te), e (se). The stems of the dual are: vui- (Lat. nos), a-. The stems of the plural are : in^e-, vfte-, a-^e- ; e is contracted with most of the endings. (c) /wD, iwl, lii ; aov, G. a,\\i\\av D. dXX'^Xois A. aXX'fjXovs dXX'^Xaiv dXXCiriv airois, -ats eavTovs, -OS, -d or (rds a-Arovs, -as Note. — (a) The reflexive pronouns are formed from the stems of the per- sonal pronouns compounded with airo-, thus : ^/le + airo, ae + airo, i + airo, etc. ; cf . 60, n. 6. (6) Like oS, these pronouns have no nominative ; airAs in the nominative is used as a reflexive in all persons, of. 61. (c) In the plural both stems are declined separately, but the third person has also compounds from i + airo. (d) ffeavToS and eauToO are often contracted : cravroO, airov, etc. 63. Article. — The Latin language has neither definite nor in- definite article. The Greek has the definite article, the. Its stem (to-) is inflected in mpst of its forms like ayaOo's : — N. o 11 G. TOV Tfjs D. Tw rfj A. t6v ri\v ri Note. — (a) ^, 6, ol, al are proclitics (22, a). (6) For the rare feminine forms rd and raiv, the masculine are commonly employed. T* N. oi ovTiva A. N.A.V. «TIV€ G.D. N. G. d: oirivEs UVTlVttV or OTWV oto-Turi or OTOIS ov|iai XuoC)ir)v Xvou XvecrSai Xv6(l,EV0S Xv(ro|iai Xv(roC|j.T]v Xvo-Eo-Sai Xvo-6|i€vos £Xvo-d|xr)v Xv(reT]v Xv6u Opt. Like the Xv6ii, loose: Xvu, Xvo-u, EXva-a, X^vKa, X^Xv)iai, IXvOijv. APPENDIX. 377 76. Present System Active (cf. amo'). MODE. FBEBBNT. IMPBREEOT. PRESENT. IMPBRPEOT. Iiidic. 1. amo 2. amd-s 3. ama-t 1. amd-mus 2. amdrtis 3. ama-nt amaba-m amdbd-s amaha-t amabdrmus amdbd-tis amdba-nt 1. \va 2. Xvci-s 3. Xvci 2. Xve-Tov 3. XVC-TOV 1. Xvo-|icv 2. \vi-rt 3. Xvoipo-i (Xio-vo-i) t"-Xio-v (-Xvc-s €-X« 4-Xv€-T0V 4-Xiif-TTiv 4-Xvo-|icv i-\v(-Tt t'-XiJo-v Subj. PRESENT. 1. ame-m 2. am^-s 3. ame-t 1. ame-m,us 2. ame-tis 3. ame-nt IMPBRPBCT. amdre-m amdre-s amare-t amare-mus amdre-tis amdre-nt PRESENT. 1. Ua 2. X^B-s 3. Xvxt 2. XvT|-TOV 3. Xi)t|-Tov 1. Xva-|uv 2. Xvi]-TC 3. Xvu-a-i (X«<»-vo-i) Opt. 1. X«oi-|jii 2. Xvois 3. Xvoi 2. Xioi^ov 3. XiioC-TT|v 1. Xvoi-|UV 2. Xvoi-TC 3. Xvoic-v Imv. 2. ama 2. ama-te rUTURE. 2. amd-to 3. ama-io 2. amd-tote 3. ama-nto 2. Xv€ 3. XH-Tto 2. Xw-Tov 3. Xv^-TWV 2. XVC-TC 3. XviS-vTuv or Xv^Toirav lufin. amd-re XVEIV Parte. amd-ns ama-nt-is Xvuv, Xvovo-a, Xvov Xio-VT-os, Xiioilo-qs, etc. 378 Inductive greek primer. 77. Present System Middle (Passive) (cf. amor). MODE. PRESENT. IMPEKFBOT. PRBSBMT. IMPERFECT. Ind. 1 . amo-r 2. ama-ris (re) 3. ama-tur 1. ama-mur 2. ama-minl 3. ama-ntur PKESENT. 1. ame-r 2. ame-ris (re) 3. ame-tur 1. ame-mur 2. ame-mim 8. ame-ntur amaba-r amabd-ris (re) amabortur amahSrmur amaba-mini amaba-ntur 1. Xvo-)i.ai 2. Xwi 3. Xw-Toi 2. Xw-o-eov 3. Xw-o-Bov 1. Xv6-|j,eea 2. \it-a-dt 3. XwO-VTOl • l-Xv6-|ii)v l-Xvov ^XW-TO e-Xw-o-eov €-Xve--)i,EV \vtr6-fu9a 2. XvOTJ-TE Xv-Kt- (-a, -») ttrov or ctt|rov " «lTtlV cl^TT|V Xe-Xv-|Uvoi (-ai, -o) ctficv tir\fuv " «It£ ttiiTe " ctEV Etijo-av Xf-Xwo XE-Xi-o-Bw Imv. X^Xv-o-eov XE-XVi-o-euv X^Xv-o-Be XE-X<-cre»v or XE-Xi-o-euo-av Infln. amatus esse XE-XO-o-Sai Parte. amatus Xe-Xv-|Uvos, -i|, -ov 382 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. 82. FuT. Perf. Mid. (Pass.) 83. Fikst Passive System. MODE. IBT AOBIST. iBT FUTUBB. Xc-Xv'(ro-)iai i-\i-6ri-v Xv-6'^-cro-|iai Xe-Xv-o-ci l-Xv-flt|-s Xv-6'^-o-ti Xe-X«-(rav Infin. Xe-Xv-o-6-(r9oi XiH6fi-vai Xv-9^-o-£-o-9ai Parte. Xc-Xv-0-6-|16V09, -11, -ov Xv-SeCs, -eto-a, -iv APPENDIX. 383 84. Second Aorist System. XetVo) (Xwr), leave. 85. Second Pekfect System. MODE. ACTIVE. MIDDLE. 2d perfect. 2d pluperfect. e'-\iiro-v l-Xiird-|i,i)v XeXoiira eXeXoIiTTI, -ElV e-Xiire-s i-XCirov X^oiiras eXeXoCittis, -CIS c-Xiire 4-X£ire-T0 X^Xoiirc IXeXoCitei Ind. i-\lvt-TOv l-Xtirt-crBov XeXoCTrarov eXeXoCiteitov i-\i,iti-Ti\v f-\nri-ir9j\v XeXotiraTov IXeXoiiteCttiv 4-\[iro-|ji«v l-Xiir6-)i.E6a XeXoCira|iEv IXeXoCiteiiiev i-\liti-r( l-XCm-o-Be XeXoCirare IXeXoCiteite €-Xiiro-v l-X£iro-vTo XcXoCirao-i EXEXoCiTEo-av 2d perfect. XCiro) XCiraifiai XcXoCtru XCirflS XCirn XcXoCiTQS XCirxi XeXoCirg Subj. \£irt|Tov XCirt|(r6ov Xc\oCin)Tov XCin]ir6av XeXoCittitov XCirufuv Xix(i|u6a XcXoCiroiJLcv XCirT|Te XCin)(r6£ XeXoCiniTe XCiroKTi XCiruvrai XEXoCiroiri XCiroiiii XiiroC|iiT)v XcXoCiroi|i,i XCirois XCiroio XeXoCotois XCiroi XCiroiTO XeXoCitoi Opt. XCiroiTov XCiroto-6ov XeXoCitoitov XittoCtiiv Xiiro[(r6i]v XEXoiiroCrrjv XCiroi)iEV XiiroCfieSa XcXoCiroiiiEv XClTOlTt XCiroio-SE XcXoCiroiTc XCiroiEV XCiroivTO XcXoCiroiEv \lirt Xiirov XiTtlra Xiirlo-eu XCircTov X(ir{(r6ov Imv. Xiir^Tuv Xiir^irSuv XtirtTe XlTr€ffw€ XiirivToiv 01" Xiir4v ov Xiir^TMcrav Xiiiia-6a»rav Infin- Xivetv Xixlo-Oai XcXoiirivat Parte. Xiiriiv, -ovo-a. Xin-dfjiEvos, ^, XcXoiircis, -via, -6s -6v -ov 384 TNin'CTIVK (iREEK PRIMER. 86. Second Passive System. <7Te\\o) (^(TTek), send. MODE. 2d aoeist. 2d ruTnBE. ia-T&Kriv o-raX^o-oiiai lo-rdXi]; o-TaX^a-» lirrdXi) o-raX^o-ETai fnd. ccrr&Xi]Tov (rTaX^o-€o-6ov i(rra\{\Tr\v o-ToX'ficreo-Oov iiTT6\r\\uv crTaXi| /{. or none. First perfect system, -Ka- (plup. -ki]- or -k«i.-). Second perfect system, -o- (plup. -r|- or -a-) . Perfect middle system, none (future perfect -0-%-). First passive system, -Be- (future passive -6r|V 3. -VT»V or -T. oL7a66s, -ii, -6v, good, brave. 1, 6. a7a|iiai, aor. iiydcrdriu, admire. 1, 9. dyv^XXu, a77eA.S, iJYyei\a, ^yye\Ka, fiyyeKfiai, iiyyeKBriv, report, announce. 7, 13. cIyyeXos, -ov, 6, messenger. 2, 21. d,7opd, -5j, 71, assembly; place of as- sembly, market-place; market, pro- visions on sale. 2, 10. a^opd^u, -affo), [oyopcf], buy in the market, buy. 3, 14. 0L7P10S, -id, -ov, wild. 2, 7. a.70), iJ|a, ^70701/, ?ixa, ■?7M"", ^X^W, lead, bring, conduct. 3, 5. d7(iv, -Svor, 6, game, contest. 2, 10. dSc\<|>6s, -ov, 6, brother. 1, 3. dSiKc'u, -iiiTui, iiSlxriaa, [a + Siicos], (Zo injustice, harm, wrong. 3, 9. d-8iKos, -OK, wnjiisf, bad; as a subst., 6 &S1K0S, the wrong-doer ; rh &Sikov, injustice. 6, 8. 'A6T|vatos, -d, -ov, Athenian. In the Anab. as a substantive, 'AffTjcaTos, 5, an Athenian. 8, 15. aSXov, -ov, TO, pn«e in a contest. 2, 10. d6poC£ai, -o/o-tt), collect, muster troops; mid., assemble. 1, 2. d-6v)ios, -OK, without heart, disheartened, spiritless. ' 4, 9. 387 ai, aX, ats. See 6, i>s> Al7virTios, -la, -01/, Egyptian. As a substantive, Ai7i57rTtos, a, an Egyp- tian. 4, 2. Alvidv, -S.V0S, S, an Aenidnian. ' The Aem&nians lived in Thessaly, occu- pying the valley of the Sperchelus. 2,6. aipcTos, -i\, -ip, taken, chosen; 01 aipt- Toi, the delegates. -3, 21. aip^ci), -iiati), it\ov, ■^pit)iia, -7]fj.ai, ^p407]v, take; mid., take for one^s self, choose. 3, 5. al'po), apu, ^pa, ^pna, ^p/iai, iipBt)v, raise, lift up. 5, 3. alcr6dvop.ai, fuo'Bij&o^ai, 7l(r06ft7jv, tJo-Btj- fiai, perceive, become aware of. 1, 8. alcrxvvo), -a, disgrace, shame ; a'urxuv- fiai, pass. dep. , feel ashamed before, stand in awe of. 3, 10. atr^u, -iiffa, yrriaa, ask, demand, often followed by two ace. ; mid., beg, entreat. 1, 10. alTido|jiai, -diro/iat, mid. dep., blame, accuse, charge. 2, 20. alrios, -Id, -ov, chargeable with; re- sponsible ; the cause of. 4, 15. dKivdKT|s, -ov, 6, Persian dagger, short and straight. 2, 27. a,K0VTlt,a, hurl a javelin, hit or wound with a javelin. 8, 27. dKOvo), iKovao/iiai, fJKOvira, axi/Koa, i)Kov- aS-nv, hear. 2, 6. dKpdiroXis, -eas, r/, upper city, the high- est part of a city, citadel. 2, 1. dxpos, -a, -ov, highest; rh dxpov, top; Toi &Kpa, heights, hills. 2, 21. 388 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. aKOiv, -ov, -eiio-o?, [oA.7)fl^s], speak the truth. 7, 18. aXCtrKOjiai, a\^(rofiai, eaKav or 'i/i\(oi', €d\a:ca or T^Kaica, be taken, captured, used as a pass, of alpsa. 4, 7. dXXd, but; Aw' S/ims, but yet; at the ■beginning of a speaker's words, untranslated, or like the Bng. well ; Itwh Sc'xo/uai, well, I accept it. dXX'/jXoiv, -aiv, -oiv, one another, each other. 2, 27. aXXos, -T], -o, other, rest of, another; & &\Kos, the rest, the other; ri &\\a M/iriffe, in other respects ; t1 kuI &\\o (i!\rjr), any other kind of ; Sa.Aoi &\\a>s, some in one way, others in another; &\\oi &\\o8ei', some from one direction, others from another; in various directions. 1, 7. aXXus, otherwise, differently. See axxos. 6, 11. aX(j>iTov, -Ov, t6, usually plur. , grains, groats; barley-grains, barley-meal. 6, 6. aXu, dXcitrofiai, aX<6a-oivTo. See oXCo-- KO|jiai. fijio, at the same time, together with; a/ia T!? vfifpa, at daybreak. , 2, 9. &|i,a|a, -ns, 71, wagon, heavy wagon for hauling freight. 5, 7. d|i.a|iT6s, -6v, for wagons, fit for wagons. 2, 21. d|JiapTdvo>, afiapT'fjffofj.ai, ^fiaprov, Tifxdp- Tt)Ka, -rtiiOLi, Tiii.apTi\Br)v, miss, fail, err. 6, 12. d|j.axet, without a battle. 7, 9. 'A)i,ppaKi(iTi)5, -ou, 6, an Ambraciot or Ambracian. Ambracia was a city of Epirus, about 80 stadia, or 7 miles, nortli of the Ambracian Gulf. See 'A)i,irpaKi(&TT|s. 7, 18. dficlvuv, -ov, gen. -opos, comp. of ayaB6s, better, superior, braver. 7, 3. d-p.cX^(ii, -^(Tii), T]p,4\naa, neglect, slight. 3, 11. d-ji'tixttvos, -on, without means; im- practicable; insurmountable. 2,21. aiiirtXas, -ou, ij, vine. 2, 22. 'A)i,irpdKi(&TT|5. See 'A|j.ppaKi(iTi]s. dp,C, prep, with ace, rarely gen., about, around. 1, 8. d)i.(j>i.-X^Y<'i speak on both sides, dispute, quarrel. 5, 11. d|jL<|>6Tcpos, -d, -Of, both ; rij TraiSe &.fid)o~ Tepa, both the sons. 1, 1. ov. 1, 10. av, for iav, if. See ijv. dvd, up, opposed to Kwra, prep, with aoc. ; avh Kpdras, up to one's strength, at full speed. 8, 1. dva-PaCvw, (^^iitropLat, M^ijv, ^edTiua, ^-fia-w and ^8ri(ra causative), go up, embark, mount, proceed from the coast into the interior. 1, 2. dvaPao-is, -ews, ri, upward march or expedition, ascent. 4, 9. dva-7i7v. dva|vpC8Es, -av, at, trousers, such as were worn by the Persians. 5, 8. dva-iTECSu, persuade, induce. See ireCecD. 4, 11. dv-apird^u, snatch up, carry off. 3, 14. dva-o-Tos. See dv-C(D, turn back or around, retreat. See a-rpi^a. 4, 5. dvfi-crx^irSai. See av-i\, bring back tidings from a place or person, report. See ayyiKKa. 3, 19. dir-aYopEvu, refuse, renounce, give out through exhaustion, be fatigued, fail. 6, 3. aTr-6.ya, bring or lead away or back. See aya. 3, 14. dir-aiWu, ask for or demand as one's right. See atrEu. 2, 11. dira\6s, -Kcvai. See diro-Yi-yviiirKci). dir-^S(i)Ka. See diro-SCSup.1. dir-^6avov. See diro-Sv^o-Kw. dir-eijii, go from or aioay, depart, desert. 3, 11. dir-cXauvti), drice away, ride or march away, retreat. See IXavvw. 4, 5. dir-cXSiiv. See dir-Epxo)i.ai. dir-Epxoiiai, jfo away, come from, with- draw, desert. See Epxo[j.ai. 1, 4. dir-^o-ird. See diro-o-irdu. dir-^X<»> &* away from, be distant; refrain from. See «x"- 3i 20. dir-^Ya'yov. See dir-d'yci>. dir-'gciv. See &ir-Ei|ii. dir-lj\avvov. See dir-EXavvu. dir-fi\8ov. See dir-^pxopiai. dir-iEvai, dir-i|i.Ev. See dir-Ei|u. dird, prep, with the gen., from, from off, away from; by means of. 1, 2. diro-Pipd^ci), cause to go off or away from, disembark (trans.). 4, 5. diro-pXEiru, look away from, look forth, look steadily. See fiXivo. 8, 14. diro-Yi-yviio-Kci), decide negatively, re- linquish or abandon a thought or purpose. See yiyvda-Ka. 7, 19. diro-SESpdKa. See diro-SiSpmrKu. diro-8££Kvvp.i, (56f|(u, ^Set^o, BeSeix^, Sfdsiytiai, iSeixBv), show forth, ap- point. 1, 2. diro-SiSpoUTKU, (^dpaaafiCLi, edpav, SeSpdKo), run off, escape, sneak away. 4, 8. diro-SCSufii, give back or over, return what is due ; pay. See SCSufii. 2, 11. 390 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. diro-SoCvai, diro-Siao-u. See preceding. diro-Kptvo^ai, -Kpivovfiai., a-jreKplpdfiTjVj reply, answer. 3, 20. diro-KTcCvo), -KTCfUj aneKTeiva and etTre- KTavov, dirEKTOi/o, Mil, put to death. 1,3. diro-Xafipdvu, take back, receive back. See Xa|j.pav-(a'T'r||ii. diro-o-vXdd), strip pff, spoil, plunder. 4,8. diro-TcCvw, (rei/w, ^retva, reroKa, Tero/AOi, €Ta.97iv), Stretch away, extend. 8, 10. diro-if>a(v, show forth, reveal; mid., show one's self, appear; show sonle- thing of one's own, express an opinion. See <|>aCv. 6, 9. diro-<(iEii7EV7u. 4, 8. diro-xupEu, go away from, retreat, withdraw. 2, 8. d7ro-i|/T|<|>C^op.ai, vote away from, vote ^"^ No," vote against. 4,15. airTcii, mid., touch. 5, 10. dir-a)X6p,iiv, -t&XovTO. See dir-dXXv}j.L. dpa, postpositive inferential particle, therefore, then; probably. 7, 18. 'ApapCd, -as, T], Arabia. 5, 1. 'Apa^s, -01/, i, the-Araxes. See Map. 4, 19. 'AppdKi)s, -ov, d, Arbaces. 7, 12. dp-yvpiov, -ou, t6, silver, silver money, money. 4, 13. dp£T^ , -Tjs, 71, fitness, virtue, goodness ; good service. 4, 8. 'Apiaios, -ov, 6, Ariaeus. 8, 5. dpiSpids, -ov, 6, number, enumeration. 2,9. 'ApCo-TiTriros, -ou, 6, Aristippus. 1, 10. apio-Tos, -V, -w, fittest, bravest, best, best in rank, noblest; most advan- tageous. 3, 12. 'ApKos, -d5oj, d, an Arcadian, native of Arcadia. Arcadia was a country in the center of the Peloponnesus. 2,1. dpKTos, -ou, ri, bear, the Constellation Ursa Major, north. 7, 6. dp|ia, -uTos, t6, chariot for war. 2, 16. ap|ui)i.a|a, -tjs, ti, covered chariot. 2, 16. dpird^oi, -dffu, ^ipiracra, i^pnaKa, '/jpirdanai, ripwiffBjiv, seize, carry off, plunder. 2, 25. 'ApT07lp(rT|s, -ov, 6, Artagerses. 7, 11. 'ApTo^6'p|T]s, -ou, o, Artaxerxes. 1, 1. 'ApToirdTus, -ov, 6, Artapates. 6, 11. "Apreiiis, -'Sos, ri, Artemis, the Lat. Diana. 6, 7. dpxaios, -di-oy, old, ancient; ri apxaiov, formerly. 1, 6. dpx^, -Tjs, 71, beginning, rule, govern- ment, province. 1, 2. apxto, &p^a>, fip^a, fipyp-ai, iipx^v, begin, rule, command; as a substantive, apxo>v, 6, leader, ruler, commander. 1, 2 ; 1, 8. dp, gleam, flash. 8, 8. &-a\'<)$, -4s, comp. -iartpos, superl. -eVroToj, without stumbling, sure, safe; iv aa^ahe!, in a safe place. 8,22. d-aXus, superl. aa^aXiaTara, safely, 3, 11. a-raKTOs, -iv, without order, in disor- der, not in battle array. 8, 2. dTi|id,^(ii, dishonor. 1, 4. 'Attikos, -■ti, -iv, Attic, Athenian. Attica was a country in the south- eastern part of Greece ; Athens was its capital. 5, 6. au, again, in turn. 1, 7. aiiri), avrai. See ovtos- avrCKa, immediately, at once. 8, 2. a^T^Si, there, in this or that place. 4,6. airdfiaTos, -tj, -ov, self-moved; atrh or in ToS aiiTondTou, voluntarily, of one's own accord. 2, 17. airofioX^ai, desert. 7, 13. auTii|i,oXos, -on, 6, deserter. 7, 2. airds, -I), -6, ipse, self; d airis, idem, same ; in oblique cases it is the ordi- nary pron. 3d pers. 1, 2. atiTov, in this or that place, here, there, 3, 11. avTov. See cavrov. d<|)', for 0Tr(( when o is elided before a rough breathing. d,i|>-aip^-C-iirir€vu, ride off or back on horse- back. 5, 12. ditt-Co-Ti))!!, mid., stand off or away, revolt. See tCv6iov, -ov, t6, wormwood. 5, 1. B. BaPv\(&v, -Sivos, fi, Babylon. See Map. 4,11. BapvXoivCd, -OS, r/, Babylonia. The dis- trict in which Babylon was situated. 7,1. pdSos, -ovs, t6, depth. 7, 14. Pa6v5, -eio, -i, deep. 7, 14. pdXavos, -ov, T], acorn; of palm, date. 6, 10. PdWu, j8o\M, iBaKov, BeSKiiKa, 048\ri- fiai, ^Bhiidriv, throw, hit, stone. 3, 1. PapPapiKJs, -l\, -6ii, barbaric, barba- rian. 2, 1. PapPapiKus, in a barbarian way; in the barbarian tongue. 8, 1. pdpPapos, -ov, 6, a barbarian; ot pdp- Bapoi, people who were not Greeks, barbarians. 1, 5. Pao-iXcCd, -as, ri, kingdom. 1, 3. Pao-CXcios, -ov, belonging to a king, royal ; ri SairiAeio, as a substantive, royal residence, palace. 2, 7. PouriXcvs, -fas, 6, king. 1, 5. PcuriXcvu, be king. 1, 4. BeXcotvs, -uos, S, Belesys, 4, 10. PcXtuttos. See PeXrtuv. PcXrtwv, -ov, better, BeAnaros, -ii, -ov, best, irregular comp. and superl. of d7a66$. 1, 6. pcd, -oj, 71, force. 4, 4. Pid^ofiai, mid. dep., use force, compel. 3,1. Pialioi, forcibhi, violently. 8, 27. pCos, -ov, d, life. 1, 1. PXciru, Bf^e'l'a, eB^e'jia, look; of things, /ace, poinf (towards). 8,10. Podu, shout, cry alotid. 8, 1. Boic&Tios, -a, -ov, Boeotian. Bceotia lay northwest of Attica. 1, 11. 392 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. PouXeti^, plan, plot ; mid., deliberate, consult. 1, 4. PoiXofiai, ^ouKi](roiiat, $e$oi\ri/iai, iBov- KilB-iiv or iiBou\iieriv, wish. 1, 1. PpaSeus, slowly. 8, 11. Ppaxvs, -eio, -V, short; $paxi (adv. ace), short distance. 5, 3. Pp^Xu, wet, moisten. 4, 17. Pw)i6s, -ov, 6, altar. 6, 7. ■ydp, postpos., for; /col yip, etenim, for. 1, 6. ra«XtTi]s, -ou, S, Gaulites. 7, 5. y4, postpos. and enclitic, at least, you see, you know. 3, 9. 7c^^vT||i,ai, yiyova. See 'yC^vofiai. y4\as, -aros, 6, laughter. S, 18. 7CVE(r6ai, 7CvoC)it)v. See ylyvofai. 'yevos, -ous, tS, birth, race, family. 6, 1. Ycppo-4>o5, -ov, d, hill. 5, 8. 7C7V0p.aL, y€V'f}(rofji.ai, iyev6iAT)v, yeyai/a, yeysi/Tiiuu, become, be born. 1, 1. yiyv^tTKto, yvditro^ai, eyvai/, eyvwtca, tyvoKTiiai, iyvtiiTdriv, know. 3, 2. rXoSs, -or, i, Glus. 4, 16. 7voCt|v, 7viicro)i,ai. See y\,yv&(i>, yp&^w, eypx\f/a, yeypaipa, yiypafi.- /tai, cypdtpv, write. 6, 3. 7ii)i,vd£, exercise. 8, 7. 7V|i,v^s, -^Tos, d, light-armed soldier. 2, 3. yvvl\, yvifMK6s, Vi woman, wife. 2, 12. FuPpvas, -ou or -a, 6, Oobryas. 7, 12. A. 8", by elision, for SL SaKptiu, weep. 3, 2. Sairavdd), -iiaa, spend or expend money. 1, 8. AdpSas, -aros, S, the Dardas. See Map. 4, 10. AdpeCos, -ov, 6, Darius. 1, 1. SdpEiKos, -ov, 6, daric. A Persian coin containing about as many grains of gold as 5J American dollars. 1, 9. Sa(r|j.ds, -ov, 6, tax, revenue. 1, 8. S^, postpos., but, and. 1, 1. 8eSi<6s, SeSoiKa. See ScCSu. SE'Sofiai. See 81Sa)|ii. SET)6f]vai, Set. See Sio. ScCSu, Seiffo/xai, edeta-a, S^SoiKa and Sedia used as presents, fear, be afraid. 3, 10. S^CXt), -r)s, fi, afternoon, evening. 8, 8. SeiX6s, -^, -6v, cowardly. 4, 7. Seirai.. See Seu. SEKa, ten. 2, 10. S^vSpov, -ov, t6, tree. 2, 22. Se|o|iai. See S^x.o)i,ai. Sclids, -a, -6v, right; ii Se|io (sc. xelp), right hand, pledge; ev Seji^, on the , right (hand). 2, 15. S^p)j.a, -aros, t6, the skin as removed from the body, hide. 2, 8. Sevpo, hither. 3, 19. SevTEpos, -d, -ov, second; rb Ziirepov, second time. 8, 16. 8EX0|iiai, Se^o/iai, fde^a/iiiv, SeSeyftai, eSe'xffi)!', receive, accept. 8, 17. 8e, drive, ride, march through, charge through. See cXaivu. 6, 12. 8i.-^pX0|iai, come or go through; \6yos .SiTj\6e, a rumor spread through (the army) or abroad. See cpxo|i.ai. 4, 7. 8i-Eirird ^old apart, be apart or distant. See 'i\a. 8, 17. Si-^Xao-E. See Si-eXavvu. 8i-TiX6ov. See Si-lpxo|xai.. Si-(6^pd, -as, 11, tanned skin; bag. 5, 10. 8C<|ipos, -ov, 6, wagon or chariot seat. 8, 10. SuiKo), pursue, chase, rout an enemy. 4,7. Siupvl, -vxos, ri, trench, canal. 7, 15. 8o6fjvai, 8oCt|v. See 8£8m|ii. SoKEcii, S6^ii), eSafa, £ESo7juai, iSixSui", think, suppose ; doxe'!, it seems, seems best; ra S6^apTa, the things which seemed best or were determined upon. 2, 1. AoXoi)f, -owos, d, (only in the plu.), a Dolopian. The Dolopians or Dolopes lived in the southwestern parts of the Pindus range. 2, 6. 8o£ds, 8o|(i>. See 8oke(i>. SopKois, -iSos, fi, gazelle. Doboas. 5, 2. Sopv, -aros, t6, spear used by the Greek hoplite. 8, 18. Sovvai, Sovs. See S(8(i>|u. Sovir^u, -iiaai, rattle, clash. 8, 18. Spciravi]-i|>a'pos, -ov, scythe-bearing. 7, 10. 8pciravov, -ov, t6, scythe. 8, 10. Spo'|ios, -ou, 6, a run, race ; Sp6fi,(e, with a run, at full speed. 2, 17. 394 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. Suvafiai, Svrljffo/iai, SfSiiirifiai, iSvirl]BT]v or ijSm^ffriv, be able, can ; a>s fiiKurra iSimro, as much or as well as he could; be worth, valued at. 1, 4. Svvajiis, -ems, v, force, ability ; military force or strength. 1, 6. 8\ivi«rTT|s, -ou, 5, man of power, officer, nobleman. 8, 20. Svvaro's, -ii, -6", able^ possible; ^ Sura- rhv liihurra, as much as possible. 3, 15. Svo, two. 1, 1. Svir-iropEUTos, -ov, hard or difficult to pass through or along. 5, 7. 8u, Siiirii). See 8C8)u. 8(&SeKa, twelve. 2, 10. Supov, -ou, t6, gift. 3, 37. E. edv, followed by the subj., if; ikv /lii, if not, unless, except. See tjv, av. cavToC, -ijs, sui, of himself. 1, S. cd(i), eatrai, permit, allow. 4, 7. cPo'd. See Podu. e'Y7VSj comp. eyyinpov or -repca, Superl. -Tcirft) or -yiiTaTa, near. S, 8, c7Evd|iifv, l7fYv6|iT]v. See YCyvoiiai. 17-Ke'Xcuo-Tos, -Of, bidden, urged on. 3, 13. 47-KpaT^s, -«, in power over, master of. 7,7. cYvu. See yiyvdirKa. iy&, I. 3, 3. •h/ayt, I for my part, equidem. 4, 8. cSel, €8€£to. See Scco. E8cio'av. See ScCSw. cSoiKa. See SCSci)|u. 'i\,av. See ^dii>. e6c\ovttjs, -ov, S, volunteer; as adj., willing. 6, 9. I64\u, -Tia-a, ii8e\riirtt, rjfle'Xrjifo, be will- ing, wish. 2, 26. eSeiiTiv, c6i]Kc. See TiStipii. c6vos, -ovs, Ti, tribe, nation ; Kar iBvi], according to nations, by tribes. 8, 9. A, if, whether ; ei iii), unless ; ei 5e fi^, but if not. 2, 2. tia,, eloura. See cdo). etS^vai. See olSa. clSov. See opdu. (tSu, etSis. See otSa. el!i)v, £tr|'n|i.C. 2, 5. «i)|i.(. els, prep, with the ace, into, against; with num., as much as, about. 1, 2. els, fiia, eV, 0726. 2, 6. ela--d7ii>, ZfiatZ or bring into. 6, 11. etir-pd\\(i>, throw into, enter; of rivers, etc., empty into. See pdWu. 2, 31. el(r-Po\^, -^s, ^, entrance. 2, 21. etir-6i(jii, come orgointo ovin, enter. 7, 8. el(r-eXailvu, ride or mafcfe f»(o, enter. See eXaivd). 2, 26. et(r-e\6elv. See eto--4pxo|jLai. eto--epxo)i.ai, come or go into, enter. See epxo)i.ai. 2, 31. el(r-T[eiv, -^irav. See e1Iir-ei|ii. etir-^Xao-a, -^Xao-ev. See etir-eXavvu. tlcr-i]\6i]. See elir-d7a>. eio-oiiai, -erai. See olSa. eto'-inf8do>, -iiffofiai, leap into. 5, 8. eio-tt), within. 3, '21. etra, Wien, jiexJ, thereupon, afterwards. 2, 16. etxov. See eX"*- Ik. See ej. ^Kao-Tos, -7), -Of, eacA; plur., several, severally. 1, 6. etuv. See ed(i>. exdrepos, -a, -01', either, each of two. 8,27. VOCABULARY. 395 kKaripaitv, from each sidle, on each or both sides. 8, 13. cKaTEpuo-E, to each side, towards both sides. 8, 14. EKardv, one hundred. Z, 25. ^K-pdWu, throw or drive out, expel. See pdUw. 1, 7. IK-Sepo), (^depa, ideipa, SeSapfiai, iSdprjv'), skin, flay. 2, 8. Iksi, there, in that place. 3, 20. ^Kcivos, -V, -0, that, that one ; he, she, it. 1, 4. £K-Ka\virTa>, uncover. 2, 16. eKK\T)o-Cdr -as, rj, assembly. 3, 2. cK-KXtvu, bend out of position; give way. 8, 19. cK-KO)i(£(i), bring or /eicTi OMi. 5, 8. tK-KOTTTw, cmJ o?(J, ci^, or down. See 8ia-K6irT. 4, 10. ^K-KV|i.aCvcii, -3va, bend (in any direc- tion) like a wave. 8, 18. EK-XcCiru, leave, abandon, forsake. See XcCirta. Cf. eclipse. 2, 24. £K-ircirT(i)K(is. See ^K-irtirrw. ^K-irtTTTcii, fall out, be banished; ui iicireirTui<6Tfs, the exiles. See TfTrroi. 1,7. cK-irXa7ECs. See Ik-itX'^jttw. iK-irX'fJTTw, strike out of one's senses ; terrify, ama?e. 6, 13. lK-iro8(iv, out from under the feet, out of the way. 6, 9. 4kti&|i.t|v. See KTdo)iai. lK-(|>cii7(D, flee out or forth, escape. See EV7(a. 3, 2. iK&v, -ovaa, -6v, willing, of one's own accord; willingly. 1, 9. cXa^ov. See XaitPdvu. ^Xavvo), ^KSi, fiKaaa, iK^Kaxa, iAi}Katiai, iiKiOnv, drive, ride, march. 2, 23. IXd(|>ELos, -ov, of or belonging to a deer; i. Kp4a, venison. 5, 2. IXeCv, cXcVSai. See atpecii. «XeXi{u, raise the war-cry. 8, 18. cXc^a, ^XexOrjv. See X^7u. IXcvBcpCd, -as, Ti, freedom. 1, 3. 4Xyi(j>6T|v. See Xa|i.pdv, bring or conduct out; induce. See avu. 6, 10. e|-aiTe'c>>, ask or demajM? /j'om or back; mid., fie^f o#. See atrcu. 1, 3. c|aKi.ir\tXi.oi, -ai, -a, six thousand. 7,11. cgaK6, drive out; intransitive, ride forth, march. See IXavvu. 2, 6. c£-eX6£iv. See l|-^pxo)jiai. i^-i\nrov. See lK-Xeiir(i>. «J-^PXO|nit, come or go out, escape- See cpxojiat. 3, 17. f^ircurii, -eas, f/, review, examination. 2, 9. «J-^«Yov, -«<|>D'Ye. See ix-^d'^a. el-fjXBov. See 4^-Epxo|iai. IJ-^X^'T'- ^^^ IJ-d-yw. c^-i.Kv^o|i,ai, come forth to, reach. See a^iKvio[i.ai. 8, 19. l$-C(rTT)|i,i, mid., stand out or away from. See Xa"n\f.i. 5, 14. iS£o)i,Ev. See ex' l$-oirXCtu, arm fully or completely. 8, 3. 4|oirXi(rCd, -or, ri, state of being fully armed ; full armor. 7, 10. €|, adv., outside; rh i^a, the outside or outer. 4, 4. 'eiraSov. See ^dtrxu. eir-a\,via, -eVw, -rfveffa, applaud, praise, commend. 3, 7. Iir€£, conj., when, after; since (causal). 1,1. liTEiSdv, conj. with subj., whenever. 4,8. Eir«iS'^, when indeed, after. 2, 17. eir-a\i.i, be upon or over. 2, 5. tir-ciiii, come against, attack, advance. 2, 17. 'eirtura, eTr«Co-9i]v; See ireCSu. ^ircira, thereupon, then, afterwards, next, moreover. 3, 10. lir-eXiirev. Seeeiri-XeCiru. lv-fiTT'i\v. See l<|>-C(rTi]|». Iir-xfeiv, -fjo-av. See cir-€i|i.i (2). Iir-flv. See cir-Ei|u (1). Iiryiv, conj. with subj., lohen, whenever. 4, 13. Iir-u'veo-av. See 4ir-aiv4(ii. Iirt, prep. ; with gen., on, upon; 4irl TETTapajc, in fours, -four deep; e0' TifiZv, in our time; with dat., at, upon, for (purpose); 4ir\ Toirtf, for that object ; iwl 6a.vi.Tif, to death ; iiri Tiio aSe\(i>, plot against. 1, 3. em^ovXif, -rjs, t), conspiracy, plot. 1, 8. €^i-SciKvv)ii, show, exhibit. See diro- SeCKvvp,!.. 2, 14. Iiri-6clvai, Eiri.-6u, -fj. See liri-TC6T|p,i.. eiri-Kd|jiirTa, xeKpvfifiai, tKpidTTu, slay upon or over. 8, 29. liriT^Scios, -a, -ov, suitable, fitting ; to, ^TTiT^Scia, provisions. 3, 11. liri-T£9Ti|i.i, pUace upon; i. SIktiv, inflict punishment on. See t(6t|)jii. 3, 10. Iiri-Tp^irw, turn or give over to, entrust, permit. See rp^iru. 2, 19. Iin-xup^u, moBe itpon or against, ad- vance. 2, 17. Itt-k&v, -owa, -6v. See Eir-eipii (2). cirX£v(ra. See irX^u. Siroiiai, etj/ofiai, firir6fii/]i', follow. 3, 6. IittA, septem, seven. 2, 5. lirTa-K6(rioi, -ai, -a, seven hundred. 4,3. 'Eir^ofa, -ns, Tj, Epyaxa. 2, 12. cirvBcTo, lin)66)i.T|v. See mivOdvofiai. 4p£t. See (|>'n|i.C, etirov. cpr|p.05, -n, -OP, or -OS, -ov, deserted, desert ; deprived of, without. 3, 6. iflt/a, strive, contend, vie leith. 2, 8. Ip|ii)vciis, -EMJ, i, interpreter. 2, 17. cpopiai, ipiiao/iai, 2 aor. T)p6iii)v, ask; only flit, and 2 aor. used in Attic Greek. See ^purdu. 7, 9. cpvfta, -oToj, t6, defence, protection. 7, 16. ^ Ipv|iv6s, -fi, -iv, fortified, strong (of a fort). 2, 8. epXO|>.ai, i\ev, ask. 3, 18. icrSCo), ^So/iai, iipayov, iiifioKa, iSriSeirfiiai, T)S4aBT\v, eat. 5, 6. l(ro(|i.T|v, eo-Ttti, ka-ri, lirT£(v). SeeetuC. i'o-TTiKo, €. en, yet, still; hereafter, afterwards; again, any longer. 1, 4. ^TOi|i,as, -77, -ov, or -OS, -ov, ready. 6, 3. Srpuira. See rirpi&o-Kiii. enixov. See rvy\6,vu. fv, adv., well. 3, 4. eiiSai|iovC£oi, congratulate. 7, 3. ci8aC|i,(i>v, -on, having a good genius, fortunate, prosperous. 2, 6. Eu^SEia, -OS, fi, simplicity, folly. 3, 16. £^'^61)5, -es, simple, foolish. 3, 16. evBis, immediately, straightway, at once. 5, 8. ciivoia, -as, v, good will. 8, 29. cvvoiKus, well disposed, friendly ; eiv. ex^iv, be well disposed, friendly. 1, 5. €vpEiv. See cvpCo-Ku. cvpCcTKU, evp^oo), riupov, rivpriKa, -rj/ini, rjupfflrji/, find. 2, 25. cfpos, -ous, T((, width, breadth. 2, 5. Evra^Cd, -as, ^, pfood order, arrange- ment, discipline. S, 8. ei-Tuxew, 6e successful. 4, 17. 398 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. Ev4ipaTT]s, -ou, i, Euphrates. See Map. 4,11. ciixoiiai, pray, wish earnestly, vow. 4,7. cv-u8t]s, -es, fragrant. 5, 1. €v-(ivu|ios, -ov, of good name or omen, euphemistic for apidvi)v. See ifiafvu. c(|>a(rav. See i|>r||ji,C. "Eilica-os, -ov, 71, Ephesus. See Map. 4,2. 4<|>-Ho-T'/|Kcirav. See l-Co"n)iJii. c<|>r)v, cr]|ji(. cif>-C(rTr|)ii,, iiri-CTliira, place Or set upon or ire; maSe halt, bring to a stop; mid., stand by or ot)er, command. See ivYov. See <|>EV7. 4x9p<5s, -ov, 6, personal enemy, foe. 3, 6. t\a, impf. elxov, e{w or axh<"'> ^"X""' ecrxva, ^irxW', (^"'X^^l''), have, hold; fumiKas 4., be well disposed; oStois 4., be so, in this condition; kokSs 4., be in bad condition; 4x^- /J.SVOS, taking hold of, coming next, adjoining. 1, 2. ^i|ro|iai. See ciropiai. (iputv, It&pd. See opdcii. ?s, Ua, ri, Attic 2d decl., dawn. 1, 1. ?(os, conj., while, as long as; until. 3, 11. t,6.a, -^(Tm, pres. infin. ffjv, live. 5, 5. XfvfvvfX, feufrn, eC^u^a, eCeuy/iai, 4Ciyi)v, yoke, join. Jj&t. jungo. 2,5. Zeus, Ai6s, 0, Zeus, the king of gods and men. 7, 9. t,i[v. See Jdw. £r|\(DTs, sweetly, gladly. 2, 2. ffir\, now, already, at length, at last. 2,1. T|8iis, -6(a, -i, comp. TjStup, superl. fiSuTTos, sweet, delicious, fine. 4, 9. r)8o|jLat, TiaBijaoiiai,, 'ioBriv, be pleased, be glad. Z, 18. XJ'eiv, ffco-av. See etfu. J]6cXe, iiSeXov. See lO^Xu.' ilKw, TJIa, be come, have come, have arrived. 2, 1. TJVacra, -e, rjXavvov. See 4Xailvci>. iJXSov. See i'pxo|iai. 2, 18. T|\C-PaTos, -av, impassible, precipitous. 4,4. T||ids, ^liEts, plur. of 4y6, we. t||i.£Xt])Uv(iis, carelessly. 7, 19. T||jicpd, -as, ri, day. 2, 6. T||i.ETcpas, -a, -ov, our. 3, 9. T||u-SdpEiK6v, -ov, t6, half-daric. 3, 21. T||j.i,-6Xios, -o, -oc, one and one-half, a half more. 3, 21. j^iumis, -eia, -v, half; as substantive, a half. 8, 22. T||ii-o)P6Xiov, -ou, r6, a half obol. See oPoXds. 5, 6. T]v, = lav, if, with subjunct. 1, 4. TJv. See EtfjiC. TJve>. See ctipCo-KO). 0. 6', for Tf, by elision before an initial rough vowel. 6d\aTTa, -rjj, ri, sea. 1, 7. 6dvaTos, -on, 6, death. 6, 10. 6app^aKOs, -ou, ri, Tkapsacus. See Map. 4,11. ScdofiLai, -dtro/iat, mid. dep., behold, see, view. 5, 8. 6ctv. See tia, run. 6cios, -a, -oy, divine, miraculous, mar- vellous. 4, 18. 6^|tcvo5, 6^vT€s. See TC6r)|i.i, 6e6s, -ov, 6, deity, god. 4, 8. Oepdiruv, -ovtos, 6, servant. 8, 28. 6^ir6ai. See tC6t)|i.i. @CTTa\(d, -cij, Ti, Thessaly, the most northern country of Greece. 1, 10. OcTTttXds, -ou, i, a Thessalian. 1, 10. fl^ca, eeiaoiuu, run. 8, 18. 6cup^a>, view, review, e.g., an army. 2, 10. Btipdu, -iaa, hunt wild animals. 5, 2. 0r)pEvi',Td, Thoana. See Map. 2,20. 66pvPos, -ov, S, noise. 8, 16. 0pa|, -ic6s, 6, a Thracian, a native of Thrace, whether (1) in southern Europe, or (2) in northwestern Asia Minor, called also Bithynian Thrace. 1,9. Ov|i.ppiov, -ov, t6, Thymbrium. See Map. 2, 13. 6vpd, -or, Tt, gate, door. 2, 11. 9«ci>, Btau, %9vaa, reBuKa, TeBufiai, iriBriv, sacrifice. 2, 10. 6c&pd|, -oKos, S, breastplate. 8, 3. I. idofiai, -dcro/iai, dress or heal a wound. 8,26. idrpds, -ov, S, physician. 8, 26. IScCv, ISovcra, ISiSv. See opdu. tSios, -a, -01/, own, private ; els rh tSioy, for private use. 3, 3. l8i, (civ. See Et|u. Up6s, -a, -6i/, sacred; to hpd, the omens indicated by the sacrifices. 8, 15. £-l)(J,l, ijfl-to, ^/co, ftxa, ilfiai, ii9l\v, send, throw; mid., send one's self, rush, hasten. 5, 8. iKavds, -i), -6v, enough, able. 1, 5. 'Ikoviov, -ou, t6, Iconium, a city of Phrygia. See Map. 2, 19. il\.T], -r)f, 71, troop, chiefly of horse, prob- ably sixteen front and four deep. 2, 16. tva, conj. with subj. or opt., that, in order that. 3, 4. IdvTss, WvTos, IdvTMv, etc. See cl)jii. iirircus, -e'as, &, horseman; plur., cav- alry. 2, 4. tirirLKds, - 'nrirwdi', the cavalry. 3, 12. 400 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. lirird-Spo|i.os, -ov, S, race-course. Cf. Eug. HIPPO-DROME. 8, 20. Ittttos, -ou, d, horse; oTrii 'lirvou, on horse- back. 2, 7. lo-os, -ri, -ov, cf . Eng. iso-sceles, equal ; eV Ifiriji, in an even line, with equal step. 8, 11. "lo-o-oC, -Sii/, 01, Issi or Issus, in eastern Cilioia, at the northeast corner of the Mediterranean. See Map. 2, 24. ia-Tt. See otSa. 1^(rTt)(j.i, trriiircof etTTtjffa, itTTTiv, eVrr^'ca, -effra/iai, iirriSriy, trans. tenses (pres., impf., tut., 1 aor.), cause to stand, halt, set, place ; e, Ionian. 1, 6. Ka9', by elision for Kari, before a rough vowel. Ka8-^^0|iai, impf. iKa6eC6fi.riv, sit down, halt, rest. 5, 9. Ka6-ev8(i>, lie down to sleep, sleep. 3, 11. Ka9-i]8u-ira6^(>>, squander or waste in luxury. 3, 3. Kad-i\Kta, come down, extend down; belong to, as a duty. See TiKu. 4, 4. Kde-T]|i,ai, sit down, sit; of an army, be stationed. 3, 12. Ka6-C or Kouo, tcavtrco, cKavffa, KsKuvKa, -fiat, ixaietiv, bum. 6, 1. Kaxtous. See Kaxds. KaKlO-TOS. See KOKOS. KaKbs, -ii, -6v, comp. Kaittiov, superl. KdicuTTos, bad, base, cowardly. 3, 18. KaKus, badly, ill; «. Toieai, harm, wrong; k. exa, be in a bad con- dition ; K. irpdrra, fare badly. 4, 8. KdXa|ios, -ou, d, reed. 5, 1. KaX^cii, KaKco, ifcdKeaa, K€K\r]Ka, KeK\rifiai, sK\it$riv, call, summon, invite. 2, 2. KaXds, -it, -6v, beautiful, honorable ; of omens, favorable. 2, 22. KaXus, beautifully, well, honorably; K. irpaTTia, fare well, succeed; k. %X'"i ^c well, be in a good condition. 2, 2. Kav, by crasis for koI dv. KdvSvs, -vos, 6, a Persian long outer garment, robe. It was made of woolen cloth, with loose, flowing sleeves, and was colored purple or some other bright color. 5, 8. Kain)XEiov, -ov, t6, booth, shop. 3, 24. KairlSi), -7)j, ri, capithe, a Persian measure, equal to 2|^ choenixes, or 2.3 litres, about 2 quarts. 5, 6. KaiTTraSoKld, -as, rj, Cappadocia, a province of central Asia Minor, north of the Taurus mountains. See Map. 2, 20. Kdpa-os, -ou, 6, the Oarsus. See Map. 4,4. Kdp(|>r), -HIS, 71, hay. 6, 10. Kao-TuXds, -ov, ri, Castolus, a plain in western Asia Minor, near Sardis. 1,2. Kara, prep.; with gen., dovm from. VOCABULARY. 401 down, down along ; with ace, down along, along, against; ksto yriv, by land; nar tScrj, according to tribes or nations; koto x"^?*"! *" (the proper) place. 1,7. Kara-Palvu, come or go down, descend, dismount. See paCvu. 2, 23. Kar-a^a-yoi. See KaT-d-yw. KaT-a7u, lead or bring down or 6acA;, restore; mid., march or g'o &ac^, rehini. See 0.7(1). 1, 7. Kora-Svu, cause to sink; intr., sink. See IvSiSu. 3, 17. KaTa-6Edo)tai, -ao-o/iai, ^a^e (Zoicn u^on, look out towards. 8, 14. Kara-Kalvu, -/cacai, s?ay, pMt to death. 6,2. KaTa-Ka(£i7(i>, flee for refuge, escape. 5, 13. KaT-^PT|v. See Kara-PaCvu. KaT-E64p,T]v. See KaTa-TC6T)|j[,i. KaT-EX^i)>6T)v. See KaTa-Xap,pdva). KOT-^(rTT|v. See Ka6-C|j.ai. KcXaivaC, -wv, ai, CelcEnce, a city in Phrygia. 2, 7. keXcvu, -era, EKcAeuira, KCKfAfvKa, Kexe- \cv(Tiiai, (KsKeiaBriv, order, bid, com- mand. 1, 11. KEvos, -■!), -6^, empty; foil, hy gen., without. 8, 20. K£pd|ji(i)v d70pa, -as, ■'), Ceramon Agora, Tile Market (cf. Newmarket), a market-town in Phrygia. 2, 10. KEpdvvv)i.i, (Kepdaa), ixepaaa, Kcxpafiai, ixpuBTiv or iKepia6T]v, mix, mingle, usually wine and water. 2, 13. K^pas, -aTos or -£1.5, T(f, horri; wing, of an army. 7, 1. KE(|iaX^, -!j$, ^, ^ead. 8, 6. KiXiK(d, -as, ri, Oilicia, the southeast- ern province of Asia Minor. 2, 20. K(Xig, -iKos, 6, a Cilician. 2, 12. KCXios, -v, -ov, light, i.e., not heavy; of .grass, dry. 5, 10. Kpdvos, -ous, r6, helmet. Cf. Eng. CKANinM. 2, 16. • Kpar^ci), -Vto, have power over, be mas- ter of, conquer. 7, 8. KparicTTOs. See Kpiirrav. S, 8. KpaTos, -ous, t6, strength, power; Kara Kpiros, with all one's strength.; iivh KpaTos, at full speed. 8, 1. Kpav^^, -Tjs, ri, shout. 2, 17. Kp^as, Kpeais, t6, flesh, mea!t. 5, 2. KpefTTiDv, KpaTiffTos, comp. and superl. of a.yae6s, stronger, superior, better, higher in rank. 2, 26. KpE|i.avvv)i,i, hang up, suspend. 2, 8. Kpi\vr\, -ns, Ti, spring, well, fountain. 2, 13. Kp^s, KprjTifs, 6, a Cretan, a native of Crete, a large island in the Mediter- ranean. 2, 9. Kpl6fj, -ijs, ii, usually plnr., barley. 2,22. Kptvu, Kpivta, ixplva, KeKpLKa, KeKptfiaL, fKpid-itv, judge, decide. Cf. Eng. CRITIC. 5, 11. Kpto-is, -etos, T], trial. Cf. Eng. crisis. 6, 5. Kpvirro), Kpv^^(a, iKpv^a, KeKpu/nfiat., iKp6- ipBnv or -priv, hide, conceal. Cf. Eng. CRYPT. 4, 12. KTao|j.ai, acquire ; perf. KcKTrj/ioi, I have acquired for myself, possess. 7, 3. K.Ti\a-las, -00, 6, Ctesias. 8, 26. 'K.iZvoi,-ov, d,Cydnus. See Map. 2,23. kvkXos, -ou, S, circle. Cf. ctclb, bi- cycle. 5, 4. KVKXdu, encircle, surround. 8, 13. kvkXuo-is, -eais, fi, a surrounding, an encircling. 8, 23. Evpos, -ov, 6, Cyrus. 1, 1. KuXio), prevent, hinder. 2, 21. K&f.i\, -ijs, ri, village. 4, 9. VaP^tv, -01, -&v. See Xafipdvu. XaSetv. See XavBdvco. Xd6pd or XoSpf , secretly, without the knowledge of. 3, 8. AaKcSaipuivios, -ou, 6, a Spartan, Lace- dmmonian. The Lacedsemonians lived in the southeastern part of the Peloponnesus. 1, 9. Xa)i.pdvai, Kif^aiiai, eAa^ov, Elf\i)0a, eth'Ti/i/jLai, 4\iiii>ffriii, take, seize, cap- ture. 1, 2. XafiirpbTTis, -rjroj, ri, brightness, splen- dor. 2, 18. Xav6dvo}| A^o-fu, e\a6oif, \c\Tida, -fffxat, escape the notice of; generally used with a participle, and then best trans- lated secretly, the participle being translated as tbe main verb, e.g., Tpe(p6iievos iKivBave, he was secretly nourished. 1, 9. X^Y", Xyjuj, e\€^a, (flpriKa), \f\fyiuu, i\4x9riv, say, speak. 2, 8. XcCirco, \ei}^u, ^\nrov, \e\ot'jra, \e\eififjiai, ^KeiipB-nv, leave. 2, 21. XcXoiTcis. See XeCiro). Xc^div. See Xcyu. XEUK0-B(6pd$, -axos, 6, fi, having a white breastplate or corselet. See 6(ipa|. 8,9. XevK6s, S], -io, bright, white. 8, 8. Xi]<|>6{jvai, X'/ji|/op,ai. See Xaiipdvoi. X(6os, -ou, 6, stone. Litho-gbaph. 5, 13. Xifids, -ov, 6, hunger. 5, 5. \6yoi, -ov, d, word, rumor, argument. 4,7. Xivx^i, -ns, ri, spear-head, spear. 8, 8. VOCABULARY. 403 \0xa7Cd, ,-asi Vj a captaincy, position of captain. 4, 15. Xox-d^ds, -oB, 6, leader of a company {\6xos), captain. 7, 2. Xi5x°s, -ov, 6, company, of soldiers, con- sisting of 100 men. 2, 25. Av8£d, -as, 71, Lydia, the west central province of Asia Minor. 2, 5. A0810S, -5, -01', Lydian. 5, 6. AvKaia {Up£), -av, ri, the Lyccean Fes- tival, celeBrated. by the Arcadians each spring in honor of Zeus, on the Lycsean range. 2, 10. AvKdovtd, -as, ti, Lycaonia, a country in the central part of Asia Minor. 2, 19. Xv|iaCvo|i,ai, kviiavov/jutt, ruin, spoil. 3, 16. Xvir^u, pain, grieve, trouble, annoy. 3, 8. M. )ia, adv. of swearing followed by ace, nay, surely; jui robs Beois, nay, by the gods. 4, 8. MaCavSpos, -ov, S, the Mmander river. Meander. 2, 7. fjiaKpds, -&, -6v, long. 5, 7. |i({\d, comp. imWov, superl. ful\i, ii.eK'iiaa, ifiiKriaa, iJ,eni\iiKa, -ri/iai, e^e^^Srjy, care for. 8, 1. plpvr)pai, pspv^o-EO-Oai. See pipv^o-Ku. M^vuv, -avos, 6, Menon. 2, 6. p^v, postpos. particle, on the one hand; reg. foil, by an adversative Se, on the other hand. See Note, Less. I. 1, 1. P&-T01, assuredly, however, neverthe- less. 3, 9. fi,iva, (UEi/S, Ifieiva, jue/iexTj/co, remain. 2,6. pspos, -ovs, TO, part, portion. 5, 8. pco--ir|pPpCd, -as, 71, mid-day; south. 7,6. p^o-05, -ri, -ov, middle ; rh . /lea-ov, the middle. 2, 7. 404 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. Hco-To's, -ii, -if, full. 4, 19. (lero, prep, with gen. or ace. ; with gen., with; /ierh adiKids, with, by means of, injustice; with ace., after. 2, 24. |i,ETa-ii^\€i., poenitet, it repents; fi.. a-ai, you repent. 6, 7. |UTa|v, adv., used as prep, with the gen., between. 7, 15. HeTa-ireiiiTTos, -oy, sent after. 4, 3. |i€To-ir^(iiri Aia, yea, by Zeus. 7, 9. vi)ES. See vaSs. viKoLo), -^(j-m, conquer. 2, 8. vtKT), -jjj, 71, victory. 5, 8. vo(j.Ciuv, -ui/Tos, 6, Xenophon. 8, 15. B'pS'IS, -ov, b, Xerxes. 2, 8. fiiXivos, -r;, -ov, wooden. 8, 9. gvXov, -ou, T(f, wood, piece of wood. 6, 12. 6, T|, t6, the article, the; h nh . . . 5 de, this . . . that, the one . . . the other, the former . . . the latter; 6 Se, and he, but he; frequently poss., e.g., TTpbs rhv i.Se\tli6i/, tO his brother ; freq. = those who, e.g., tovs ^KTrcTTTaiKifToj, THOSE WHO had been exiled. 1, 1. 8. See 0$. oPoXds, -ov, 6, obol, about 3 cents. 6, 6. 88£, 5iSe, T(S5e, this, this one, the follow- ing. I, 9. 68<5s, -ov, ii, way, route, journey. 2, 13. 8Bev, whence. 2, 8. 01, see 0. oi, see o$. ol, end., see ov. oI8a, I know ; perf . with a pres. mean- ing; xt^P'" o^*"! 6e grateful; fut., eifTOfiai. 3, 5. otKaSe, homeward. 2, 2. o(k^, inhabit; irdKis olKovfiiinj, an in- habited city. 1, 9. oIko-So|j.e(i), build (house, palace, etc.). 2,8. oEkoi, at home; ol oUoi, those at home. 1,10. otKnCpo), pity. 4, 7. ot|iai, think; often parenthetic, me- thinks. See otofiai. 3, 6. otvos, -ou, d, vinum, wine. 2, 13. otofiai, o'fl\irep, stronger than olos, of just which kind or nature. 3, 18. oItivcs. See 8o'tis. otxopiai, olxhaoiiai, pres. as peri:., be gone, have gone. 4, 8. oKv^u, hesitate, be reluctant. 3, 17. oKTaKoo-ioi, -XI, -a, eight hundred. 2, 9. oKT(i), eight. 2, 6. oXeOpos, -ou, 6, destruction. 2, 26. oXC-yos, -71, -ov, small, little (in quan- tity) ; plur-, few; o\lyou {Set), al- most. 5, 14. oXkols, -dSos, Ti, freight-vessel, mer- chantman. 4, 6. oXos, -57, -ov, whole, entire. 2, 17. 'OXvvBtos, -ov, 6, an Olynthian, native of Olynthus, an important city in the Chalcidian peninsula. 2, 6. ofiaX'fis, -4s, even, level. 5, 1. 6[iaXus, evenly. 8, 14. 6p.o((i)s, in like manner. 3, 12. 6|i.oXo7£u, acknowledge, confess, admit. 6,7. 6)i,o-Tpairc£os, -ov, 6, adj. used as noun, table-companion. 8, 25. 8|i(i>s, yet, still, nevertheless. 3, 21. 8v. See 8s. Svo|i.a, -aros, t6, name. 2, 23. ovos, -ou, 0, ass; S. a\eTr]s, millstone. 5,2. SvTos, -Es, etc. See etfiC. o-ircp. See oV-irtp. 8-irr|, whither, in what way or direc- tion. 3, 6. oiruritv, from behind, in the rear. 7, 9. oirXC^u, arm, put on armor. 8, 8. oirXfTTjs, -ov, S, heavy-armed soldier, hoplite. 1, 2. 8'TrXov, -ou, t6, plur., rit SirAa, armor, arms. 2, 2. 6ir6(ros, -ti, -ov, how large soever; as much as; plur., how many soever, as many as. 1, 6. oiroTe, whenever, when (indefinite). _ 2,. 7. 8irov, wherever ; o'lrou /i-li, except where. 3, 6. 8iro)s, adv., how, in whatever way; conj., that, in order that. 1, 4. opao), 6\fiofiaL, eJSov, topaxa or liipaKa, oirwjra, e^pd/jLat OV &fifiaL, &tp6T}v, see. 2, 18. op7^ -?s, v, anger. 5, 8. 406 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. op7C^o|jiai, be angry, becnme angry. 2,36. opYvia, -OS, fi, fathom, six feet. 7, 14. SpBios, -Id, -Of, steep, straight up, erect. 2, 31. opitouii, mid., start, set out from. 1, 9. opiiEu, lie at anchor. 4, 3. 'OpdvTQs, -o (Dor. gen.), b, Orontas. 6,1. opos, -ous, t6, mountain. 2, 21. opuKTds, -v, -iv, dug. See bpirra. 7, 14. opvTTO), op'u^u, &pv^a, op^pvxa, -yfiai, apvx9i]>>, dig. 5, 5. 8s, f[, 8, who, which; ou, as adv., where; ^ Suvarhv fiiXurra, OS much as possible. 1, 2. 8. See Sirris. ov, o'jx, ovx, not (denying a fact); ovk tipaaav Uvai, they refused to go. 1, 8. ov. See 8s. 2, 22. ov, ol, i, end., sui, sibi, se, of himself or herself, etc. 1, 8. oiSi, ou5', a»d raoi, nor ; = ne . . . quidem, not even. 2, 25. o^S-eCs, o^Se/xia, oudey, gen. oLfdei^tif, ov5€/zms, (ou5e-|- eJs), not even one, not any, none, no ; as a substantive, nobody, nothing. 1, 8. OVK. See oA. ovK-^Ti, no longer. 8, 17. ovKovv, therefore, then; in questions, so then ? 6, 7. o{iv, postpositive, accordingly, there- fore, then ; be this as it may, at any rate. 1, 2. ov-iroTe, not ever, never. 3, 5. oii-iroi, not yet. 5, 12. ov-ir(i-iroT£, not yet at any time, never before. 4, 18. oiis. See OS. ovo-a, ovo-iv. See eI|iC. ovTE, nor; oire . . . oSrc, neither . . . nor. 2, 26. ovTivos. See Sims. OVTOS, o0T»), rovTO, this, that ; leai toBto, and that too. 1, 7. ovToo--i, auTrjt, romi, Strengthened form of OVTOS, this one here, this . . . here. 6, 6. ovTci)(s), thus, generally as precedes. _ 1, 5. 6i]>£C\(i>, 0(l>ei\'fi(r(a, a^sihriffa or iitjjeXotf, w(pei\riKa, ax^EiA'^dijr, DWe ; pass., be owed, be due. 2, 11. S(|>e\os, t((, only in nom. and ace, use, benefit. 3, 11. 6()>6a\|i6s, -ov, d, eye. 8, 27. oxvpds, -a, -6v, (exa), tenable, strong ; of a stronghold, fortified. 2, 22. n. xaSstv. See icair\ii>. iroBos, -ous, t6, suffering, experience. 5, 14. iraidv(^ surround. See 6x<>>. 2, 22. iKpi.-f\v. See ircp(-ei|jii. wepi-ir«, wKiov, plus, more. 1,6. iro\v-Tc\^s, -es, very expensive, costly. 5, 8. irov^u, ?a6or, toil. 4, 14. iropECa, -as, T], journey. 7, 20. iropEvop.ai, proceed, march, journey. 2, 1. iro'ppo), far away, far from, often with gen. 3, 12. uop<|>vo{)s (j-ios), -a (-e'o), -ovv (-eoy), purple. 5, 8. iroo-C. See irovs. iroTa|jLo$, -oB, i, river. Cf. hippo-pota- Mus. 2, 5. iroW, af some iime, once. 5, 7. iroTtpov, Mfrum, whether. 4, 13. irov, anywhere; perhaps. 2, 27. xois, iroScfy, &, foot. 2, 8. irpd7|ji,a, -otoj, t(<, (Zeeci, affair ; plur., business; trouble; cf. irpdrTu. 1, 11. irpacuv. See irpaos. irpdvjjs, -6'r, sJeep, headlong. 5, 8. irpofis, -ewr, ^, business, undertaking. 3, 16. irpaos or irp^os, -em, -oi/, mi7d, toMie. 4,9. irpdTTO), 7rpa|b;, CTrpafo, TreTrpaT-o or -x«j ■n4wpayij,ai, inpdxBii', do, effect, accom- plish; c5 TT., /ore weiZ; Kaxas n., fare ill. 6, 6. irpaus, mildly. See irpdos. 5, 14. Trpeo-pus, -ems, COmp. -inpos, old. Cf. PRESBYTER. 1, 1. irpCatrSai. See uvEOfiai. irpCv, conj., before, freq. with vp6aSeii preceding. 1, 10. irpd, prep, witli the gen., before; in front of, before (temporal) ; iii be- half of . 2,17. irpo-ai., throio before ; mid., throw before one's self; Tpoffdwead^n ra Sir\a, present arms. See pd\\u. 2, 17. irpo-SCSuiu, prodo, give up, betray. See SCSu)i,i. 3, 5. irpo-So'vra, irpo-Sovs. See irpo-S(8(a)ti. irpo-8pa|jLdvT«s, -|ii&v. See irpo-TpE'\o. irpo-ciSov. See irpo-opd(i>. icp6-af.i, go forward. 2, 17. irpo-eiirov, speak forth, proclaim. See ttirov. 2, 17. irpo-€io'T^K£iv. See irpo-CcrTTjp.i, irpo-tftiv. See irpb-Eip,!,. irpo-Svixos, -Of, eager, zealous. 3, 19. irpo-6v|i(i)s, eagerly, zealously. 4, 9. irpo-Bvoiiai, sacrifice before (something) or in behalf of (some one). 7, 18. 7rpo-(Soi.Ev, -|u. See irpa-opiiu. irpo-u'vai, -idvTuv. See irpd-eip,i. irpo-C(rTr)|i,i, place in command, set in charge ; intr., command. See io-ttkii. 2, 1. irpo-Kara-KaCu or -kow, burn in ad- vance of 01 before others. See KaCu. 6,2. irpo-KaTa-\ap,pdv(i>, seize in advance of or before others. See XaiJipdvu. 3, 14. irpo-|xcT(i)irCSiov, -ou, t6, protection for the head, head-piece, frontlet. 8, 7. Ilpdgcvos, -on, 6, Proxenus. 1, 11. 410 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. irpo-opdu, see beforehand or in front. 8,20. irpos, prep, witli the gen., dat., and aoc. ; with gen., in front of; wphs eea>y, in the sight of the gods; irphs rov Tp6Trou, in accord with the character; with dat., at, in addi- tion to ; with ace., to, towards ; with reference to. 1, 3. irpocr-aiTew,- ask in addition, ask besides. See alTcai. 3, 21. irpo. •irpo, take in addition or besides. See Xajjipdvu. 7, 3. irpo. 4, 14. •irpo-Tp6xaCv(i>, mid., appear in sight. 8, 1. irpd-(|>a(ris, -ews, r,, pretext. 1, 7. TrpuTOS, -r}, -oy, first / irpSiroy, adv., primum, first; comp. irp6Tepos. 2, 16. TTTepvl, -vyos, ri, wing. 5, 3. nii8o7er, up to this or tftaf Jime. 6, 11. iTMs, ftow? 7, 2. ircls, end., somehow; £S4 was, about as follows. 7, 9. P. p€ci>, pe^ffOfiai or fivfjao/xai, i^^irjKa, ifi^itjv, flow. 2, 7. ptTTTW, p7i//ci;, cppi^^a, e^^l(pa, -fifiai, e^^i- /, throw. 5, 8. S. o-aXTft^u, 6toi« the trumpet. 2, 17. Sajiios, -ou, 6, a Samian. Samos was a very important island lying off the west central part of Asia Minor. 7, 5. SdpSEis, -eiop, at, Sardis, on tlie river Pactolus ; the capital of Lydia. 2, 2. VOCABULARY. 411 o-arpaircxia), be satrap, govern as satrap. 7,6. iraTpain)s, -ov, S, satrap, governor of a province under the Persian king. 1,2. Sdrvpos, -ou, S, a satyr, Silenus in Anab. 2, 13. us, clearly. 4, 18. o-eavToO, -tjs, or travroO, -rjs, of thyself. 6,7. iriM>), be silent. 3, 2. iTKEirrcos, -a, -ov, to be considered. 3, 11. (rK4irT0|iiai or a-KOir^u, (rKeiffO^uai, ^(Tke- ■^ilit]", itTKeiiiiii, look at, view, ex- amine, watch. See o-keitt^os. opos, -ov, baggage-carrying ; subs., neut. plur., pack-animals, baggage. 3, 7. o-Kiiv^u, encamp. 4, 9. Cd, -OS, 71, wisdom, (musical) skill. 2, 8. (ro(|>o's, -ti, -iv, wise, accomplished, skil- ful. See a-o4>(d. crirou*>, (nraffo), itncaffa, eo'trcuca, €ffira(T/iai, ioirdoBriv, draw. 8, 29. o-ircvSu, hasten. 3, 14. (TirovS^, -r)s, 71, haste. 8, 4. (rrdSiov, -ou, r6, plur. ra O'TaSia, Or oi o-TciSiDi, sfarfion, little less than a furlong, = about 606 feet. 4, 1. (rTa6|io's, -ov, b, stopping-place, station, day'' s journey, about five parasangs, or fifteen miles. 2, 5. avos, -ou, i5, crown. 7, 7. (rTfjvai,, os, -our, 76, (dense) moss or body. 8, 13. o-tXeyyCs, -iios, 71, strigil, flesh-comb, scraper, tiara. 2, 10. o-ToX^i, -^s, 71, dress, robe. 2, 27. o-To'Xos, -ou, 6, military preparation, expedition. 2, S. , apprehend, arrest. See -XafiPavu. 1, 3. o-iiX-X«7Ci), (Ae'fai, €Ae|a, etAoxi, eiKey/iiii, i\iy till), collect, gather together. 1, 7. , counsel, advise ; mid., confer with, consult. See ^ovXevu. 1, 10. a-. 2, 20. d7iov, f -ov, t6, sacrificial victim ; plur., omens from sacrifices. 8, 15. a-()>Eis, {o-i. See ov, ol, 'i. VOCABULARY. 413 (TXcSCa, -as, ii, raft, float. 5, 10. o-xeSo'v, nearly, almost. 8, 25. o-xC^u, split. 5, 12. (rxoXa((i)5, leisurely. 5, 8. as, -ov, 6, burial, grave. 6, 11. Ta<|>pos, -ov, ri, ditch, trench. 7, 14. Tax6{)vai, raxBefe. See r&rTa. rd.\a, quickly. 8, 8. rax^ws, comp. BarToy, superl. rdxiirTa, quickly. 2, 4. TaxicTTa. See Ta\iepvT|s, -ous, 6, Tissaphernes. 1, 3. TtTp<&O"KC0, Tpiia-Q}, erpataa, rsrpufiai, irpidriv, wound. 8, 26. Toidir-Se, -dSe, -6vSe, such as_, such as this, especially of what follows ; \4yetv ToidSe, to speak as follows. 3,2. ToiovTos, -airt], -ovTo(f'), such, usually referring to what precedes. 3, 14. To$£v|i,a, -aros, t6, arrow. 8, 19. To^iia, shoot the bow ; pass., be struck with an arrow. 8, 20. to|6tt)s, -ov, 6, bowman. 2, 9. Toiros, -ov, b, place. 5, 1. toitoOtos, -avri], -ovto{v), SO great, so much (plur., so many). 3, 14. t6t6, then, at that time. 1, 6. TOu|i.ira\iv. See c|iiraXiv. 4, 15. TpdXXcis, -emi', ai, Tralles, a city in the northern part of Caria, near the Mseander. 4, 8. Tpavp.a, -a-Tos, ri, wound. 8, 26. TpdxT|Xos, -ou, 6, neck, throat. 5, 8. rpets, rpia, tres, three. 1, 10. 414 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. rp^iru, Tp6i|/w, erps^j/a^ Terpotpa^ TeTpafjLfiat, irpaTrrii/, turn. 8, 24. Tp^(|>ci>, dpe^j/cii^ edpe\pa^ Terpo^a, Tedpafifiait iTpd(i>nv, nourish, support. 1, 9. Tpi\(a, SpoLfiovpLat, t^pafiov, SeSpap-iiKa, SeSpdp.ij/j.aii run. 5, 2. TpCa. See rpcis. TpioKovra, thirty. 3, 9. TpiaKoo-ioi., -ai, -a, three hundred. 1, 2. Tpi^pT|$, -ovs, ^, trireme, the Greek war-vessel. 2, 21. rpio-KaCSEKa, thirteen. 5, 4. Tpio-xtXioi, -ai, -o, three thousand. 6, 4. Tp(Tos, -J), -oj", third. 6, 8. TpoTT^I, -^s, ^, a turning, defeat, rout. See tp^iru. 8, 25. Tpoiros, -01/, d, turn, ieay, manner, custom, character. See-Tpeiro). 1, 9. Tpo()>'^, -^r, ri, support, nurture. See Tp^()>(l>. 1, 9. happen, chance, happen or chance upon. 1, 2. Tvpideiov, -ov, t6, Tyrinum. 2, 14. liSwp, SSaros, rii, loafer. 6, 7. iSXi], -7)s, ^, iooo(?, bush, shrubbery. v|j.as, v|jL€ts, v|iiv, vficov. See 0*0. 3, 3. iiir-opxos, -ov, &, subordindte officer, lieutenant. 2, 30. uir-apxu, begin, exist, support, favor. See apx, take under one's pro- tection. See \a)i.pav(ii. 1, 7. viro-\eCir, leave behind; pass., be left behind, stay or fall behind. See XcCiru. 2, 25. viro)ivr||i.a, -aros, ri, reminder, remem- brance. 6, 3. {pir-oirT£vo), suspect. 1, 1. {iiro-x<<)p4iii, withdraw, 'give way, retreat. 4, 18. {iirot|>Ca, -as, tj, suspicion, distrust. See vir-oimita. 3, 21. io-Tcpaios, -a, -ov, next (in time), fol- lowing. 2, 21. do-TEpEci), 6e behind, later than, too late for. 7, 12. licTTepos, -a, -ov, later, behind; Sffrepov, adv.i later, afterwards. 3, 2. vi|;i)Xds, -^, -6v, high. 2, 22. i|>aCT|v. See (|>i])i.C. (fiaCvM, ^afw, et^Tjya, TretftayKa, ireipripa, Tci^aanai, 4d.vitv and iipdi/driv, show ; show one^s self, appear, he seen. 3, 19. c|>aXa7|, -a77os, ^, line or order o/ battle, phalanx. 2, 17. <)>avcpos, -a, -6v, {^(fiaivai], apparent, evi- dent. 3, 21. (|>a'ni'''- ofn^M, ijveyKoy or -ko, ivijVOXa, iviivey/icu, ^vexBrjv, hear, carry, en- dure; x"^^'"'''' ^-j ^^ troubled. 2, 22. VOCABULARY. 415 Tre(p€uya, flee; 6 (peiyoiv, fugitive, exile., 1, 7. c|>i]|i.C, 'l]cra!, f(pri(Ta, say / oS (/>7)jui, refuse, deny; instead of ^ijca> and i^tiaa, ipSi and iiirov are generally used. See etirov. 2, 5. <)>6av(i>, 64YYO|i.aL, jtJter or maA;e a sound, shout. 8, 18. i\Ca, -OS, ri, love, friendship. 3, 5. <|>(\ios, -la, -ov, friendly. 3, 14. i|>CX.os, -ov, S, friend. 1, 2. \vdpCd, -as, ^, /oHj/, nonsense. 3, 17. ope'ci>, frighten ; mid. , /ear. 3, 17. oPos, -on, i, fear. ' 2, 18. <|>oivlKo{i5 (jeos), -Tj (-c'i), -ovv Q-^ov), purple. 2, 16. *oivtKt], -jjj, ^, Phoenicia, a country on the eastern coast of the Mediterra- nean. 4, 5. <|>oiviKi(rT^s, -ov, d, wearer of the pur- ple, courtier. 2, 20. (jiotvil, -iKos, d, palm-tree, espeo. date- palm. S, 10. 4olvi|, -'.Kos, S, a Phoenician. 4, 6. <|>opE(i), wear. 8, 29. (jipa^O), tjypdaco, -era, iretppaKa, -ty^iai, icjypd- a6i\v, show, declare, tell. 6, 3. (|>popovp^(i>, guard, watch. 4, 8. ()>po{lpiov, -cm, t6, watchpost, guard, garrison. 4, 15. *pvyCd, -ds, fi, Phrygia, a country in central Asia Minor. 2, 6. #pvp5, ipvy6s, d, a Phrygian. 2, 13. ijivYcfe, -dSos, 6, fugitive, exile. 1, 9. (jroY^i, -?j, 71, flight. 8, 24. (|>v\aKyi, -fjs, Ti, vigilia, a garrison. See <|>vXdTT(ii. 1, 6. vXa|, -KOS, 6, watcher, guard. Cf. (|>u\aK^. ■ire(j>i\ayiiai, 4(j)v\dxSiiv, watch, guard. 2,1. , ^vta, (pvaw, eas, -ov, 6, Chirisophus. 4, 3. XEppdvijcros, -ov, 7), Chersonese or Chersonesus. 1, 9. xtXioi, -at, -a, one thousand. 2, 3. XiXo's, -ov, 6, hay, fodder. 5, 7. XiTtiv, -uvos, 6, tunic, the garment of linen or wool worn next the body. 2, 16. Xoivi|, -KOS, ri, choenix, about a liter or quart. 5, 6. XopTos, -ov, 6, dry grass, fodder. 5, 5. Xpao|jiai, use, employ, treat, find, with the dat. 3, 5. Xp^i, imperf. ixPV" o^ XPV": infin. XPV"'"' > impersonal, it is necessary, often best, translated with a per- sonal subject one must or ought. 3, 11. XPtftw, desire, wish. 3, 20. XpTj)i.a, -aros, t6, thing; plur., goods, means, wealth. 1, 9. XP'i^vai, see xP'^ > XPl""^'"'''! ^^^ XP"'" ofiai. XP'^o'ip.os, -r), -ov, useful. 6, 1. Xpo'vos, -ov, 6, time. 3, 2. 416 INDUCTIVE GREEK PRIMER. XpvcroCs (-eos), -ij (-f'a), -ovi> (-eop), golden. 2, 10. XP«o-(ov, -oj, TO, gold piece, gold money. 1,9. Xpio-o-xoMvos, -01/, golden-bridled. 2,27. X, give place, make room, go, move, advance ; of a measure, con- tain, hold: 6, 6. Xupfov, -ou, t6, place, stronghold. 2, 24. XupCs, adv., separately, apart; as a prep., with the gen., apart from. 4, 13. '^apos, -3u, 6, ifte Psarus. See Map. 4,1. i|/e'\iov, -ou, T(?, bracelet. 2, 27. tjfcuSci), decewe ; mid., deceive, lie, with aoc., prove false to; pass., he de- ceived. 3, 5. i|fT]ij>(£o)iai, to give one's voJe, vote. 4,15. i)fi\os, -^, -oy, hare, unprotected. 5, 5. n. (oSe, f^MS (as follows). 1, 6. ucTO. See otofiai. uKTCipov. See otKTcCpu. uvcOjjLaL, uvijirofiat, ewpidfiTiv, idvTjfiat, iavl\0Ti\v, buy, purchase. 5, 6. divio, -cav, rd, loares. 2, 18. upd, -as, Ti, hora, season, suitable time, hour. 3, 11. uipfiovv. See 6p|j.Ea>. lis: (1) adv., as, how, so as; with numerals, about; with superlatives, as possible; with participles, saying that, on the ground that ; (2) conj., temporal, as, when; declarative = on, that; causal, since, as; final, that, in order that, with subj. and opt.; (3) prep, with the ace. of a person, to, against 1, 2. ws, thus, so, like oBt-wj. 8, 21. c«r-irsp, just as, just as if. 3, 9. Hum, so as, so that. 1, 5. wtCs, -ISos, Ti, bustard. 5, 2. u(|>E\e(D, help, assist, benefit. 1, 9. a>(|>E'X.i|i,os, -01', helping, useful, benefi- cial. 6, 2.